Especificaciones sujetas a modificación sin previo aviso.

ALCAD diseña y fabrica sus productos con las mejores características posibles, sin embargo los productos fabricados actualmente
pueden incorporar modificaciones para mejorar sus prestaciones y para adaptarse a nuevos componentes. Las nuevas especificaciones

ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS

pueden no aparecer en este manual. ALCAD revisará las especificaciones en próximas ediciones de este manual técnico.
ALCAD mantiene una web dónde se pueden consultar los datos de los productos más recientes y las especificaciones actualizadas
de todos los productos.

CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS
CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM

1000-10-07

T E C H N I C A L M A N U A L
 INDEX
Pages
4 1. DOOR ENTRY AND VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEMS. CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM

34 2. TECHNICAL DATA
34 • Standards
34 • Telephones for houses and flats
42 • Accessories for telephones
42 • Monitors and connection brackets for houses and flats
45 • Accessories for monitors
47 • Tap-offs and splitters
49 • Entrance panels with pushbuttons
72 • Concierge systems
76 • Accessories for entrance panel. Accessories for concierge systems
80 • Electric locks
82 • Electronic accessories
82 - Call extension units
84 - Switch-selector accessories
86 - Common door accessories
87 - Call adaptor accessories
87 • Electronic modules for internal communication installations
88 • Modulators for TV door entry installations
90 • Power supply units

95 3. ENTRANCE PANELS: DIMENSIONS AND ACCESSORIES

104 4. MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY

104 • Accessories for entrance panel. Accessories for concierge systems
110 • Entrance panels with pushbuttons. Concierge systems: Concierge unit panels
118 • Concierge systems: Telephones for concierge
125 • Audio units. Video units
126 • Pushbuttons
126 • Decorative fittings for entrance panel
128 • Tap-offs and splitters
129 • Accessories for telephones
130 • Telephones for houses and flats
132 • Accessories for monitors
135 • Monitors and connection brackets for houses and flats
139 • Electronic accessories
139 - Call extension units
140 - Switch-selector accessories
140 - Common door accessories
140 - Call adaptor accessories
141 • Electronic modules for internal communication installations
142 • Modulators for TV door entry installations
143 • Power supply units

145 5. CONNECTION AND ADJUSTMENT INSTRUCTIONS

145 • Entrance panels with pushbuttons
159 • Concierge systems
161 • Tap-offs and splitters
164 • Telephones for houses and flats
174 • Accessories for monitors
175 • Monitors and connection brackets for houses and flats

2
Pages
184 • Electronic accessories
184 - Call extension units
186 - Switch-selector accessories
188 - Common door accessories
189 - Call adaptor accessories
190 • Electronic modules for internal communication installations
191 • Modulators for TV door entry installations
194 • Power supply units

196 6. DIAGRAMS
196 • General points concerning installations
197 • Door entry installations. Electronic call.
Conventional 4+N system
204 • Door entry installations with concierge unit. Electronic call.
Conventional 4+N system
208 • Door entry installations. Buzzing call. Conventional 4+N system
216 • Door entry installations with confidentiality feature. Electronic call.
Conventional 4+N system
223 • Installations with internal communication.
230 • Video door entry installations. Electronic call.
Conventional 6+N+coaxial system
241 • Video door entry installations. Electronic call.
Conventional 6+N+twisted pair system
253 • Extension of installations
253 - Extensions of the installations with telephones
259 - Extensions of the installations with monitors
267 - Extensions of the installations with call extensions
273 - Door opening using external pushbuttons
278 - Opening a second door from the telephone/monitor of the dwelling
280 - Activating a 12 Vac electric lock
283 - Activating the stairs lighting when the door is opened
283 - Activating a light, bell or siren when a call is received in the dwelling
284 - Activating an electric lock from four independent entrance panels
286 • TV door entry installations

289 7. TROUBLE SHOOTING

289 • Door entry installations. Electronic call.
Conventional 4+N system
291 • Door entry installations with concierge unit. Electronic call.
Conventional 4+N system
294 • Door entry installations. Buzzing call.
Conventional 4+N system
296 • Door entry installations with confidentiality feature. Electronic call.
Conventional 4+N system
298 • Internal communication installations
299 • Door entry installations. Replacements.
Conventional 4+N system
300 • Video door entry installations. Electronic call.
Conventional 6+N+coaxial system
304 • Video door entry installations. Electronic call.
Conventional 6+N+twisted pair system
308 • TV door entry installations

3
 ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY AND VIDEO DOOR
1
ENTRY SYSTEM. CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION
Our electronic door entry and video door entry products are Power supply units
essentially a home security system, allowing users a simple way of Like all electronic systems, our door entry and video door
controlling who has access to their property. entry equipment needs an external source of power to func-
With ALCAD's conventional system, small and medium-sized ins- tion. This requirement is fulfilled by the power supply units,
tallations of any configuration of electronic door entry or video which, connected to the electric mains, provide the system
door entry system can be carried out easily. Our microprocessor- with the necessary voltages. Power supply units are usually
based technology allows different entry points to be controlled located in the hall of the ground floor or in a common area of
from the entrance panels themselves, eliminating the need for addi- the building.
tional equipment, such as change-over switches. This, along with
ease of installation and numerous configurable options, makes
Note:
ALCAD's conventional system the one to choose, from both a tech-
nical and practical point of view, for this type of installation (For For more information on the components or elements to use
further information, see “General features of the conventional door in an installation of conventional electronic door entry or video
entry system”, on page 6, or “General features of the conventio- door entry systems, see the section entitled “Components” on
nal video door entry system” on page 11). page 30.
The system consists primarily of the following elements:
Entrance panel
Usually installed at the point of entry to the building, this element
houses an audio unit and a series of pushbuttons and is used to
call the telephone of monitor of each dwelling. Each pushbutton
corresponds to a given dwelling, so that the total number of pus-
hbuttons on the panel is determined by the number of dwellings.
In video door entry systems, the entrance panel also has a built-
in video unit, whose function is to capture the image of the person
making the call.
Elements for the distribution of the video signal (in
video door entry installations)
Tap-offs and splitters are used to distribute the video signal from
the video unit to the different dwellings. The tap-offs, usually insta-
lled on each floor of the building, allow the video signal to be
branched to the different monitors of the installation. The splitters
are used when several up lines or columns of video are required.
Telephone or monitor + connections bracket
Installed in the house or flat, the telephone and the monitor are
the elements allowing a call made from the entrance panel to be
received. They establish communication with the visitor and, by
means of the door-opening button, allow him access to the pro-
perty. The connections bracket is used to install and connect the
monitor in the dwelling.
Electric lock
The electric lock is an electro-mechanical device which, installed
at the entry point or door being controlled, allows the door to be
opened when the door-opening button on the telephone or moni-
tor in the dwelling is pressed.

4
LAST 5
FLOOR

GROUND 5
FLOOR
TELEPHONE IN
THE DWELLING
LOCK RELEASE
BUTTON

POWER SUPPLY UNIT 4+N

OF ENTRANCE PANEL

230 V V

AUDIO UNIT
230 V
PUSH-BUTTONS

ENTRANCE PANEL
ELECTRIC LOCK

ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY. CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM

5
LAST
FLOOR
TAP-OFF

5
GROUND
FLOOR
CONNECTION TAP-OFF
BRACKETS
VIDEO
MONITOR IN LOCK RELEASE COLUMN 1
THE DWELLING BUTTON VIDEO
COLUMN 3
VIDEO
4+N COLUMN 2

VIDEO
COLUMN 4
SPLITTER
POWER SUPPLY UNITS
OF ENTRANCE PANEL VIDEO
SIGNAL
AND VIDEO SYSTEM

230 V V
VIDEO UNIT
230 V
AUDIO UNIT

230 V V
PUSH-BUTTONS
230 V

ELECTRIC LOCK ENTRANCE PANEL

ELECTRONIC VIDEODOOR ENTRY. CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM 5

GENERAL FEATURES OF THE CONVENTIONAL DOOR
ENTRY SYSTEM
The technology incorporated in the conventional door entry system has allowed us to introduce a certain number of features and
functions whose overall purpose is to simplify different types of installation, to simplify operation by the user, and to simplify future
maintenance tasks.
• Communication system with 4+N connection (page 6).
• Direct connections between the panels of the different points of entry (page 7).
• Possibility of installing several devices per dwelling (page 8).
• Various installation options (page 8).
• User and visitor know the status of the system (page 10).
• Visitor knows the status of the call (page 10).
• Replacements: universal telephone and universal audio unit (page 11).

Each of these features and functions is described in the following pages.

COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH 4+N CONNECTION

The conventional electronic door entry system described in this manual belongs to the 4+N connection system, which is widely
used in electronic door entry installations.
This system owes its name to the fact that each telephone in the installation is connected to 5 wires. Four of these wires are sha-
red by all the telephones in the installation, allowing the following commands and signals to be transmitted: door-opening (electric
lock); ascending audio (through the telephone loudspeaker); descending audio (through the telephone microphone); and common.
The fifth wire is separate for each dwelling and allows the call, generated when the pushbutton of the entrance panel is pressed, to
be transmitted to the telephone of the dwelling.
In short, the system requires 4+N wires, where N stands for the number of dwellings in the installation.

1 LAST FLOOR

TELEPHONE IN 1 GROUND FLOOR

THE DWELLING

4 1 1

N (Call lines)

ENTRANCE PANEL

Number of wires Description

WIRES IN 4 Lock release, ascending audio, descending audio and common
6 EACH TELEPHONE
1 Transmission of the call for each dwelling
DIRECT CONNECTIONS BETWEEN THE PANELS OF THE DIFFERENT POINTS OF
ENTRY
To simplify matters in installations where there are several points of entry or in housing estates, control of the different points of
entry is handled directly by the entrance panels, thanks to the microprocessor and to the electronics built into the audio units. In this
type of installation is unnecessary to use any additional device to perform this function (e.g. change-over switches).
To the connections between panels in the 4+N system - connections which are necessary to enable communication with dwellings
from any of the entrance panels - only two other wires need be added for the control of the different points of entry.

LAST FLOOR

GROUND FLOOR

TELEPHONE IN
THE DWELLING

4+N

ENTRANCE PANEL ENTRANCE PANEL

Number of wires Description

WIRES BETWEEN 4 Lock release, ascending audio, descending audio and common
THE PANELS 2 Control signal (several points of entry)
N Transmission of the call for each dwelling

7
POSSIBILITY OF INSTALLING SEVERAL DEVICES PER DWELLING
EIn each of the dwellings of the installation, you can install telephones and call repeaters in parallel, so that all the devices recei-
ve the call simultaneously.
You can therefore combine devices in any of the ways shown in the table below.

Conventional electronic door entry installations

TELEPHONES CALL DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM:

REPEATER
DEVICES PER DWELLING

5 2

4
5
3
2 1
1 2

VARIOUS INSTALLATION OPTIONS

INSTALLATIONS WITHOUT CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE Vs. INSTALLATIONS WITH CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE
In installations without the confidentiality feature, the functions of communicating with the entrance panel and opening the door
are enabled at all times in all the telephones in the installation. In such installations, it is therefore possible that two dwellings might
be communicating with the entrance panel at exactly the same moment.
On the other hand, in installations with the confidentiality feature, the functions of communicating with the entrance panel and
opening the door are, by default, disabled in all the telephones in the installation with the single exception of the telephone which
is receiving the call. It is therefore impossible for two dwellings to be communicating with the entrance panel at the same time, so
that the privacy of the conversation between the dwelling and the caller is guaranteed.
Note: The choice of one type of installation rather than the other necessitates the use of specific models of audio unit and telephone.

SYSTEM WITHOUT
CONFIDENTIALITY
FEATURE

Dwelling 1 Other dwellings

Call made
to dwelling 1 SYSTEM WITH
CONFIDENTIALITY
FEATURE

Dwelling 1 Other dwellings

= Functions disabled

8
BUZZING CALL Vs. ELECTRONIC CALL
In installations without the confidentiality feature, you can
choose between two types of call tone: electronic or buzzing.
Note: The choice of one type of installation rather than the BUZZER
other necessitates the use of specific models of audio unit and
telephone.

Buzzing call
12 Vac
When a call is made in an installation with the buzzing tone,
the audio unit of the entrance panel generates an alternating sig-
nal of 12Vac, which it sends via the call wire. This signal then arri-
ves at a device, a “buzzer”, in the telephone. Basically, the buz-
zer consists of a wire coil and a strip of metal. When the 12Vac Buzzing call
reaches the buzzer, the alternating current flows through the coil,
causing the metal strip to vibrate. The vibration produces the buz-
zing sound.

SPEAKER
Electronic call
When a call is made in installations with the electronic call, the
audio unit of the entrance panel produces a signal composed of
different frequencies and sends it via the call wire. When the sig-
nal arrives at the speaker of the telephone receiver, it makes the
distinctive sound of the electronic call. Depending on the number
of frequencies involved, different types of call tone can be encoun-
tered: single-tone, double-tone or triple-tone.

Electronic call

INSTALLATION WITH CONCIERGE SYSTEM

It is possible to complement electronic door entry systems
without the confidentiality feature with a concierge system, whe-
reby all calls made to dwellings are received and handled at a
single point, namely the concierge unit. OFF

ON

It is also possible to establish communication with the concier-

Entrance panel
ge unit from the telephone of each dwelling.
Concierge

TELEPHONE FOR TELEPHONE FOR

INTERNAL INTERNAL
INSTALLATIONS WITH INTERNAL COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION
2 3
BETWEEN DWELLINGS
It is possible to perform electronic door entry installations 1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9

without the confidentiality feature with telephones for internal

C 0 C 0

communication. This kind of telephone, as well as enabling you TELEPHONE FOR TELEPHONE FOR
to control entry to the building, can communicate with any other INTERNAL INTERNAL
COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION
telephone for internal communication in the installation, so that 1 4
you can transfer a call received from the entrance panel to ano-
ther telephone. 1
4
2
5
3
6
1
4
2
5
3
6

ALL-TO-ALL TYPE SYSTEM

7 8 9 7 8 9
C 0 C 0

This is an all-to-all type system, in which it is possible to make INTERNAL COMMUNICATION

and receive internal calls to and from any telephone for internal
communication in the installation.
It is possible to install a maximum of 16 telephones for internal
communication per installation. TELEPHONE FOR TELEPHONE FOR
INTERNAL 1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
INTERNAL
COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION
C 0 C 0

16 5

9
POSSIBILITY OF INSTALLING SEVERAL DEVICES PER
INSTALLATIONS WITH INTERNAL COMMUNICATION
DWELLING DEVICES PER DWELLING
In the installations with internal communication between dwe-
llings, in each dwelling of the installation, door entry telephones
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0

and call repeaters can be installed in parallel with telephones for

internal communication. In this case, however, the door entry tele-
phones will not be able to communicate with the telephones for 4
internal communication but only with the entrance panel. 3 1
Any of the combinations shown in the following table are pos- 2 2
sible.
2 1

USER AND VISITOR KNOW THE STATUS OF THE SYSTEM

USER: ORIGIN OF CALL
In installations with several points of entry, the entrance panel of each point can be configured as the main or secondary panel.
This configuration will determine the type of call tone which the audio unit will generate when a call is made. Accordingly, when a
call is received in the dwelling, the type of call tone will allow the user to identify the point of entry from which the call has been
made.

VISITOR: ENTRANCE PANEL DISABLED

In installations with several points of entry, when a call is made from one of the entrance panels, the audio unit of the panel in
question generates a voltage which it sends via the 2 control wires to the panels of the other points of entry. These panels are then
disabled, so that it is no longer possible to call the dwellings from them. The flashing red light on these panels warns the visitor ano-
ther panel is active.

Building 1 Building 1
Point of entry 1 Other points of entry
Call made to dwelling 1

= Functions disabled

VISITOR KNOWS THE STATUS OF THE CALL

CALL MADE TO THE DWELLING
When a call is received on the telephone of the dwelling, the entrance panel from which the call
has been made emits several confirmation tones for the visitor.

CALL NOT MADE TO THE DWELLING

The system also informs the visitor if the call has failed to be made to the dwelling. In this case,
the entrance panel from which the call has been made does not emit any tones at all.
The call may not have been made for one of the following reasons:
• The receiver of the telephone has not been replaced (installations without the confidentiality fea
ture and electronic call).
• Connection problem with the pushbuttons.
= Functions disabled
• Connection problem with the call wire.

10
REPLACEMENTS: UNIVERSAL TELEPHONE AND UNIVERSAL AUDIO UNIT
The 4+N connection system is very widely used in electronic door entry installations.
ALCAD is equipped with industry standard parts (telephone, audio unit, etc.), which can be used in the 4+N systems (without con-
fidentiality feature) of other manufacturers.
You can therefore easily replace the telephone or entrance panel of another manufacturer with the corresponding universal ALCAD
equipment, with no need to change the other elements of the installation.

Note: See the table showing the compatibility of the ALCAD telephone with the telephones of other manufacturers on page 41.

GENERAL FEATURES OF THE CONVENTIONAL VIDEO DOOR

ENTRY SYSTEM
The technology incorporated in the conventional system has allowed us to introduce a certain number of features and functions whose
overall purpose is to simplify different types of installation, to simplify operation by the user, and to simplify future maintenance tasks.
• Communication system with 6+N+coaxial connection or 6+N+twisted pair connection (on page 12)
• Direct connections between the panels of the different points of entry (on page 13).
• Possibility of installing several devices per dwelling (on page 14).
• System with confidentiality feature and electronic call (on page 14).
• User and visitor know the status of the system (on page 15) .
• Visitor knows the status of the call (on page 15).
• Auto switch-on function (on page 15).
• Possibility of viewing the signal from the video unit (coaxial) on the television in the dwelling: TV door entry installations)
(on page 16).

Each of these features and functions is described in the following pages.

11
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH 6+N+COAXIAL CONNECTION OR
6+N+TWISTED PAIR CONNECTION
The conventional electronic video door entry system described in the present manual adds a number of connections to the 4+N
connections of the electronic door entry system presented above. These are the following: a pair of wires to supply power to the
monitors of the installation, and coaxial cable or twisted pair to transmit the video signal captured by the video unit to the monitors.
In this way, every monitor in the installation will receive the 5 wires corresponding to the electronic door entry system plus the 2
wires supplying power to the monitors plus the coaxial cable or twisted pair carrying the video signal.
The system thus constituted therefore requires either 6+N wires + coaxial or 6+N wires + twisted pair, where N is the number of
dwellings in the installation.

COAXIAL OR
TWISTED PAIR
4
LAST TAP-OFF
1
FLOOR 2

COAXIAL OR
TWISTED PAIR
4
GROUND 1 TAP-OFF
FLOOR 2

CONNECTION
BRACKET

MONITOR POWER SUPPLY

IN THE DWELLING COAXIAL
OR
4 1 1 TWISTED PAIR

N (Call lines)

ENTRANCE PANEL

Number of wires Description

4 Lock release, ascending audio, descending audio and common
WIRES IN 1 Transmission of the call for each dwelling
EACH MONITOR
2 Supply power to the monitors
COAXIAL OR Transmission of the video signal
TWISTED PAIR

12
DIRECT CONNECTIONS BETWEEN THE PANELS OF THE DIFFERENT POINTS OF
ENTRY
In installations with several points of entry or in housing estates, installation is made easier by the fact that it is the entrance panels
themselves which control the different entry points, thanks to the microprocessor and electronics built into audio units and video units.
In this type of installations is unnecessary to use any additional device to perform this function (e.g. change-over switches).
To the connections between panels in the 4+N system - connections which are necessary to enable communication with dwellings
from any of the entrance panels - only two other wires need be added for the control of the different points of entry, as well as the
coaxial cable or twisted pair for the transmission of the video signal between entrance panels.
This makes possible the connection in a single installation of video door entry system panels alongside normal door entry system
panels by means of a 6+N connection; thereby eliminating the need to make connections between panels with coaxial cable or
twisted pair.

COAXIAL OR
TWISTED PAIR

LAST 5
FLOOR TAP-OFF
2

COAXIAL OR
TWISTED PAIR

GROUND 5
TAP-OFF
FLOOR 2

CONNECTION
BRACKET

MONITOR IN POWER SUPPLY

THE DWELLING
COAXIAL
OR
4+N TWISTED PAIR

COAXIAL
OR
TWISTED PAIR

ENTRANCE PANEL ENTRANCE PANEL

Number of wires Description

4 Lock release, ascending audio, descending audio and common
WIRES BETWEEN 2 Control signal (several points of entry)
THE PANELS
N Transmission of the call for each dwelling
COAXIAL OR
TWISTED PAIR Transmission of the video signal

13
POSSIBILITY OF INSTALLING SEVERAL DEVICES PER DWELLING
As previously mentioned, the video door entry system is based on the 4+N connection method of the electronic door entry system.
This enables the connection of telephones in the dwellings in the same way as in the conventional electronic door entry system.
In each of the dwellings of the installation, you can install telephones, monitors and call repeaters in parallel, so that all the devi-
ces receive the call simultaneously.
You can therefore combine devices in any of the ways shown in the table below.

Conventional electronic video door entry installations VIDEODOOR ENTRY SYSTEM:

DEVICES PER DWELLING
CALL
MONITOR TELEPHONE
REPEATER

5 2
4
3 1
2
2 2
POWER SUPPLY
1 3

4
COAXIAL
5 OR 2 1
TWISTED PAIR
1 2

1 1 1
2 1

1 2

SYSTEM WITH CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE AND ELECTRONIC CALL

CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE
In the conventional video door entry system, communication with the entrance panel and door-opening functions are disabled by
default in all the monitors or telephones of the installation. These functions are enabled only in the monitor or telephone which recei-
ves the call. It is therefore impossible for the systems of two dwellings to be active at the same moment, thereby ensuring that the
privacy of the conversation between the dwelling and the caller is fully respected.

Call made
to dwelling 1 Dwelling 1 Other dwellings

= Functions disabled

ELECTRONIC CALL
SPEAKER
When a call is made at the entrance panel, the audio unit of the
entrance panel produces a signal composed of different frequencies
and sends it via the call wire. The signal reaches the speaker of the
receiver of the requested telephone/monitor, emitting a sound - the
electronic call.

14
USER AND VISITOR KNOW THE STATUS OF THE SYSTEM
USER: ORIGIN OF THE CALL
In installations with several points of entry, the entrance panel of each point can be configured as the main or secondary panel.
This configuration will determine the type of call tone which the audio unit will generate when a call is made. Accordingly, when a
call is received in the dwelling, the type of call tone will allow the user to identify the point of entry from which the call has been
made.

VISITOR: ENTRANCE PANEL DISABLED

In installations with several points of entry, when a call is made from
one of the entrance panels, the audio unit of the panel in question
generates a voltage which it sends via the 2 control wires to the panels
at the other points of entry. These panels are then disabled, so that it
is no longer possible to call the dwellings from them. The flashing red Entrance panel 1 Other entrance panels
light on these panels warns the visitor that the system is engaged. Call made to dwelling 1

= Functions disabled

VISITOR KNOWS THE STATUS OF THE CALL

CALL MADE TO THE DWELLING
When a call is received on the telephone/monitor of the dwelling, the entrance panel from which the call
has been made emits several confirmation tones for the visitor.

CALL NOT MADE TO THE DWELLING

The system also informs the visitor if the call has failed to be made to the dwelling. In this case, the entran-
ce panel from which the call has been made does not emit any tones at all.
The call may not have been made for one of the following reasons:
• Connection problem with the pushbuttons.
• Connection problem with the call wire.

= Functions disabled

AUTO SWITCH-ON FUNCTION

This feature allows you to activate certain functions without having to recei-
ve a call first; the functions include visualisation of the image, communica-
tion with the entrance panel and door-opening. This feature is enabled in the
monitor provided that the system is not active.
Auto Switch-on can be useful for security purposes, or when, for some rea-
son, one wishes to establish communication with the entrance panel.

15
POSSIBILITY OF SEEING THE SIGNAL FROM THE VIDEO UNIT (COAXIAL) ON
THE TV IN THE DWELLING: TV DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS
With ALCAD's TV door entry system it is possible, at any
moment, to see the image captured by a video unit with an output
for coaxial cable on the television set in the dwelling. COAXIAL
TV HEAD-END
The system is of particular interest in door entry installations,
whether ALCAD's or those of other manufacturers, where it is des-
ired that a video unit be installed at the point of entry to the buil-
ding to see visitors without having to install a monitor in each dwe-
COAXIAL
lling.
The system can be installed either separately or as part of the TELEVISION SET
entrance panel of an electronic door entry installation (ALCAD ins- IN THE DWELLING
Telephone
tallations only). 230V~ ±10%
of door entry system
MODULATOR in dwelling
50-60Hz
DC OUT : 15V
0.2 A

965 SERIES
MODULATOR

Supply power
to the video unit 2 COAXIAL

Entrance panel of ALCAD

with video unit for TV door entry system

OPERATION OF THE CONVENTIONAL DOOR ENTRY

SYSTEM
ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS (WITHOUT CONFIDENTIALITY
FEATURE)
There are two operating states: system on standby and system active.

SYSTEM ON STANDBY. NO CALL

By default, telephones are active, so that it is possible to open the main door of the building
and, simply by picking up the receiver, to establish communication with the entrance panel,
without first having received a call from the entrance panel.
In installations with several points of entry, these functions can be performed in the entrance
panel which is configured as the main panel of the installation.
SYSTEM ACTIVE
The system changes from being on standby to being in the active state when a telephone in a dwelling receives a call from the
entrance panel.

RECEIVING A CALL IN THE DWELLING

When a call is made from the entrance panel to a dwelling, the telephone in the dwelling alerts the user by emitting an audio
signal. You will be able to establish communication with the visitor, pick up the receiver and open the street door by pressing the
electric lock button on the telephone.
Characteristics:
If there is more than one telephone/monitor in the dwelling, all of them receive the call simultaneously. When the receiver of one
of the devices is picked up, communication is established with the visitor.

Door
Call made to dwelling 1 Dwelling 1 Telephone that answer the call opening
16
 Installations with several points of entry
In installations with several points of entry, when a call is received, 30 seconds are allowed to answer the call. Once this period
expires, the system returns to being on standby.
Once the receiver has been picked up, 60 seconds are allowed for conversation or until the receiver has been replaced. The
system warns when the time allowed for conversation has almost expired by emitting a series of beeps, allowing the user the pos-
sibility of extending the conversation time from the dwelling by pressing and releasing the hang-up button on the phone, or, from
the entrance panel, by advising the visitor to make another call.
The entrance panel from which the call has been made remains active. The panels installed at the other points of entry are disa-
bled, so that calls to dwellings cannot be made from them. The red light on these panels will blink during the time allowed for ans-
wering and for conversation, thereby informing a visitor than another panel in the building is engaged.

Door
Building 1 opening
Point of entry 1 Dwelling 1 Telephone that answer the call
Call made to dwelling 1

Time limit to answer the call: 30 seconds

Time limit for conversation: 60 seconds

Extending the time limit for conversation:

Building 1
Other points of entry

ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS (WITHOUT CONFIDENTIA-

LITY FEATURE) WITH CONCIERGE UNIT
There are two operating states: concierge unit deactiva-
ted and concierge unit activated.

CONCIERGE UNIT DEACTIVATED

When the concierge system is deactivated, calls made Dwelling 1
OFF
from the entrance panel are no longer controlled by the OFF

ON ON
concierge unit and ring in the dwellings. The installation
functions exactly like an electronic door entry system insta-
llation (without confidentiality feature). See “Electronic
Entrance panel 1
door entry system installations (without confidentiality fea- Call made to dwelling 1
ture)”, on page 16.

CONCIERGE UNIT ACTIVATED OFF

ON

Calls made from the entrance panel ring directly on the

concierge unit. It is possible to call the concierge unit from
= Functions disabled Concierge
the dwellings by pressing the lock release button on the
telephone.

ACTIVATING THE CONCIERGE SYSTEM

To activate the concierge unit, turn the concierge unit OFF
OFF

key to the ON position. The red led on the concierge tele- ON ON

phone will light up.

17
SYSTEM ON STANDBY. NO CALL.
By default, telephones in the dwellings are active, so that it is possible, by
picking up the receiver, to establish communication with the entrance panel,
without any need to have first received a call from the entrance panel.
In installations with several points of entry, this function can be performed in
the entrance panel which is configured as the main panel of the installation.

SYSTEM ACTIVE
The system changes from being on standby to being in the active state when the concierge unit telephone receives a call from one
of the dwellings or from the entrance panel, or when a telephone in a dwelling receives a call from the concierge panel.

MAKING A CALL TO THE CONCIERGE UNIT FROM THE DWELLING

To make a call to the concierge unit, pick up the receiver. Then press the electric lock button.

RECEIVING ON THE CONCIERGE UNIT A CALL MADE FROM THE DWELLING

When a call is made to the concierge unit from a dwelling, the concierge unit telephone emits an audio signal. Communication
with the dwelling can now be established by picking up the receiver and placing the communication switch in the top position.
When the call has been received, the concierge is allowed 60 seconds to answer the call and for conversation.
The system warns when the time allowed for conversation has almost expired by emitting a series of beeps, allowing the possibi-
lity of extending the conversation time from the concierge unit telephone by pressing and releasing the hang-up button on the con-
cierge unit telephone.
Characteristics:
During the periods allowed for answering and conversation, the system does not permit devices in the other dwellings to join the
communication.
The entrance panels controlled by the concierge unit are disabled, so that it is not possible to call the dwellings from them. The
red light on these panels flashes, warning visitors that the panels are temporarily inactive.

Other dwellings

Dwelling 1 Entrance panels Communication

Call made to concierge of the entry points of switch
the building

OFF OFF

ON ON

Communication between
concierge and dwelling 1
Concierge

Time limit to answer the call + time limit for conversation: 60 seconds

Extending the time limit for conversation + time limit for conversation: + 60 seconds

= Functions disabled
18
RECEIVING A CALL FROM THE ENTRANCE PANEL ON THE CONCIERGE UNIT
When a call is made to a dwelling from the entrance panel, the concierge unit telephone emits an audio signal. The red LED on
the concierge unit panel will begin to flash, indicating that the call is coming from an entrance panel. You will be able to establish
communication with the visitor by picking up the receiver and turning the communication switch to the lower position. You can open
the street door by pressing the electric lock button on the telephone. And you can put the visitor in communication with a dwelling
by calling that dwelling from the concierge unit and, when communication with the dwelling has been established, by pressing the
call transfer key and replacing the receiver of the concierge unit telephone.
Once the call has been received, 30 seconds are allowed to answer it. When this period expires, the equipment reverts to the
standby state.
Once the receiver of the concierge unit has been picked up, 60 seconds are allowed for conversation (or until the receiver has
been replaced). The system warns when the time allowed for conversation has almost expired by emitting a series of beeps, allo-
wing the user the possibility of extending the conversation time from the telephone of the concierge unit by pressing and releasing
the hang-up button on the telephone, or, from the entrance panel, by advising the visitor to make another call.
Characteristics:
During the periods allowed for answering the call and for conversation, the system does not permit to make a call to the concier-
ge unit.

Communication
switch

OFF OFF

ON ON

Door
Panel 1 opening
Call made to dwelling 1 Concierge

Time limit to answer the call: 30 seconds Time limit for conversation: 60 seconds

Extending the time limit for conversation: +60 seconds

= Functions disabled

Installations with several points of entry:

In buildings with several points of entry, the entrance
panel from which the call is made remains active. The
panels installed at the other points of entry are disabled,
so that it is not possible to call the dwellings from them.
During the periods allowed for answering and conversa- Building 1 Building 1
tion, the red light on these panels flashes, warning visitors Point of entry 1 Other points of entry
Call made to dwelling 1
that other panel of the building is active.

= Functions disabled

19
TRANSFER A CALL MADE FROM THE MAIN ENTRANCE PANEL TO A DWELLING
During the time allowed for conversation between the concierge unit and the visitor, it is possible from the concierge unit to trans-
fer the call made from the main entrance panel of the installation to any of the dwellings. To do so, replace the receiver of the con-
cierge unit telephone and wait until the red LED of the concierge unit panel stops flashing. Next, call the dwelling in question and
turn the communication switch to the upper position.
Once the call has been received, 30 seconds are allowed to answer it. When this period expires, the system reverts to the standby
state.
Once the receiver of the concierge unit has been picked up, 60 seconds are allowed for conversation between concierge unit and
dwelling (or until the receiver has been replaced). The system warns when the time allowed for conversation has almost expired by
emitting a series of beeps, allowing the user the possibility of extending the conversation time from the telephone of the concierge
unit by pressing and releasing the hang-up button on the telephone.
When communication is established with the dwelling, it is possible:
• To put the dwelling in communication with the visitor by pressing the 'transfer call' key and replacing the receiver of the tele-
phone of the concierge unit.
• If the dwelling does not wish the call to be transferred to it, instruct the dwelling to replace the receiver of the telephone. Then
turn the communication switch to the lower position and the concierge unit will re-establish communication with the visitor.
Characteristics:
During the periods set for answering a call and for conversation between the concierge unit and the dwelling, the entrance panel
is disabled so that it is not possible to make a call from it. The red light on these panels flashes, warning visitors.

Other dwellings

OFF OFF OFF

ON ON ON

Entrance panels
Main panel of the points of entry of the building
Call made to dwelling 1 Main panel Concierge Concierge
Establishing communication with Replace the receiver Call made to dwelling 1
concierge

Dwelling 1

Time limit to answer the call: 30 seconds

Time limit for conversation: 60 seconds

Extending the time limit for conversation: + 60 seconds

Put dwelling
in communication
with entrance panel OFF OFF

ON ON

Main panel
Concierge Concierge Establishing communication with
dwelling 1

Do not put dwelling

in communication
with entrance panel

OFF

ON

Dwelling 1

Main panel
= Functions disabled Establishing communication with
concierge
20
INSTALLATIONS OF ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH INTERNAL
COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM ON STANDBY. NO CALL.
By default, telephones are active, so that it is possible to open the main door of the buil-
ding and, simply by picking up the receiver, to establish communication with the entrance
panel, without needing first to receive a call from the entrance panel.
In installations with several points of entry, these functions can be performed in the entran-
ce panel which is configured as the main panel of the installation.

SYSTEM ACTIVE
The system changes from being on standby to being in the active state when one of the telephones receives a call from an entran-
ce panel or from another telephone for internal communication.

MAKING A CALL TO A TELEPHONE FROM ANOTHER TELEPHONE

To make a call to another telephone for internal communication, pick up the receiver, use the telephone keypad to key in the exten-
sion number assigned to the telephone you wish to call, and press the call key.
The call will ring on the other telephone.
Characteristics:
If, before pressing the call key, you realise that the number you have keyed in is incorrect, press the delete key and re-enter the
code.

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0

Press call
key
Correct
extension
number
1 2 3
4 5 6

C
7 8
0
9
mistake while
Dial the number dialling
the extension
of extension
Call made to telephone C
with extension 2
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0

Press delete
key

21
RECEIVING IN THE DWELLING A CALL FROM ANOTHER TELEPHONE
When a call is received from another telephone for internal communication, the telephone will emit an audio signal. Communication
can be established with the telephone making the call by picking up the receiver.
Once the call has been received, 30 seconds are allowed to answer it. Once this period expires, the equipment reverts to the
standby state.
Once the receiver has been picked up, a period of 5 minutes is allowed for conversation.
Characteristics:
During the periods allowed for answering the call and for conversation, the system does not permit any other device to join the
communication.

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0

Other telephones
for internal
communication

1 2 3
2
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0

Telephone
Call made to telephone
with number of extension 2

Telephone with
number of extension 2

Time limit to answer the call: 30 seconds

Time limit for conversation: 5 minutes

= Functions disabled

If during the periods allowed for answering the call or for conversation between two telephones for internal communication, a visi-
tor calls either of those telephones from the entrance panel, the requested telephone will emit an audio signal. By pressing and rele-
asing the hang-up button on the telephone, communication can be established with the entrance panel.

1 2 3 1 2 3
4 5 6 4 5 6
7 8 9 7 8 9
C 0 C 0

Panel 1 Telephone with extension 1 Telephone with extension 1

Call made to telephone Warning tones Press and release Panel 1
Telephone with extension 1 Communication with
intercommunication with extension 1
telephone with
with other telephone number of extension 1

22
RECEIVING IN THE DWELLING A CALL FROM THE ENTRANCE PANEL
When a call is made from the entrance panel to a dwelling, the telephone in the dwelling alerts the user by emitting an audio sig-
nal. You will be able to establish communication with the visitor, pick up the receiver and open the street door by pressing the elec-
tric lock button on the telephone. You can put the visitor in communication with another telephone by calling the other telephone and,
when communication with it has been established, by replacing the receiver of the telephone.
Characteristics:
If there is more than one telephone in the dwelling which has been called, all the telephones receive the call simultaneously.
Answering any of them will establish communication with the visitor.

Door
Call made to dwelling 1 Dwelling 1 Telephone that answer the call opening

Installations with several points of entry

In installations with several points of entry, when a call is received, 30 seconds are allowed to answer the call. Once this period
expires, the equipment reverts to being on standby.
Once the receiver has been picked up, 60 seconds are allowed for conversation (or until the receiver has been replaced). The
system warns when the time allowed for conversation has almost expired by emitting a series of beeps, allowing the user the possi-
bility of extending the conversation time from the dwelling by pressing and releasing the hang-up button on the phone, or, from the
entrance panel, by advising the visitor to make another call.
The entrance panel of the building from which the call has been made remains active. The panels installed at the other points of
entry are disabled, so that calls to dwellings cannot be made from them. The red light on these panels will blink during the time allo-
wed for answering and for conversation, thereby informing a visitor than another panel in the building is active.

Door
Building 1 opening
Point of entry 1 Dwelling 1 Telephone that answer the call
Call made to dwelling 1

Time limit to answer the call: 30 seconds

Time limit for conversation: 60 seconds

Extending the time limit for conversation:

Building 1
Other points of entry

23
TRANSFER A CALL MADE FROM THE ENTRANCE PANEL TO OTHER TELEPHONE
During the time allowed for conversation between the dwelling and the visitor, you can transfer the call to any intercommunica-
tion telephone in the installation by replacing the receiver of the telephone and making a call to the desired telephone (see “Making
a call to a telephone from another telephone” on page 21).
When communication has been established between the two telephones, you can:
• Put the other person in communication with the visitor by replacing the receiver of your telephone.
• If the other person does not wish to accept the call, tell the person to hang up the telephone receiver. Automatically, you will
re-establish communication with the visitor.

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0

Other
telephones for
internal communication

1 2 3 1 2 3
2
4 5 6 4 5 6
7 8 9 7 8 9
C 0 C 0

Panel 01 Press and release Call made to telephone

Panel 01 the hang-up button Telephone with
Call made to telephone 1 with number of extension 2
Establishing communication number of extension 2
with telephone 1

Telephone 1
Communication with
Time limit to answer the call: 30 seconds telephone with
number of extension 2
Time limit for conversation: 5 minutes

Put telephone with

number of extension 2
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0

in communication
with entrance panel

Telephone with Telephone with

number of extension 1 number of extension 2
replace the receiver Communication with panel 01

Do not put telephone with

number of extension 2 1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9

in communication
C 0

with entrance panel

Telephone with Telephone with

number of extension 2 number of extension 1
replace the receiver Communication with panel 01

24
INSTALLATIONS OF ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH CONFIDENTIALITY
FEATURE
There are two operating states: system on standby and system active.

SYSTEM ON STANDBY. NO CALL

By default, telephones are inactive, so that the functions of communicating with the
entrance panel and opening the door are disabled.
The entrance panels are on standby, with the audio system disabled while waiting
for a call to be made. = Functions disabled

SYSTEM ACTIVE
The system changes from being on standby to being in the active state when a telephone in a dwelling receives a call from the
entrance panel.

RECEIVING A CALL IN A DWELLING

When a call is made from the entrance panel to a dwelling, the telephone in the dwelling emits an audio signal. It is now possi-
ble to open the entry door and, by picking up the receiver, to establish communication with the entrance panel.
Once the call has been received, 30 seconds are allowed to answer it. When this period expires, the equipment reverts to the
standby state.
Once the receiver has been picked up, 60 seconds are allowed for conversation (or until the receiver has been replaced). The
system warns when the time allowed for conversation has almost expired by emitting a series of beeps, allowing the user the pos-
sibility of extending the conversation time from the dwelling by pressing and releasing the hang-up button on the phone, or, from
the entrance panel, by advising the visitor to make another call.
When the door-opening button is pressed, the visitor can enter the building.
Characteristics:
If in the dwelling which has been called, there exists more than one telephone, all the telephones receive the call simultaneously.
Answering any of them will establish communication with the visitor.
During the time periods allowed for answering and for conversation, the system does not allow the telephones of other dwellings
to join the communication.

Other dwellings

Panel 1
Call made to dwelling 1

Door
opening
Dwelling 1

Time limit to answer the call: 30 seconds Time limit for conversation: 60 seconds

Extending the time limit for conversation: +60 seconds

= Functions disabled

25
 If a visitor calls one dwelling and then imme-
diately calls another from the same entrance
panel, the call to the first dwelling will be can-
celled. 2
1

Entrance panel 1
Call made to dwelling 1 Dwelling 1 Dwelling 2
and after to dwelling 2

= Functions disabled

Installations with several points of

entry
The entrance panel from which the call has
been made remains active. The panels installed
at the other points of entry are disabled, so that
calls to dwellings cannot be made from them. Building 1 Building 1
Point of entry 1 Other points of entry
The red light on these panels will blink during Call made to dwelling 1
the time allowed for answering and for conver-
sation, thereby informing a visitor than another
panel in the building is active. = Functions disabled

OPERATION OF THE CONVENTIONAL VIDEO DOOR

ENTRY SYSTEM

ELECTRONIC VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS

There are two operating states: system on standby and system active.

SYSTEM ON STANDBY. NO CALL

By default, the devices (telephones and monitors) are inactive, so that the functions
of communicating with the entrance panel, opening the door and, in the case of
monitors, seeing an image, are disabled. The entrance panels are on standby, with
the audio system disabled while waiting for a call to be made or for a monitor to
activate its automatic switch-on function.
= Functions disabled

SYSTEM ACTIVE
The system changes from being on standby to being in the active state when a telephone or a monitor in a dwelling receives a
call from the entrance panel or when, in the video door entry system, the auto switch-on function is activated from one of the moni-
tors.

26
AUTO SWITCH-ON FUNCTION (monitors)
To activate the auto switch-on feature, press the auto switch-on button on the monitor. You will then be able to see the image cap-
tured by the video unit, open the street door, and, by picking up the receiver, establish communication with the main entrance panel
of the installation.
If the receiver is not picked up, the auto switch-on feature will remain enabled for a maximum of 30 seconds.
When the receiver is picked up, the auto switch-on feature remains enabled for a maximum of 60 seconds or until the conversa-
tion ends and the receiver is replaced.
When this time expires, the system returns to being on standby.
Characteristics:
When the auto switch-on is activated, the system does not allow any other monitor to use the auto switch-on function. On pushing
the auto switch-on button on another monitor, the status LED indicator will flash, informing the user that the system is engaged.
The call from the entrance panel has priority over the auto switch-on. If, during the time setting of the auto switch-on, a call is made
from the entrance panel to another dwelling, the auto switch-on time setting finishes automatically, and only the monitor of the house
or dwelling which has been called remains activated. In this way, the confidentiality of the call is maintained.

Others dwellings

Dwelling 1
Turning on the auto switch-on system

Dwelling 1 Dwelling 1

Time limit for auto switch-on function: 30 seconds

= Functions disabled Time limit for auto switch-on function: 60 seconds

RECEIVING A CALL IN A DWELLING

When a call is made to a dwelling from the entrance panel, the telephone or monitor in the dwelling emits a warning sound. It
is then also possible to see the image of the visitor on the screen of the monitor. You can open the street door and, by picking up
the receiver, establish communication with the entrance panel.
Once the call has been received, 30 seconds are allowed to answer it. When this period elapses, the system reverts to being on
standby.
Once the receiver has been picked up, 60 seconds are allowed for conversation or until the receiver is replaced. The system warns
the user before the conversation period comes to an end by emitting a series of buzzing sounds, thereby allowing the conversation
time to be extended either from the dwelling, by pressing and releasing the hang-up button on the device, or from the entrance
panel, where the visitor can call again.
When the door-opening button is pressed, the visitor can enter the building.
Characteristics:
If there is more than one telephone/monitor in the dwelling, all of them receive the call simultaneously. When the receiver of one
of the devices is picked up, communication is established with the visitor.
During the time periods allowed for answering and for conversation, the system does not allow the devices of other dwellings to
join the communication.

27
 Other dwellings

Call made to dwelling 1

Door
Device that answer the call opening
Dwelling 1

Time limit to answer the call: 30 seconds

Time limit for conversation: 60 seconds

Extending the time limit for conversation:

= Functions disabled

If the visitor calls one dwelling and then another from the same entrance panel, the call made to the first dwelling will be cance-
lled.

2
1

Entrance panel 1
Call made to dwelling 1 Dwelling 1 Dwelling 2
and after to dwelling 2

= Functions disabled

Installations with several points of entry:

In buildings with several points of entry, the
entrance panel from which the call has been made
remains active. The panels installed at the other
points of entry are disabled, so that calls to dwe-
llings cannot be made from them. The red light on Building 1 Building 1
Point of entry 1 Other points of entry
these panels will blink during the time allowed for Call made to dwelling 1
answering and for conversation, thereby informing
a visitor than another panel in the building is active.
= Functions disabled

28
TV DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS
There are two operating states: system on standby and system active.

SYSTEM ON STANDBY
The video unit is activated; when the television in a dwelling is tuned to the TV chan-
nel selected in the modulator, the image captured by the video unit can be seen on the
screen.

SYSTEM ACTIVE
The system changes from being on standby to being active when the tele-
phone in a dwelling receives a call from an entrance panel.
When a call is made to a dwelling from the entrance panel, the telephone
Panel in the dwelling emits a warning sound. It is also possible to see the image of
Dwelling 1
Call made to dwelling 1 the visitor on the TV by tuning the television to the TV channel selected in the
modulator. It is possible to establish communication with the visitor by pic-
king up the receiver and to open the street door by pressing the lock relea-
se button on the telephone.

Note:
The operation and characteristics in both states (system on stand-by, system active) are the same as those of an electronic door
entry installation.

29
COMPONENTS
We recommend that you consult the diagram corresponding to the installation you intend to perform (in Chapter 6, “Diagrams”)
in order to identify the components you will need.
This chapter provides a general reference guide to the components which can be used for installations performed with conven-
tional electronic door entry or video door entry systems.
For technical information on all components, see “Technical data” in Chapter 2.

HOUSES AND FLATS

TELEPHONES
Located inside each dwelling, these allow the user to receive calls made from the entrance panel, to hold con-
versations, and to open the street door. In installations with a concierge system, they also allow calls to be recei-
ved from the concierge unit and made to it. They are wall-mounted.
The model you select will depend on the kind of installation to be carried out: with or without confidentiality fea-
ture, concierge unit, internal communication between dwellings, video system, or with electronic or buzzing call.
Note - Desktop installation of the telephone :
For the desktop telephone installation, a desktop support is also required.

MONITORS
Located inside each dwelling, monitors allow the user to receive calls from the entrance panel, see visitors, esta-
blish conversation and open the entry door. They incorporate the built-in automatic switch-on feature, useful in situa-
tions of surveillance or when, for one reason or another, the user wishes to communicate with the entrance panel.
To function properly, they must be used with the correct connection brackets.
The correct choice of model will depend on the type of video unit you wish to install in the entrance panel: whe-
ther black and white (B/W) or colour.
Note - Desktop installation of the monitor:
For the desktop monitor installation, a desktop support is also required.
Note - Cover frames :
Cover frames can be used in replacements of flush-mounted monitors where the cavity in the wall needs to be
covered or in installations where the wall on which the monitor is to be mounted is uneven or out of true.

CONNECTION BRACKETS
Elements in which the connections of the conventional video door entry system are made in every dwelling in
the installation. They allow the wall-mounting and connection of the monitor to the installation.
The correct choice of model will depend on the type of cable you intend to use for transmission of the video sig-
nal: whether coaxial or twisted pair.

CALL EXTENSION UNITS

These accessories reproduce the call tone, thereby notifying the user that a call has been received from the
entrance panel.
They are useful in cases where the user wishes to listen to calls in different parts of a dwelling but not to install
a telephone or monitor in each place.
The model you select will depend on the type of call chosen for the installation: electronic call or buzzing call.

ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES
Elements which allow users to activate an external device (a light or bell, for example) at the same time that
they receive a call made from the entrance panel, or to activate a second electric lock from the dwelling, etc.

30
DISTRIBUTION OF THE VIDEO SIGNAL: VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEMS
TAP-OFFS
Tap-offs are usually located on each floor of the building. They branch the video input signal to its tap outputs,
where they are connected to the monitors in the dwellings. Connection in series of the tap offs allows the distri-
COAXIAL bution of the video signal of the video unit to all the monitors in the installation.
The correct choice of model will depend on the type of cable which is to be used for transmission of the video
DIV-034
cod.9730015
signal: whether coaxial or twisted pair.
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

TWISTED PAIR

SPLITTERS
Splitters generate multiple independent output lines from a single video signal input line, while maintaining the
same video signal on each line. They enable the distribution of the video signal along several independent
COAXIAL columns.
The correct choice of model will depend on the type of cable which is to be used for transmission of the video
DIV-134
cod.9730016
signal: whether coaxial or twisted pair.
12 V 15 V
+
V T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

TWISTED PAIR

POINT OF ENTRY TO THE BUILDING

ENTRANCE PANEL
Generally installed at the entry point of buildings, this panel houses the audio unit and the pushbuttons, one for
each dwelling. In video door entry systems the panel also houses the video unit.
Its dimensions depend on the number of different dwellings in the building where the electronic door entry system
ENTRANCE PANEL or video door entry system is to be installed.
DOOR
ENTRY SYSTEM Depending on the number of dwellings and on the nature of the installation, it may be necessary to install more
than one panel (i.e. entrance panels in parallel) at the entrance to the building.
Flush-mounted or surface wall-mounted boxes are used to fix the entrance panel in the desired place. Similarly,
in installations where the entrance panel requires extra protection against snow, rain, etc., rain-shields can be
used.
ENTRANCE PANEL
Note - Cover frames for entrance panels:
VIDEODOOR Cover frames are useful in case where an old entrance panel has to be replaced by a new but smaller entran-
ENTRY SYSTEM
ce panel, or in installations where the wall on which the panel is to be located is uneven or out of true.

AUDIO UNIT
This is crucial module of the system. It enables calls to be made to the telephone or monitor of the dwelling and
communication to take place from both the entrance panel to the dwelling and vice versa. In video door entry
systems, the audio unit also controls the activation of the video unit.
The model you select will depend on the type of installation which is going to be performed: installation of elec-
tronic door entry system (with or without confidentiality feature; with electronic call or buzzing call; with concierge
system; with internal communication between dwellings) or installation of video door entry system.

VIDEO UNIT
This is the module which captures the image of the person calling from the entrance panel. It has auxiliary ligh-
ting for situations when the external light is poor. In black and white systems this lighting is by means of infrared
LEDs whose light is invisible to the human eye. It is therefore possible to identify with absolute discretion the person
who is calling, even in conditions of poor light. With a colour system, on the other hand, the auxiliary lighting of the
video unit is provided by means of white LEDs.
There are different models of video unit. The choice of the right one for a particular installation depends on the
type of cable to be used for transmission of the video signal (whether coaxial or twisted pair) and on the type of
image to be transmitted (whether black and white or colour). 31
 PUSHBUTTONS
The pushbuttons housed in the entrance panel enable contact to be made with each of the dwellings in the ins-
tallation. The number of pushbuttons will be determined by the number of dwellings in the installation.
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX
Element to which the entrance panel is fixed and which is normally located at the point of entry to the building.
A cavity must be prepared in the wall so that the box can be embedded correctly.
The model you select will depend on the dimensions of the entrance panel.

SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOX

Element to which the entrance panel is fixed and which is normally located at the point of entry to the building.
It is not necessary to prepare the wall first as the box is surface wall-mounted.
The model you select will depend on the dimensions of the entrance panel.

RAIN SHIELD
The rain-shield is fixed to the entrance panel and provides additional protection against hostile atmospheric con-
ditions (e.g. rain, snow, etc.).
The model you select will depend on the size of the entrance panel and on whether the entrance panel is fixed
to a flush-mounted box or to a surface wall-mounted box.

ELECTRIC LOCK
Electro-mechanical device which allows the entry door to be opened.
The model you select will depend on how the device works, i.e. on whether it is standard, automatic, or with
manual release.

ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES
Elements which, for example, allow the user to activate an electric lock from several separate entrance panels, or
to activate a second electric lock from a dwelling, or to activate stair lights when the door is opened.

CONCIERGE SYSTEM

TELEPHONE FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM

This telephone enables the concierge (or caretaker) to receive calls made from the entrance panel or from dwe-
llings, to establish conversation, and to open the entry door.
The model you select will depend on the dimensions of the concierge unit panel which is installed in parallel.
To fix the telephone for concierge system in the desired place, flush-mounted or surface wall-mounted boxes are
used.
OFF

ON

CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL

The panel is installed in parallel with the concierge unit telephone. It houses the audio group and the pushbuttons,
one for each dwelling.
Its dimensions will depend on the number of dwellings in the building in which it has been decided to install the
electronic door entry system with concierge unit.
Depending on the number of dwellings and on the nature of the installation, it may be necessary to install more
than one panel (i.e. panels in parallel).
To fix the concierge unit panel in the desired place, flush-mounted or surface wall-mounted boxes are used.

32
 AUDIO UNIT FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM
This is the crucial module of the system. It allows calls to be made to the telephone in the dwelling and com-
munication to take place both between the telephone for concierge system and the dwelling and between the tele-
phone for concierge system and the entrance panel.

PUSHBUTTONS
The pushbuttons housed in the panel enable contact to be made with each of the dwellings in the installation.
The number of pushbuttons will be determined by the number of dwellings in the installation.

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX
Element to which the telephone for concierge system and the concierge unit panel are fixed. A cavity must be pre-
pared in the wall so that the box can be embedded correctly.
The model you select will depend on the dimensions of the telephone for concierge system and the concierge unit
panel.

SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOX

Element to which the telephone for concierge system and the concierge unit panel are fixed. It is not necessary to
prepare the wall first as the box is surface wall-mounted.
The model you select will depend on the dimensions of the telephone for concierge system and the concierge unit
panel.

POWER SUPPLY

POWER SUPPLY UNITS

Elements which convert the mains electrical voltage to the required voltages for the correct functioning of
the conventional system.
230 V V The choice of power supply units will be determined by the type of installation to be performed as well
as by the consumption of the electric lock which it has been decided to install. See the diagram corres-
ponding to the installation you wish to carry out in Chapter 6 “Diagrams”. This will enable you to identify
the power supply units you need.

230 V V

ELECTRONIC MODULES
Elements required to carry out certain kinds of electronic door entry or video door entry installations.

CONTROL EQUIPMENT - INSTALLATONS WITH INTERNAL COMMUNICATION BETWEEN

DWELLINGS
230 V I2 I1
Element responsible for managing the internal communication system.

MODULATORS - TV DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM INSTALLATIONS

Elements which generate an analogue TV channel from the video signal of the video unit of the TV door
230V~ ±10%
50-60Hz
DC OUT : 15V
0.2 A

entry system and then distribute this channel to the TV installation in the dwellings.
965 SERIES
MODULATOR

The model you select will depend on the channel you wish to generate.

33
 TECHNICAL DATA
2
STANDARDS
The electronic door entry system products detailed in the following pages comply with the following standards:
EN 60065:2002 - Audio and Video Apparatus and Analogical Electronic Apparatus. Safety Requirements.
EN 61000-6-3:2001 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC). Part 6: Generic norms. Section 3: Norm of Emission in Residential,
Commercial and Light-Industrial Environments.
EN 61000-6-1:2001 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC). Part 6: Generic norms. Section 1: Immunity for Residential,
Commercial and Light-Industrial Environments.
Accordingly, ALCAD electronic door entry system products bear the CE stamp.

TELEPHONES FOR HOUSES AND FLATS

Telephones for wall-mounting, manufactured in ABS plastic. Conventional 4+N system.
The base of these telephones can be fixed to the wall at several points (1). The receiver has a built-in
electret microphone and a 16 Ω ferrite loudspeaker. The receiver cable is a flexible cord with telepho-
ne jack connectors (2). Also included are lift-up type connection terminals to ensure correct connection. 1
Available for electronic call or buzzing call systems. Electronic call system: when a call is made from
the entrance panel, the call tone generated by the audio unit is heard through the loudspeaker of the
telephone receiver. Buzzing call system: when a call is made from the entrance panel, the call signal
generated by the audio unit activates the buzzer of the telephone.
Note: 2

For desktop installation of telephones, a desktop support must be used (see "Accessories for telepho-
nes" on page 42).

The following table shows the correct model of telephone to choose for the installation you intend to perform.

PARTICULAR INSTALLATION ELECTRONIC CALL BUZZING CALL

Standard installation TEL-001 TUN-001

ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM Several points of entry TEL-002 TUN-002
Housing estate

ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH Standard installation TEL-001

CONCIERGE UNIT Several points of entry TEL-002

ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH Standard installation TIN-001

INTERNAL COMMUNICATION Several points of entry

Standard installation
ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH TES-001
Several points of entry
CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE TES-002
Housing estate

ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM TUN-001 TUN-001

Standard installation
REPLACEMENT INSTALLATIONS TUN-002 TUN-002
Standard installation
ELECTRONIC VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM Several points of entry TES-001
COAXIAL TES-002
Housing estate
Standard installation
ELECTRONIC VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM TES-001
Several points of entry
TWISTED PAIR TES-002
Housing estate
TES-001
TV DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM Standard installation
TES-002

34
ELECTRONIC CALL SYSTEM
84 mm Cod. 9600001 TEL-001
ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE
1
The lock-release button (1) is located on one side of the phone, allowing you to open the entry door without
224 mm

having to pick up the receiver.

Operating temperature +5 to + 55 °C

Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment and are intended
50.6 mm for use exclusively with ALCAD audio units. Do not use the terminals of the equipment to supply power to
additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

1,2 Lock release
3,2 Telephone microphone 1,2 5/18 V 0V
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call 5.6 - 6.6 V
3,2 9V
Audio max. 4 Vpp
1 2 3 4 5
4,2 0V Audio max. 7.0 Vpp

Tone max 7.0/10.5 Vpp

5,2 0V
9/14.5 V

Cod. 9600009 TEL-002

84 mm
ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE WITH 2 PUSHBUTTONS
1 The lock-release button (1) is located on one side of the phone, allowing you to open the entry door without
having to pick up the receiver. There is also a potential-free auxiliary pushbutton (2), which can be used for
224 mm

additional functions (e.g. opening a second door).

Operating temperature +5 to + 55 °C

Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment:
50.6 mm Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment and are intended
for use exclusively with ALCAD audio units. Do not use the terminals of the equipment to supply power to
additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

1,2 Lock release TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

3,2 Telephone microphone
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
1,2 5/18 V 0V
5,2 Electronic call
24 , 25 Auxiliary push-button 5.6 - 6.6 V
3,2 9V
Audio max. 4 Vpp
Important:
1 2 3 4 5 24 25 The terminals 24, 25 are potential-free
contacts. 4,2 0V Audio max. 7.0 Vpp
Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V
Tone max 7.0/10.5 Vpp
5,2 0V
9/14.5 V

24 , 25 Normally Closed
opened

35
 Auxiliary pushbutton. State of the contacts

STATE OF THE CONTACTS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

24, 25

84 mm
Cod. 9600003 TES-001
1 ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE WITH CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE
224 mm

The lock-release button (1) is located on one side of the phone, allowing you to open the entry door without
having to pick up the receiver.
The telephone is on standby until it receives a call; when it does so, the audio and door-opening functions
are enabled by the audio unit for a set of period of time.

Operating temperature +5 to + 55 °C
50.6 mm
Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment and are intended
for use exclusively with ALCAD audio units. Do not use the terminals of the equipment to supply power to addi-
tional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

1,2 Lock release
3,2 Telephone microphone
1,2 5V 5V 0V
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call 5.6 - 6.6 V
3,2 0V 8V
Audio max. 4 Vpp
1 2 3 4 5
4,2 0V 0V Audio max. 7.0 Vpp

Tone max. 10.5 Vpp

5,2 0V 0V
14.5 V

36
 84 mm Cod. 9600012 TES-002
ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE WITH CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE, 2 PUSHBUTTONS
1 The lock-release button (1) is located on one side of the phone, allowing you to open the entry door without
224 mm

2
having to pick up the receiver. There is also a potential-free auxiliary pushbutton (2), which can be used for
additional functions (e.g. opening a second door).
The telephone is on standby until it receives a call; when it does so, the audio and door-opening functions
are enabled by the audio unit for a set of period of time.

Operating temperature +5 to + 55 °C
50.6 mm
Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment and are intended
for use exclusively with ALCAD audio units. Do not use the terminals of the equipment to supply power to addi-
tional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

1,2 Lock release TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

3,2 Telephone microphone
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call 1,2 5V 5V 0V
24 , 25 Auxiliary push-button 5.6 - 6.6 V
3,2 0V 8V
Audio max. 4 Vpp
1 2 3 4 5 24 25 Important:
The terminals 24, 25 are potential-free
contacts. 4,2 0V 0V Audio max. 7.0 Vpp
Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V
Tone max. 10.5 Vpp
5,2 0V 0V
14.5 V

Auxiliary pushbutton. State of the contacts

STATE OF THE CONTACTS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

24, 25

37
 84 mm Cod. 9600014 TIN-001
TELEPHONE FOR INTERNAL COMMUNICATION, 4+N COMPATIBLE
This telephone is for installations with internal communication which are compatible with conventional
224 mm

1 2 3 1
ALCAD door entry system installations with electronic call. It can replace the door entry telephones of this type
4 5 6
7
C
8
0
9
of installation or function alongside existing ALCAD door entry phones. Internal communication channel (bet-
ween telephones) has confidentiality feature.
The telephone is equipped with a membrane keypad for calling other phones in the installation (1) and with
a side button for releasing the lock of the entry door (2).
To complete the installation with internal communication, remember to use the control equipment for insta-
llations with internal communication, model GCI-001 (see " Electronic modules" on page 87).
50.6 mm

Operating temperature +5 to + 55 °C

Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment:
Note: The voltages shown are reference values provided for the testing of the equipment and are intended
for use exclusively with ALCAD audio units and intercommunication control equipment. Do not use the termi-
nals of the equipment to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

Internal communication system

TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

I1, I2 10 - 12 V

Internal communication system I3, I2 0V 5V

I1, I2 Internal communication BUS
I3 Internal communication audio

1 2 3 4 5 I3 I2 I1
4+N door entry system
4+N door entry system
CC1
1,2 Lock release
TERMINALS AT REST WORKING
3,2 Telephone microphone
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call 1, 2 5/18 V 0V
1 2 3 4

ON

5.6 - 6.6 V
SW1 3, 2 9V Audio max 4 Vpp

4, 2 0V Audio max 7.0 Vpp

Tone max 7.0/10.5 Vpp

5, 2 0V
9/14.5 V

38
BUZZING / ELECTRONIC CALL SYSTEM
84 mm
Cod. 9600002 TUN-001
UNIVERSAL TELEPHONE
1

The lock-release button (1) is located on one side of the phone, allowing you to open the entry door without
224 mm

having to pick up the receiver.

Replacement installations:
A telephone which is compatible with the door entry systems of other manufacturers (see the compatibility
table on page 41). For this type of installation, the telephone is equipped with loudspeaker volume and micro-
phone controls, to avoid possible problems of acoustic feedback in the entrance panel or in the telephone
itself.
50.6 mm

Operating temperature +5 to + 55 °C

Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment and are intended for use exclusively with
ALCAD audio units. Do not use the terminals of the equipment to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting
the manufacturer.

J1 TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

1,2 Lock release
3,2 Telephone microphone 1,2 5/18 V 0V
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call 5.6 - 6.6 V
6,2 Buzzing call 3,2 9V
Audio max. 4 Vpp
1 2 3 4 5 6 4,2 0V Audio max. 7.0 Vpp

Tone max. 7.0/10.5 Vpp

5,2 0V
9/14.5 V

6,2 0V 12 V

Description of terminals in replacement installations:

Note: For the testing of the equipment, please refer to the
appropriate manufacturer's technical documentation. J1 1,2 Lock release
3,2 Telephone microphone
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call
6,2 Buzzing call

J1 Compatibility jumper
1 2 3 4 5 6

39
 84 mm Cod. 9600011 TUN-002
UNIVERSAL TELEPHONE WITH 2 PUSHBUTTONS
1
The lock-release button (1) is located on one side of the phone, allowing you to open the entry door without
224 mm

2
having to pick up the receiver. There is also a potential-free auxiliary pushbutton (2), which can be used for
additional functions (e.g. opening a second door).
Replacement installations:
A telephone which is compatible with the door entry systems of other manufacturers (see the compatibility
table on page 41). For this type of installation, the telephone is equipped with loudspeaker volume and
microphone controls, to avoid possible problems of acoustic feedback in the entrance panel or in the tele-
phone itself.
50.6 mm

Operating temperature +5 to + 55 °C

Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment and are intended for use exclusively with
ALCAD audio units. Do not use the terminals of the equipment to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting
the manufacturer.
1,2 Lock release TERMINALS AT REST WORKING
J1 3,2 Telephone microphone
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call 1,2 5/18 V 0V
6,2 Buzzing call
5.6 - 6.6 V
3,2 9V
24 , 25 Auxiliary push-button Audio max. 4 Vpp
Important:
1 2 3 4 5 6 24 25 The terminals 24, 25 are potential-free 4,2 0V Audio max. 7.0 Vpp
contacts.
Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V Tone max. 7.0/10.5 Vpp
5,2 0V
9/14.5 V

6,2 0V 12 V

Description of terminals in replacement installations:

1,2 Lock release
J1
Note: For the testing of the equipment, please refer to the appropriate 3,2 Telephone microphone
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
manufacturer's technical documentation. 5,2 Electronic call
6,2 Buzzing call
24 , 25 Auxiliary push-button

J1 Compatibility jumper
1 2 3 4 5 6 24 25
Important:
The terminals 24, 25 are potential-free
Auxiliary pushbutton. State of the contacts contacts.
Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V

STATE OF THE CONTACTS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

24, 25

40
REPLACEMENT INSTALLATIONS
COMPATIBILITY TABLE
MODEL
A B

ALCAD TUN-001/TUN-002 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1
ACET 5 2 10 7 9 A
AMPER D C A B E A
ATEA 2 3 4 1 5 A
AUTA TF92 (Electronic) 10 4 3 7 12 A
AUTELCO P5 1 a b 2 A
BELL SYSTEM TELEPHO Z O R T I A
BOGEN T 3 1 2 6 A
BPT 2 4 1 5 3 A
CENTRAMATIC 4 1 2 3 5 A
CITESA 1 C 4 3 B A
CITOVOX 5 9 10 7 T A
COMELIT OKAY 5 4 3/6 2 1 A
ELBEX LOW MIC SPEC + A
ELVOX 2 9 6 4 + A
ELVOX 801-822, 870, 902/000 7 3/4/5 2 1 6 A
FARFISA 5 3 1 2 6 A
FERMAX GONDOLA 4 3 1 2 V/5 A
FERMAX REKTO TF-4 P C A B E A
FERMAX 2044, 20440, 21100 1 3 2 6 4 B
FRINGE 2 1 3 6 4 4 A
GAME P 3 2 1 Z A
GIRO 2 1 3 6 4 A
GOLMAR T-600 T 3 1 2 6 A
GOLMAR T-800 P1 3 5 10 0 A
GOLMAR T-810 P1 3 5 10 7 A
GOLMAR T-1000 X A M S N A

GOLMAR T-2800 4 3 5 10 7 A
LT TERRANEO 603N T1 3 1 2 6 A
OSTELVI 9 6 2 1 7 A
PORMAT
RIPOLLES 3 8 1 2 4 A
RITTO ELEGANT 40518 11 13 12 15 14 A
SAFNAT 4 2 1 3 V A
SELTI 5 3 1 2 6 A
SIEDLE HT 611-01 1 9/C 2 11 7 A
SPRINT "/" 3 1 2 6 A
STR NH200 1 O M T S A
STR NH205 1 O M T S A
TAGRA 8 6 2 1 4 A
TEGUI GL 3 2 4 5 1 A
TEGUI HORIZON (Buzzer) 3 2 4 5 1 A
TEGUI HORIZON (Electronic) 3 2 4 5 1 A
TELEVES 4 3 2 1 T A
TESLA DDZ 85 1 3 2 6 4 A
TESLA DDZ 93 Z 3 2 6 4 A
TUNE 8 6 2 1 4 A
URMET 730, 930, 1030, 1130 8/9 11 2 1 7 A
URMET 9 6 2 1 7 A
VIDEX 5 7 1 2 6 A 41
YUS PHONE EL - T R B/PT A
ACCESSORIES FOR TELEPHONES
DESKTOP SUPPORTS
72 mm Cod. 9730029 SST-001
DESKTOP SUPPORT FOR TELEPHONE
Support for desktop installation of the door entry system telephone.

205 mm
49 mm

13O

MONITORS AND CONNECTION BRACKETS FOR HOUSES AND

FLATS
MONITORS FOR HOUSES AND FLATS
Monitors for wall-mounting on connection bracket (1). Manufactured
1 in ABS plastic. 2

Complete confidentiality of audio and video communication and

automatic switch-on feature. The monitor remains on standby until a call 5

is received or the automatic switch-on feature is activated. When either

of these events occurs, the audio, video and door-opening functions are
activated for the time-setting controlled by the audio unit. 4
6
3 7
Electronic call system: when a call is made from the entrance panel, 8
8 7 6

the call tone generated by the audio unit is heard in the loudspeaker of
the receiver of the monitor.
Monitors have a button on the side for opening the door (2), making
2 it possible to activate the electric lock without having to pick up the recei- 9

ver, an auto switch-on button (3), and two extra buttons - which are
potential-free - for auxiliary functions (4). The current operating state is shown by a LED (5). There are separate controls for brightness
(6) and contrast (7), as well as an on/off switch for the screen (8). The receiver of the monitor has a built-in electret-type microphone
and a 16 Ω neodine speaker. The receiver cable is flexible and extensible with telephone-type connectors (9).
Note: For desktop installation of monitors, a desktop support must be used (see "Accessories for monitors" on page 45).

Monitors are either black and white (B/W) or colour, depending on the type of video unit which is to be installed in the entrance
panel (i.e. whether B/W or colour).

42
 197 mm B/W (BLACK AND WHITE) SYSTEM
Cod. 9630000 MVB-001
B/W VIDEO DOOR ENTRY MONITOR
224 mm

Black and white monitor with a flat 4-inch CRT screen. For use in video door entry installations with coaxial
cable or with twisted pair.

Operating temperature +5 to + 55 °C

64.3 mm

COLOUR SYSTEM
Cod. 9630001 MVC-001
COLOUR VIDEO DOOR ENTRY MONITOR
Colour monitor with a 4-inch TFT screen. For use in video door entry installations with coaxial cable or with
twisted pair.

Operating temperature +5 to + 55 °C

CONNECTIONS BRACKETS FOR HOUSES AND FLATS

Fixing to the wall Fixing to the standard electric box Brackets for wall-mounting of the video door entry monitor.
They include lift-up type connection terminals to ensure correct
connection. They have several fixing points where they can be
fixed to a wall or to a standard 60mm x 60mm electrical box.

Connection brackets fall into two groups: those for coaxial

cable and those for twisted pair, depending on the type of
cable which will be used in the installation to transmit the
video signal from the video unit.

43
COAXIAL CABLE
166 mm Cod. 9630002 SCM-010
MONITOR CONNECTION BRACKET. COAXIAL CABLE
Bracket with conventional 6+N+coaxial connection, incorporating the 4+N connection system, with 2 wires
193 mm

for supplying power to the video system of the monitor and coaxial cable to carry the video signal.

Operating temperature +5 to + 55 °C

Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment and are intended
for use exclusively with ALCAD audio units and video units. Do not use the terminals of the equipment to
supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

CC1
CC1 Monitor connector TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING
1,2 Electric lock release
3,2 Monitor microphone 1,2 5V 5V 0V
A B J1
4,2 Monitor loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call 5.6 - 6.6 V
3,2 0V 9V
Audio max. 4 Vpp
R1 V1 , M Signal of video

+,- Power supply voltage 4,2 0V 0V Audio max. 7.0 Vpp

V1 24 , 25 Auxiliary push-button (P1)
M
Tone max. 10.5 Vpp
M 26 , 27 Auxiliary push-button (P2) 5,2 0V 0V
V1
14.5 V
24 Important: 0V
25 The terminals 24, 25, 26 and 27 V1 , M 1 Vpp ±0.25 (75 Ω)
26 are potential-free contacts. 1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω) (1)
27 Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V
28
+,- 15 V ±10%

1 2 3 4 5
(1) In cases of multiple points of entry, when any entrance panel video unit is activated.

Auxiliary pushbuttons. State of the contacts

PUSHBUTTON CORRESPONDING TO THE TERMINALS 24, 25 PUSHBUTTON CORRESPONDING TO THE TERMINALS 26, 27

STATE OF THE CONTACTS STATE OF THE CONTACTS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

24, 25 26, 27

TWISTED PAIR
166 mm Cod. 9630003 SCM-020
MONITOR CONNECTION BRACKET. TWISTED PAIR
Bracket with conventional 6+N+twisted pair connection, incorporating the 4+N connection system, with 2
193 mm

wires for supplying power to the video system of the monitor and twisted pair to carry the video signal.

Operating temperature +5 to + 55 °C

Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment and are intended
for use exclusively with ALCAD audio units and video units. Do not use the terminals of the equipment to
supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.
44
 CC1

CC1 Monitor connector TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

1,2 Electric lock release

3,2 Monitor microphone 1, 2 5V 5V 0V
A B J1
4,2 Monitor loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call 5.6 - 6.6 V
3, 2 0V 9V
Audio max 4 Vpp
R1 T1+ , T1- Signal of video

+,- Power supply voltage 4, 2 0V 0V Audio max 7.0 Vpp

T1+
T1-
24 , 25 Auxiliary push-button (P1) Tone max 10.5 Vpp
T1-
26 , 27 Auxiliary push-button (P2) 5, 2 0V 0V
T1+
14.5 V
24 Important: T1+ , _
25
The terminals 24, 25, 26 and 27 T1 , _ 0V 6.5 V ± 0.5
26
27
are potential-free contacts.
+,_
28 Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V
15 V ±10%

1 2 3 4 5

Auxiliary pushbuttons. State of the contacts

PUSHBUTTON CORRESPONDING TO THE TERMINALS 24, 25 PUSHBUTTON CORRESPONDING TO THE TERMINALS 26, 27

STATE OF THE CONTACTS STATE OF THE CONTACTS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

24, 25 26, 27

ACCESSORIES FOR MONITORS

DESKTOP SUPPORTS

170 mm
Cod. 9730049 SSM-001
DESKTOP SUPPORT FOR MONITOR
87 mm
1
Support for desktop installation of the video door entry system monitor.
CC1

In addition to the desktop support itself (1), a connection base is included (with
80 mm

female SCART connector) for wall mounting (2) as well as a 2-metre multiwire
SCART connector cable (3) for linking the connection bracket of the monitor to the
170 mm
base.
25 mm
2
160 mm

45 O

45
Description of terminals and typical voltages of the connection base depending on the condition of the equip-
ment:

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

1,2 Lock release
3,2 Telephone microphone
1,2 5V 5V 0V
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call 5.6 - 6.6 V
3,2 0V 9V
T1+ , T1- Signal of video (twisted pair) Audio max. 4 Vpp
T1+ T1- T1- T1+ +15V S2 D1 D2 S5
V1 M M V1 1 2 3 4 5 24 25 V1 , M Signal of video (coaxial) 4,2 0V 0V Audio max. 7.0 Vpp
+,- Power supply voltage
Tone max. 10.5 Vpp
24 , 25 Auxiliary push-button (P1) 5,2 0V 0V
14.5 V
Importante:
Las bornas 24 y 25 son contactos
libres de potencial. +,_ 15 V ±10%
Limitaciones de conexión: 50 mA - 12 V

V1 , M 0 Vpp 1 Vpp ± 0.25 (75 Ω)

T1+ , _
0V 6.5 V ± 0.5
T1 , _

COVER FRAMES FOR MONITORS

2
Frames (1) manufactured in aluminium. Useful when a flush-
1
mounted monitor is replaced and the cavity in the wall needs to
BA
3
be covered (2) so that the new monitor can then be mounted (3).
BA

These frames also facilitate installation when the wall on which

ARRI ARRI
UP T
UP T
HAU HAU

the monitor is to be located is uneven or out of true, making it

easier to mount the monitor.

Available in three models: two of these have standard dimensions while the third is generic, with dimensions which can be defi-
ned by the user according to the needs of the installation.

250 mm 3mm
Cod. 9730035 MAE-001
COVER FRAME 250x275 mm
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
275 mm

300 mm 3mm
Cod. 9730036 MAE-002
COVER FRAME 300x325 mm
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
325 mm

46
Cod. 9730034 MAE-900 3mm

GENERIC COVER FRAME

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

Note: See the ALCAD website at www.alcad.net for information on ordering the generic cover frame.

TAP-OFFS AND SPLITTERS

Elements which make it possible to distribute the video signal from the video unit to the different dwellings in the installation.

TAP-OFFS
Elements with several tapped outputs without loss for connection to monitors (1) and with 1
through output for connection to the next tap-off (2) when the desired distribution of the signal is
star-shaped, installing one tap-off for each floor or ramification of the building.
2 1
Tap-offs fall into two groups: those for coaxial cable and those for twisted pair. The choice of
tap-off will depend on which type of cable is to be used in the installation to transmit the video
signal from the video unit.

COAXIAL CABLE

88 mm Cod. 9730031 DIV-024

COAXIAL VIDEO TAP-OFF, 4 OUTPUTS TO MONITORS
57 mm

Tap-off with 4 tapped outputs without loss for connection

1
to monitors. Connection by means of screw terminals and Screw
clamps, 75 Ω coaxial cable (1). It incorporates a 75 Ω terminal
Clamp
24 mm resistor for the closing of the video line (2); this should only
be removed when using the through out-put of the tap-off.
The tap-off only consumes energy when one of the monitors
connected to its tap outputs is activated. Connection of coaxial cable
Internal
conductor
Technical characteristics: 2 Mesh

75 Ohm
Outputs 4

Ouput impedance

Connection By means of screw terminals

and clamps

Gain 1

Video input level 1 Vpp ±0.25 (75 Ω)

Power supply Through monitor (coaxial)

47
TWISTED PAIR

88 mm Cod. 9730015 DIV-034

TWISTED PAIR VIDEO TAP-OFF, 4 OUTPUTS TO MONITORS
DIV-034
40 mm

cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

Tap-off with 4 tapped outputs without loss for connection

to monitors. Connection by means of terminal. Incorporates
21 mm
a 120 Ω resistor for the closing of the video line (1); this -033
45
00
1
DIV 7

should only be removed when using the through out-put of

d.9
co T1
T 1+
T1
T 1+
T1

the tap-off. The tap-off only consumes energy when one of

T 1+
T1
T 1+
T1
T 1+
T1 T1

the monitors connected to its tap outputs is activated.

T 1+
T1
+
T1
+
T1
T1
T1
+
T1

1
Technical characteristics: 120 Ohm

Outputs 4

Ouput impedance

Connection By means of screw terminals

Video input level 0.5 Vpp ±0.1 (120 Ω)

Power supply Through twisted pair

SPLITTERS
Video risers Video risers
Elements with independent video signal outputs. Of use when the installation requires
several branches or columns of video.
Splitter
Splitters fall into two groups: those for coaxial cable and those for twisted pair. The choi-
ce of splitter will depend on which type of cable is to be used in the installation to transmit
the video signal from the video unit.

COAXIAL CABLE

88 mm
Cod. 9730032 DIV-124
COAXIAL AMPLIFIED VIDEO SPLITTER, 4 OUTPUTS
57 mm

Splitter with 4 independent video signal outputs. Can be powered by either AC (alternating current) or
DC (direct current). Connection by means of screw terminal.

Características técnicas:
24 mm
1
2
Outputs 4 Screw
terminal
Clamp
Ouput impedance 75 Ω

Connection By means of screw terminals

and clamps

Gain 1 .. 1.3 Connection of coaxial cable

Internal
conductor
Video input level 1 Vpp ±0.25 (75 Ω)
Mesh

Power supply 15 V

48
TWISTED PAIR

88 mm
Cod. 9730016 DIV-134
DIV-134
TWISTED PAIR AMPLIFIED VIDEO SPLITTER, 4 OUTPUTS
40 mm

cod.9730016

12 V 15 V

Splitter with 4 independent video signal outputs. Can be powered by either AC (alternating current) or
+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
V

DC (direct current). Connection by means of screw terminal.

21 mm
Technical characteristics:

Outputs 4
46
-13300
1
DIV
d.9
7 T1
co T 1+
T1

Ouput impedance 120 Ω

T 1+
T1
T 1+
T1
T 1+
T1
15 V T 1+
12 V +

By means of screw terminals

V

Connection

Video input level 0.5 Vpp ±0.1 (120 Ω)

Power supply 15V /12V

ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS

Entrance panels consist of two modules, each of which comes in various
1
models. These modules constitute the upper part (1) and lower part (2) of the
entrance panel that is to be installed. Any configuration of entrance panel can
be achieved by the different combinations available. Several entrance panels
can be connected side by side to obtain the desired number of pushbuttons.

The choice of the upper and lower modules, as well as the number of entran-
2 ce panels required, will determine the final size of the panel and, consequently,
the dimensions and the number of flush-mounted or surface wall-mounted boxes
to be used. (See Chapter 3: "Entrance panels: dimensions and accessories").

Entrance panels in parallel

ENTRANCE PANEL UPPER MODULES

These modules are made with an aluminium profile and house the audio unit, the video unit, the card holder, or various combina-
tions of these. They are divided into single, double or triple modules, depending on whether the same module incorporates one or
two or all three of these elements.
Available for electronic call or buzzing call systems. Electronic call system: when a call is made from the entrance panel, the call
tone generated by the audio unit is heard through the loudspeaker of the telephone receiver. Buzzing call system: when a call is made
from the entrance panel, the call signal generated by the audio unit is heard in the telephone buzzer.
Two TORX tamper-proof screws are provided with the upper modules. These replace the standard screws of the entrance panel
cover frame and prevent unauthorised persons from tampering with the panel.

Single upper modules Double upper modules Triple upper modules

49
 The following tables show which entrance panel upper module with audio unit and video unit to select to meet the requirements
of the installation which is going to be performed.

ELECTRONIC CALL INDIVIDUAL ENTRANCE

PARTICULAR INSTALLATION PANEL MODULE, WITH
SINGLE MODULE DOUBLE MODULE TRIPLE MODULE VIDEO UNIT

Standard installation MAN-410 MMN-410

ELECTRONIC DOOR
Several points of entry MAN-430 MMN-430
ENTRY SYSTEM
Housing estate
ELECTRONIC DOOR Standard installation
ENTRY SYSTEM WITH MAN-430 MMN-430
Several points of entry
CONCIERGE UNIT
ELECTRONIC DOOR Standard installation MAN-410 MMN-410
ENTRY SYSTEM WITH Several points of entry MAN-430 MMN-430
INTERNAL COMMUNICATION

ELECTRONIC DOOR Standard installation

ENTRY SYSTEM WITH Several points of entry MAN-441 MMN-441
CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE Housing estate
ELECTRONIC DOOR
ENTRY SYSTEM Standard installation MAN-451 MMN-451
REPLACEMENT INSTALLATIONS
ELECTRONIC VIDEO DOOR Standard installation MMN-441
ENTRY SYSTEM Several points of entry MAN-441 MCN-441 MDT-441 (B/W) MVN-903 (B/W)
Housing estate MVN-301 (B/W)
COAXIAL MDN-441 (B/W) MDT-442 (COLOUR) MVN-905 (COLOUR)
MVN-302 (COLOUR)
MDN-442 (COLOUR)

ELECTRONIC VIDEO DOOR Standard installation MAN-441 MMN-441

ENTRY SYSTEM Several points of entry MVN-004 (B/W) MCN-441 MDT-444 (B/W) MVN-901 (B/W)
TWISTED PAIR Housing estate MVN-005 (COLOUR) MDN-444 (B/W)) MDT-445 (COLOUR) MVN-904 (COLOUR)
MDN-445 (COLOUR)
MMN-441
MAN-441
TV DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM Standard installation MCN-441 MDT-443 (B/W) MVN-902 ((B/W)
MVN-201 (B/W)
MDN-443 (B/W)

BUZZING CALL
PARTICULAR INSTALLATION
SINGLE MODULE DOUBLE MODULE

Standard installation MAN-451 MMN-451

ELECTRONIC DOOR
ENTRY SYSTEM Several points of entry MAN-430 + AAL-001 MMN-430 + AAL-001
Housing estate
ELECTRONIC DOOR
ENTRY SYSTEM Standard installation MAN-451 MMN-451
REPLACEMENT INSTALLATIONS

50
 A brief description of each entrance panel upper modules is given below.

ENTRANCE PANEL SINGLE UPPER MODULES

SINGLE MODULES WITH AUDIO UNIT

128 mm
Cod. 9670115 MAN-410 2
78.5 mm

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-201

ELECTRONIC AUDIO UNIT 1

12 mm Module housing the GRF-201 electronic audio unit for stan-

dard installations (1). Fitted with rubber strips for water-tight-
ness and with rings (2) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

128 mm Cod. 9670116 MAN-430

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-203
78.5 mm

2
ELECTRONIC AUDIO UNIT FOR SEVERAL
POINTS OF ENTRY
12 mm Module housing the GRF-203 electronic audio unit for insta- 1

llations with several points of entry (1). Fitted with rubber strips
for water-tightness and with rings (2) for hanging in the flush-
mounted box.

128 mm Cod. 9670118 MAN-441

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-204
78.5 mm

2
ELECTRONIC AUDIO UNIT WITH THE CONFI-
DENTIALITY FEATURE
12 mm Module housing the GRF-204 electronic audio unit for insta- 1

llations with the confidentiality feature (1). Fitted with rubber

strips for water-tightness and with rings (2) for hanging in the
flush-mounted box.

128 mm Cod. 9670119 MAN-451

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-205 UNI-
78.5 mm

VERSAL AUDIO UNIT 2

Module housing the GRF-205 electronic audio unit for insta-

12 mm
llations with electronic call or buzzing call (1). Fitted with rub- 1

ber strips for water-tightness and with rings (2) for hanging in
the flush-mounted box.

SINGLE MODULES WITH VIDEO UNIT

128 mm Cod. 9670009 MVN-301

2
78.5 mm

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GENERIC B/W

TCB-011 VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL
1
Module which houses the generic black and white video unit
12 mm
for coaxial cable, model TCB-011 (1). Fitted with rubber strips
for water-tightness and with rings (2) for hanging in the flush-
mounted box.

51
 Cod. 9670045 MVN-302
128 mm
ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GENERIC 2
78.5 mm

COLOUR TCB-021 VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL

Module which houses the generic colour video unit for coa- 1

xial cable, model TCB-021 (1). Fitted with rubber strips for
12 mm
water-tightness and with rings (2) for hanging in the flush-moun-
ted box.

128 mm Cod. 9670012 MVN-004

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GENERIC B/W 2
78.5 mm

TCB-040 VIDEO UNIT, TWISTED PAIR

Module which houses the generic black and white video unit 1

12 mm for twisted pair, model TCB-040 (1). Fitted with rubber strips for
water-tightness and with rings (2) for hanging in the flush-moun-
ted box.

128 mm Cod. 9670157 MVN-005

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GENERIC 2
78.5 mm

COLOUR TCB-050 VIDEO UNIT, TWISTED PAIR

Module which houses the generic colour video unit for twis- 1

12 mm ted pair, model TCB-050 (1). Fitted with rubber strips for water-
tightness and with rings (2) for hanging in the flush-mounted
box.

128 mm
Cod. 9670101 MVN-201
ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GENERIC B/W
78.5 mm

2
TCB-210 VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL, FOR TV DOOR
ENTRY SYSTEM
1

12 mm
Module which houses the generic black and white video unit
for coaxial cable, model TCB-210 (1) in TV door entry insta-
llations. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with
rings (2) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

SINGLE MODULES WITH CARD-HOLDER

Cod. 9670018 MTN-000

128 mm
ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH CARD-HOL-
DER
78.5 mm

Module which houses an informative card-holder (1) of

76.5mm x 43.5mm made from polycarbonate. Used in insta-
12 mm llations, generally with several entrance panels, when it is
1
necessary to display information of interest on one of these
panels. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with
rings (2) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

52
SINGLE BLANK MODULES

Cod. 9670021 MLN-000

128 mm
BLANK ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE 1

Blank module which does not house any element in its inte-
78.5 mm

rior. Used in installations, generally with several entrance

panels, when some of the panels do not contain any elements
12 mm at all (i.e. no audio unit, no video unit and no card-holder).
Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (1)
for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

COMPACT MODULES

128 mm Cod. 9670106 MVN-903

COMPACT ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GENERIC
B/W TCB-011 VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL
147 mm

A compact model (i.e. which does not require a lower modu-

le) which houses the generic B/W video unit for coaxial cable,
model TCB-011 (1). Used in video door entry installations
12 mm where the video unit is located at a certain distance from the
entrance panel. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and
with rings (2) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

Cod. 9670107 MVN-905

128 mm COMPACT ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GENERIC
COLOUR TCB-021 VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL
A compact model (i.e. which does not require a lower modu-
147 mm

le) which houses the generic colour video unit for coaxial
cable, model TCB-021 (1). Used in video door entry installa-
tions where the video unit is located at a certain distance from
the entrance panel. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness
12 mm
and with rings (2) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

Cod. 9670013 MVN-901

COMPACT ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GENERIC
B/W TCB-040 VIDEO UNIT, TWISTED PAIR
128 mm A compact model (i.e. which does not require a lower modu-
le) which houses the generic B/W video unit for twisted pair,
model TCB-040 (1). Used in video door entry installations
147 mm

where the video unit is located at a certain distance from the

entrance panel. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and
with rings (2) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

12 mm

53
 Cod. 9670019 MVN-904
128 mm
COMPACT ENTRANCE PANEL WITH GENERIC
COLOUR TCB-050 VIDEO UNIT, TWISTED PAIR
147 mm

A compact model (i.e. which does not require a lower modu-

le) which houses the generic colour video unit for twisted pair,
model TCB-050 (1). Used in video door entry installations
where the video unit is located at a certain distance from the
12 mm
entrance panel. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and
with rings (2) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

Cod. 9670100 MVN-902

COMPACT ENTRANCE PANEL WITH B/W
2
128 mm TCB-210 VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL, FOR TV DOOR
ENTRY SYSTEM
A compact model (i.e. which does not require a lower
147 mm

module) which houses the B/W video unit for coaxial cable, 1

model TCB-210 (1), in TV door entry installations. Fitted with

rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (2) for hanging
12 mm in the flush-mounted box.

ENTRANCE PANEL DOUBLE UPPER MODULES

UPPER MODULES WITH AUDIO UNIT AND VIDEO UNIT

128 mm Cod. 9670130 MDN-441

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULES WITH GRF-204
ELECTRONIC AUDIO UNIT WITH THE CONFIDEN-
126.5 mm

TIALITY FEATURE AND GENERIC B/W TCB-011

VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL 2

Module which houses the electronic audio unit for installa-

12 mm
tions with the confidentiality feature, model GRF-204 (1), and 1

the generic black and white video unit, model TCB-011 (2), for
coaxial cable. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and
with rings (3) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

128 mm Cod. 9670151 MDN-442

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULES WITH GRF-204 3

ELECTRONIC AUDIO UNIT WITH THE CONFIDEN-

126.5 mm

TIALITY FEATURE AND GENERIC COLOUR 2

TCB-021 VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL

Module which houses the electronic audio unit for installa- 1

12 mm tions with the confidentiality feature, model GRF-204 (1), and

the generic colour video unit, model TCB-021 (2), for coaxial
cable. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with
rings (3) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.
54
 Cod. 9670122 MDN-444
128 mm ENTRANCE PANEL MODULES WITH GRF-204
ELECTRONIC AUDIO UNIT WITH THE CONFIDEN- 3

TIALITY FEATURE AND GENERIC B/W TCB-040

126.5 mm

VIDEO UNIT, TWISTED PAIR 2

Module which houses the electronic audio unit for installa-

tions with the confidentiality feature, model GRF-204 (1), and 1
12 mm the generic black and white video unit, model TCB-040 (2), for
twisted pair. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and
with rings (3) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

Cod. 9670162 MDN-445

128 mm
ENTRANCE PANEL MODULES WITH GRF-204
ELECTRONIC AUDIO UNIT WITH THE CONFIDEN-
126.5 mm

3
TIALITY FEATURE AND GENERIC COLOUR
TCB-050 VIDEO UNIT, TWISTED PAIR
2
Module which houses the electronic audio unit for installa-
12 mm
tions with the confidentiality feature, model GRF-204 (1), and
the generic colour video unit, model TCB-050 (2), for twisted 1

pair. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings
(3) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

128 mm
Cod. 9670140 MDN-443
ENTRANCE PANEL MODULES WITH GRF-204
ELECTRONIC AUDIO UNIT WITH THE CONFIDEN- 3
126.5 mm

TIALITY FEATURE AND B/W TCB-210 VIDEO

UNIT, COAXIAL, FOR TV DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2

Module which houses the electronic audio unit for installa-

12 mm tions with the confidentiality feature, model GRF-204 (1), and 1

black and white video unit, for tv door entry system, model
TCB-210 (2), for coaxial cable. Fitted with rubber strips for
water-tightness and with rings (3) for hanging in the flush-moun-
ted box.

UPPER MODULES WITH AUDIO UNIT AND CARD-HOLDER

128 mm
Cod. 9670126 MMN-410
ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-201
126.5 mm

ELECTRONIC AUDIO UNIT AND CARD-HOLDER 3

Module which houses the electronic audio unit, for standard

2
installations, model GRF-201 (1) and an informative card-hol-
der (2) of 76.5mm x 43.5mm manufactured in polycarbonate.
12 mm
Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (3)
1
for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

55
 Cod. 9670128 MMN-430
128 mm
ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-203 3

ELECTRONIC AUDIO UNIT FOR SEVERAL POINTS

126.5 mm

OF ENTRY AND CARD-HOLDER 2

Module which houses the electronic audio unit, for installa-

tions with several points of entry, model GRF-203 (1) and an
informative card-holder (2) of 76.5mm x 43.5mm manufactu- 1
12 mm
red in polycarbonate. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tight-
ness and with rings (3) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

Cod. 9670137 MMN-441

128 mm 3
ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-204
ELECTRONIC AUDIO UNIT WITH THE CONFIDEN- 2
126.5 mm

TIALITY FEATURE AND CARD-HOLDER

Module which houses the electronic audio unit, for installa-
tions with the confidentiality feature, model GRF-204 (1) and 1
an informative card-holder (2) of 76.5mm x 43.5mm manufac-
12 mm
tured in polycarbonate. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tight-
ness and with rings (3) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

Cod. 9670127 MMN-451

3
128 mm ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-205 UNI-
VERSAL AUDIO UNIT AND CARD-HOLDER 2

Module which houses the electronic audio unit, for installa-

126.5 mm

tions with electronic call or buzzing call, model GRF-205 (1)

and an informative card-holder (2) of 76.5mm x 43.5mm 1

manufactured in polycarbonate. Fitted with rubber strips for

12 mm water-tightness and with rings (3) for hanging in the flush-moun-
ted box.

UPPER MODULES WITH AUDIO UNIT AND BLANK

128 mm Cod. 9670138 MCN-441

2
ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-204
126.5 mm

ELECTRONIC AUDIO UNIT WITH THE CONFIDEN-

TIALITY FEATURE AND BLANK
Module which houses the electronic audio unit, for installa-
tions with the confidentiality feature, model GRF-204 (1). Fitted
12 mm 1
with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (2) for han-
ging in the flush-mounted box.

56
UPPER MODULES WITH CARD-HOLDER AND BLANK
128 mm
Cod. 9670086 MLT-000 2

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH CARD-HOLDER

126.5 mm

AND BLANK 1

Module which houses an informative card-holder (1) of 76.5mm x

43.5mm made from polycarbonate. Used in installations, generally
12 mm with several entrance panels, when it is necessary to display infor-
mation of interest. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with
rings (2) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

ENTRANCE PANEL TRIPLE UPPER MODULES

UPPER MODULES WITH AUDIO UNIT, VIDEO UNIT AND CARD-HOLDER

128 mm
Cod. 9670131 MDT-441 4

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULES WITH GRF-204 ELEC-

3
TRONIC AUDIO UNIT WITH THE CONFIDENTIALITY
174.5 mm

FEATURE, GENERIC B/W TCB-011 VIDEO UNIT, COA-

2
XIAL AND CARD-HOLDER
Module which houses the electronic audio unit, for installations
12 mm
with the confidentiality feature, model GRF-204 (1); the generic 1

black and white video unit, model TCB-011 (2), for coaxial cable;
and an informative card-holder (3) of 76.5mm x 43.5mm made from
polycarbonate. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with
rings (4) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

128 mm 4

Cod. 9670152 MDT-442

3
ENTRANCE PANEL MODULES WITH GRF-204 ELEC-
TRONIC AUDIO UNIT WITH THE CONFIDENTIALITY
174.5 mm

FEATURE, GENERIC COLOUR TCB-021 VIDEO UNIT, 2

COAXIAL AND CARD-HOLDER

Module which houses the electronic audio unit, for installations 1

with the confidentiality feature, model GRF-204 (1); the generic

12 mm
colour video unit, model TCB-021 (2), for coaxial cable; and an
informative card-holder (3) of 76.5mm x 43.5mm made from poly-
carbonate. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings
(4) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

57
 128 mm Cod. 9670123 MDT-444
ENTRANCE PANEL MODULES WITH GRF-204 ELEC-
4
TRONIC AUDIO UNIT WITH THE CONFIDENTIALITY
174.5 mm

FEATURE, GENERIC B/W TCB-040 VIDEO UNIT, 3

TWISTED PAIR AND CARD-HOLDER

Module which houses the electronic audio unit, for installations 2

with the confidentiality feature, model GRF-204 (1); the generic

12 mm black and white video unit, model TCB-040 (2), for twisted pair; and
an informative card-holder (3) of 76.5mm x 43.5mm made from 1

polycarbonate. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with

rings (4) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

128 mm Cod. 9670163 MDT-445

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULES WITH GRF-204 ELEC-
TRONIC AUDIO UNIT WITH THE CONFIDENTIALITY 4
174.5 mm

FEATURE, GENERIC COLOUR TCB-050 VIDEO UNIT,

3
TWISTED PAIR AND CARD-HOLDER
Module which houses the electronic audio unit, for installations with
the confidentiality feature, model GRF-204 (1); the generic colour 2

12 mm
video unit, model TCB-050 (2), for twisted pair; and an informative
card-holder (3) of 76.5mm x 43.5mm made from polycarbonate. 1

Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings (4) for han-
ging in the flush-mounted box.

Cod. 9670141 MDT-443

128 mm
ENTRANCE PANEL MODULES WITH GRF-204 ELEC-
TRONIC AUDIO UNIT WITH THE CONFIDENTIALITY 4

FEATURE, B/W TCB-210 VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL, FOR

174.5 mm

TV DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM, AND CARD-HOLDER 3

Module which houses the electronic audio unit, for installations with
the confidentiality feature, model GRF-204 (1); the black and white 2

video unit, model TCB-210 (2), for coaxial cable in TV door entry ins-
12 mm tallations; and an informative card-holder (3) of 76.5mm x 43.5mm
1
made from polycarbonate. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness
and with rings (4) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.

58
AUDIO UNITS IN ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS

Technical data regarding the various models of audio unit which can be incorporated in the upper entrance panel modules is given
in the following pages.

Cod. 9610028 GRF-201

ELECTRONIC AUDIO UNIT
Audio unit for standard installations of door entry system with electronic call. Conventional 4+N connection
1
system. Generation of electronic call with acoustic confirmation for the visitor.
The audio unit incorporates a microphone, a loudspeaker, a pushbutton to illuminate the card-holders of the
entrance panel (1), volume controls both for the panel (2) and for telephones (3), and jumper for the configu-
ration of the call tone: either double-tone or triple-tone (4). It also includes lift-up type connection terminals to
ensure correct connection.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Operating temperature -10 to + 55 °C

Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment
in door entry installations and in door entry installations with internal communication:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the termi-
nals of the equipment to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

2 3 4 V , 12 V

V , Power supply voltage 1,2 18 V 0V

GRF-201
cod. 9610028

1,2 Telephone lock release 9V 5.6 - 6.6 V

3,2
Made in Spain
3, 2 Telephones microphone Audio max. 4 Vpp
4,2 Telephones loudspeaker
3 2 J2 7,2 4,2 0V Audio max. 7.0 Vpp
Common push button terminal

9 , 10 Panel lighting Tone max. 7.0 Vpp

12 V~
V~ 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 7 11 , 12 Electric lock 7,2 9V
9V
J2 Selecting the electronic call tone

9 , 10 0V 12 V

11 , 12 0V 12 V

Cod. 9610029 GRF-203

ELECTRONIC AUDIO UNIT. SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY
Audio unit with built-in microprocessor for door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry.
2 1 Capable of controlling the priorities of the different points of entry of the installation directly, i.e. without
requiring audio selectors. Conventional 4+N connection system. Generation of electronic call with acoustic
confirmation for the visitor.
Note: In installations where a buzzer call is required, the audio unit must be used in conjunction with the
call adaptor accessory. See the technical data in the section “Call Adapter Accessories” on page 87.
The audio unit incorporates a microphone, a loudspeaker, a pushbutton to illuminate the card-holders of the
entrance panel (1), a red light which indicates when the panel is disabled (2), volume controls both for the
panel (3) and for telephones (4), jumper for precision adjustment of sound level (5) and jumper for the con-
figuration of the main panel (6): the main panel determines the panel with which telephones on standby are
in communication.
The unit also includes elevator-type connection terminals to ensure correct connection
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Operating temperature -10 to + 55 °C

59
 Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment in door entry ins-
tallations and in door entry installations with internal communication:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

V , 12 V
6 3 4 5
1,2 5V 0V
V , Power supply voltage
GRF-203 5.6 - 6.6 V
cod. 9610029
3,2 8V
1,2 Telephone lock release Audio max. 4 Vpp
3, 2 Telephone microphone
Made in Spain 4,2 Telephone loudspeaker 4,2 0V Audio max. 7.0 Vpp
J1 J2 7,2 Common push button terminal
Tone max. 10.5 Vpp
9 , 10 Panel lighting
12 V~ 7,2 14.5 V
11 , 12 Electric lock
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 14.5 V
16 , 18 Estate
9 , 10 0V 12 V
17 , 18 Several points of entry

J1 Main panel selection 11 , 12 0V 12 V

J2 Precision adjustment of sound level
16 , 18 0V 4V

17 , 18 0V 8V

Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment in door entry ins-
tallations with concierge unit:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

CONCIERGE DEACTIVATED CONCIERGE ACTIVATED

TERMINALS
AT REST WORKING AT REST WORKING

V , 12 V
6 3 4 5 V , Power supply voltage
1,2 5V 0V 5V 0V
1,2 Telephone lock release
GRF-203 5.6 - 6.6 V 5.6 - 6.6 V
cod. 9610029 3, 2 Telephone microphone 3,2 8V 8V
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker Audio max. 4 Vpp Audio max. 4 Vpp
7,2 Common push button terminal 4,2 Audio max. 7.0 Vpp Audio max. 7.0 Vpp
Made in Spain 0V 0V
J1 J2 9 , 10 Panel lighting
Tone max.
11 , 12 Electric lock 10.5 Vpp
12 V~ 7,2 14.5 V 14.5 V
13 , 15 Concierge (control signal)
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 14.5 V
14 , 15 Concierge

17 , 18 Several points of entry 9 , 10 0V 12 V 0V 12 V

J1 Main panel selection 11 , 12 0V 12 V 0V 12 V
J2 Precision adjustment
of sound level 13 , 15 0V 9V

Tone max. 7.0 Vpp

14 , 15 0V
9V

17 , 18 0V 8V 0V 8V

60
 Cod. 9610030 GRF-204
ELECTRONIC AUDIO UNIT WITH THE CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE
Audio unit with built-in microprocessor for door entry installations with confidentiality feature and video
2 1 door entry installations.
Capable of controlling the video unit in video door entry systems and of directly controlling the priorities of
the different points of entry of the installation, in installations with several points of entry, i.e. without requi-
ring audio selectors. Conventional 4+N connection system. Includes confidentiality feature and automatic
switch-on (video door entry systems). Generation of electronic call with acoustic confirmation for the visitor.
The audio unit incorporates a microphone, a loudspeaker, a pushbutton to illuminate the card-holders of the
entrance panel (1), a red light which indicates when the panel is disabled (2), volume controls both for the
panel (3) and for telephones/monitors (4), jumper for precision adjustment of the sound level (5) and another
for configuration of the main panel (6): the main panel determines the panel with which telephones and moni-
tors on standby communicate and on which the automatic switch-on system of the monitors acts.
The unit also includes elevator-type connection terminals to ensure correct connection
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Operating temperature +5 to + 55 °C

Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment in door entry ins-
tallations with confidentiality feature:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

6 3 4 5 V , 12 V
V , Power supply voltage
1,2 5V 0V
GRF-204 1,2 Telephones lock release
cod. 9610030
3, 2 Telephones microphone 5.6 - 6.6 V
4,2 Telephones loudspeaker 3,2 0V 8V
Audio max. 4 Vpp
19 Made in Spain 7,2 Common push button terminal
J1 J2 4,2 0V Audio max. 7.0 Vpp
9 , 10 Panel lighting
11 , 12 Electric lock
12 V~ Tone max. 10.5 Vpp
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 16 , 18 Estate 7,2 14.5 V
17 , 18 Several points of entry 14.5 V
J1 Main panel selection
9 , 10 0V 12 V
J2 Precision adjustment of sound level

11 , 12 0V 12 V

16 , 18 0V 4V

17 , 18 0V 8V

61
 Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment in video door
entry installations:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

V ,
V , 12 V
6 3 4 5 Power supply voltage

1,2 Telephones/monitors lock release 1,2 5V 0V

GRF-204 3, 2 Telephones/monitors microphone
cod. 9610030
4,2 Telephones/monitors loudspeaker 5.6 - 6.6 V
3,2 0V 8V
7,2 Common push button terminal Audio max. 4 Vpp
19 Made in Spain

9 , 10 Panel lighting 4,2 Audio max. 7.0 Vpp

J1 J2 0V
11 , 12 Electric lock

12 V~ 16 , 18 Estate Tone max. 10.5 Vpp

V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 17 , 18 Several points of entry 7,2 14.5 V
14.5 V
19 Alimentation (Basic installation)
and video unit control
9 , 10 0V 12 V
J1 Main panel selection
J2 Precision adjustment of sound level
11 , 12 0V 12 V

16 , 18 0V 4V

17 , 18 0V 8V

Cod. 9610031 GRF-205

UNIVERSAL AUDIO UNIT
Audio unit for standard installations of door entry system with electronic or buzzing call, made with ALCAD
1 telephones or with door entry system telephones of other manufacturers (replacement installations).
Conventional 4+N connection system. Generation of electronic call or buzzing call with acoustic confirma-
tion for the visitor.
The audio unit incorporates a microphone, a loudspeaker, a pushbutton to illuminate the card-holders of the
entrance panel (1), and volume controls both for the panel (2) and for telephones (3), and jumper for the con-
figuration of the call tone: either double-tone or triple-tone (4).
It also includes elevator-type connection terminals to ensure correct connection.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Operating temperature -10 to + 55 °C

62
 Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment in door entry ins-
tallations with ALCAD's telephones:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

V , 12 V
2 3 4

V , Power supply voltage

1,2 18 V 0V
GRF-205 1,2 Telephone lock release
cod. 9610031
9V 5.6 - 6.6 V
3, 2 Telephone microphone 3,2
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker Audio max. 4 Vpp
Made in Spain
7,2 Common push button terminal 4,2 Audio max. 7.0 Vpp
3 2 J2 (electronic call) 0V
8,2 Common push button terminal
(buzzing call) Tone max. 7.0 Vpp
12 V~ 9V
7,2
V~ 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 , 10 Panel lighting
9V
11 , 12 Electric lock

J2 Selecting the electronic call tone 8,2 12 V 11 V

9 , 10 0V 12 V

11 , 12 0V 12 V

Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment in replacement
installations:
Consult the technical data provided by the manufacturer of the entrance panel which is being replaced to know which terminals
correspond to the loudspeaker, microphone, lock release and common of the telephones in the installation.
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

2 3 4
V , Power supply voltage
V , 12 V

0 System with separate commons 0,2 18 V 0V

GRF-205
cod. 9610031
1,2 Telephone lock release
3, 2 Telephone microphone 1,2 18 V 0V
Made in Spain
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
9V 5.6 - 6.6 V
3 2 J2 7,2 Common push button terminal 3,2
(electronic call) Audio max. 4 Vpp
8,2 Common push button terminal
12 V~ (buzzing call) 4,2 0V Audio max. 7.0 Vpp
V~ 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8
9 , 10 Panel lighting
Tone max. 7.0 Vpp
11 , 12 Electric lock
7,2 9V
J2 Electronic call tone selection 9V

8,2 12 V 11 V

9 , 10 0V 12 V

11 , 12 0V 12 V

63
VIDEO UNITS IN ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS
Below are shown the technical data of each of the models of video unit which can be incorporated in the upper modules of entran-
ce panels.
Cod. 9640002 TCB-011
GENERIC B/W VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL
Black and white video unit with 1/3" CCD sensor, and output in
CCIR composite video for 75 Ω coaxial cable. Ability to control
directly, in installations with several points of entry, the video signal
from the different points of entry, without the need for video selec-
tors.
1
The video unit consists of a protective, polycarbonate front scre- 2

en, infrared LED auxiliary lighting for night vision, electronic auto-
iris, multidirectional control of the angle of vision - up to 10° (1). In
addition, it includes plug type connection terminals with lift-up type
connections to facilitate and guarantee correct connection of the
coaxial cable (2) and a short length of cable (3) for connection 3

with the electronic audio unit with confidentiality feature of the

entrance panel.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Description of terminals and technical characteristics:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE WORKING

+,- Power supply voltage
+,- 15 V (200 mA max)
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4 V1 , M Video signal to the monitors
V2 , M Video signal installations 0 Vpp
15V
with several points of entry V1, M (1)
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
Made in Spain
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
19 Video unit control
TCB-011
cod. 9640002 0 Vpp
V2, M (1)
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)

Operating temperature -10 to + 55 °C (1) In cases of multiple points of entry, when any entrance panel video unit is activated.

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

AREA OF VISION OF THE VIDEO UNIT Standard CCIR

VERTICAL HORIZONTAL Image sensor B/W CCD 1/3"

600 mm
Lighting Infrared
o
Horizontal 70
Angle of vision o
Vertical 65
765 mm

65∞ Orientation 10
o
600 mm

70∞
1700 mm

1680 mm

840 mm

64
 Cod. 9640009 TCB-021
GENERIC COLOUR VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL
Colour video unit with 1/4" CCD sensor, and output in PAL
composite video for 75 Ω coaxial cable. Ability to control
directly, in installations with several points of entry, the video
signal from the different points of entry, without the need for
video selectors.
1
The video unit consists of a protective, polycarbonate front 2

screen, white LED auxiliary lighting for night vision, automa-

tic white balance setting, multidirectional control of the angle
of vision - up to 10° (1). In addition, it includes plug type con-
nection terminals with lift-up type connections to facilitate and
guarantee correct connection of the coaxial cable (2) and a 3

short length of cable (3) for connection with the electronic

audio unit with confidentiality feature of the entrance panel.
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Description of terminals and technical characteristics:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE WORKING

+,- Power supply voltage
+,- 15 V (225 mA max)
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4 V1 , M Video signal to the monitors

V2 , M Video signal installations 0 Vpp

15V
with several points of entry V1, M (1)
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
Made in Spain
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
TCB-021 19 Video unit control
cod. 9640009 0 Vpp
V2, M (1)
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)

Operating temperature -10 to + 55 °C

(1) In cases of multiple points of entry, when any entrance panel video unit is activated.

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
AREA OF VISION OF THE VIDEO UNIT
Standard PAL
VERTICAL HORIZONTAL
Image sensor Colour CCD 1/4”
600 mm

Lighting White leds

o
Horizontal 70
Angle of vision o
Vertical 65
765 mm

65∞
o
Orientation 10
600 mm

70∞
1700 mm

1680 mm

840 mm

65
 Cod. 9640007 TCB-040
GENERIC B/W VIDEO UNIT, TWISTED PAIR
Black and white video unit with 1/3" CCD sensor, and video
output for twisted pair. Ability to control directly, in installations
with several points of entry, the video signal from the different
points of entry, without the need for video selectors.
The video unit consists of a protective, polycarbonate front 1
screen, infrared LED auxiliary lighting for night vision, electronic 2

auto-iris, and multidirectional control of the angle of vision - up to

10° (1). In addition, it includes plug type connection terminals
with lift-up type connections to facilitate and guarantee correct
connection of the twisted pair (2) and a short length of cable (3)
for connection with the electronic audio unit with confidentiality 3

feature of the entrance panel.

The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Description of terminals and technical characteristics:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE WORKING

T1+ , T1- Video signal to the monitors

T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+ Power supply Through audio unit
T2+ , T2- Video signal installations
with several points of entry
Output impedance 120 Ω
(T1+, T1-)
Made in Spain
19 Alimentation and video unit control
19 TCB-040
cod. 9640007
Video output 0.5 Vpp (120 Ω)
level

Operating temperature -10 to + 55 °C

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
AREA OF VISION OF THE VIDEO UNIT
Standard CCIR

VERTICAL HORIZONTAL Image sensor B/W CCD 1/3"

600 mm Lighting Infrared

o
Horizontal 70
Angle of vision o
Vertical 65
765 mm

o
65∞ Orientation 10
600 mm

70∞
1700 mm

1680 mm

840 mm

66
 Cod. 9640008 TCB-050
GENERIC COLOUR VIDEO UNIT, TWISTED PAIR
Colour video unit with 1/4" CCD sensor, and video output for
twisted pair. Ability to control directly, in installations with seve-
ral points of entry, the video signal from the different points of
entry, without the need for video selectors.
The video unit consists of a protective, polycarbonate front 1
screen, white LED auxiliary lighting for night vision, automatic 2

white balance setting, and multidirectional control of the angle of

vision - up to 10° (1). In addition, it includes plug type connec-
tion terminals with lift-up type connections to facilitate and gua-
rantee correct connection of the twisted pair (2) and a short
length of cable (3) for connection with the the electronic audio 3

unit with confidentiality feature of the entrance panel.

The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Description of terminals and technical characteristics:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE WORKING

T1+ , T1- Video signal to the monitors

Power supply Through audio unit
T2+ , T2- Video signal installations
with several points of entry
Output impedance 120 Ω
(T1+, T1-)
Made in Spain

19 Alimentation and video unit control

19 cod. 9640008
Video output 0.5 Vpp (120 Ω)
level

Operating temperature -10 to + 55 °C

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
AREA OF VISION OF THE VIDEO UNIT
Standard PAL

VERTICAL HORIZONTAL
Image sensor Colour CCD 1/4”
600 mm

Lighting White leds

o
Horizontal 70
Angle of vision o
Vertical 65
765 mm

65∞
o
Orientation 10
600 mm

70∞
1700 mm

1680 mm

840 mm

67
 Cod. 9640012 TCB-210
B/W VIDEO UNIT, COAXIAL, FOR TV DOOR ENTRY
SYSTEM
Black and white video unit with 1/3" CCD sensor, and output in
CCIR composite video for 75 Ω coaxial cable. For use in standard
TV door entry system installations.
The video unit consists of a protective, polycarbonate front scre-
en, infrared LED auxiliary lighting for night vision, electronic auto- 1

iris, multidirectional control of the angle of vision - up to 10° (1).

15Vdc external power supply. In addition, it includes plug type con-
nection terminals with lift-up type connections to facilitate and gua- 2
rantee correct connection of the coaxial cable (2).
The electronic circuit is protected against short circuits.

Description of terminals and technical characteristics:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS VALUES

+,- 15 V
V1 M +,- Power supply voltage
V1, M 1 Vpp ±0.1 (75 Ω)
15V V1 , M Video signal to the modulator
Made in Spain

TCB-210
cod. 9640012

Operating temperature -10 to + 55 °C TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Standard CCIR

AREA OF VISION OF THE VIDEO UNIT Image sensor B/W CCD 1/3"

Lighting Infrared
VERTICAL HORIZONTAL
o
Horizontal 70
600 mm Angle of vision o
Vertical 65
o
Orientation 10
765 mm

65∞
600 mm

70∞
1700 mm

1680 mm

840 mm

68
ENTRANCE PANEL LOWER MODULES
The lower modules, made with an aluminium profile, incor-
porate stainless steel pushbuttons which serve to communicate
2 2 2
with the dwellings (1). They also contain card-holders to iden-
1 1 1 tify each pushbutton (2) and lights to illuminate the card-hol-
ders. They are divided into single, double and configurable
modules, depending on the distribution of the pushbuttons.

ENTRANCE PANEL LOWER MODULES WITH SINGLE PUSHBUTTONS

Modules with pushbuttons arranged in a single column. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with
128 mm
rings for hanging in the flush-mounted box (1).
Available with from 1 to 16 levels or rows of pushbuttons, allowing the configuration of entrance panels
with up to 16 call pushbuttons.
B mm (depending on the model)

Cod. 9660014 MPS-001 Cod. 9660006 MPS-009

Entrance panel module with 1 single pushbutton. Entrance panel module with 9 single pushbuttons.
Total No. of pushbuttons: 1 Total No. of pushbuttons: 9
Dimensions 128 mm x 68.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 260.5 mm x 12 mm

Cod. 9660015 MPS-002 Cod. 9660007 MPS-010

Entrance panel module with 2 single pushbuttons. Entrance panel module with 10 single pushbuttons.
Total No. of pushbuttons: 2 Total No. of pushbuttons: 10
Dimensions 128 mm x 68.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 260.5 mm x 12 mm
12 mm

Cod. 9660000 MPS-003 Cod. 9660008 MPS-011

Entrance panel module with 3 single pushbuttons. Entrance panel module with 11 single pushbuttons.
Total No. of pushbuttons: 3 Total No. of pushbuttons: 11
Dimensions 128 mm x 116.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 308.5 mm x 12 mm

Cod. 9660001 MPS-004 Cod. 9660009 MPS-012

Entrance panel module with 4 single pushbuttons. Entrance panel module with 12 single pushbuttons.
Total No. of pushbuttons: 4 Total No. of pushbuttons: 12
Dimensions 128 mm x 116,5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 308.5 mm x 12 mm

Cod. 9660002 MPS-005 Cod. 9660010 MPS-013

Entrance panel module with 5 single pushbuttons. Entrance panel module with 13 single pushbuttons.
Total No. of pushbuttons:, 5 Total No. of pushbuttons: 13
Dimensions 128 mm x 164.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 356.5 mm x 12 mm

Cod. 9660003 MPS-006 Cod. 9660011 MPS-014

Entrance panel module with 6 single pushbuttons. Entrance panel module with 14 single pushbuttons.
Total No. of pushbuttons: 6 Total No. of pushbuttons: 14
Dimensions 128 mm x 164.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 356.5 mm x 12 mm

Cod. 9660004 MPS-007 Cod. 9660012 MPS-015

Entrance panel module with 7 single pushbuttons. Entrance panel module with 15 single pushbuttons.
Total No. of pushbuttons: 7 Total No. of pushbuttons: 15
Dimensions 128 mm x 212.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 404.5 mm x 12 mm

Cod. 9660005 MPS-008 Cod. 9660013 MPS-016

Entrance panel module with 8 single pushbuttons. Entrance panel module with 16 single pushbuttons.
1 Total No. of pushbuttons: 8 Total No. of pushbuttons: 16
Dimensions 128 mm x 212.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 404.5 mm x 12 mm

69
ENTRANCE PANEL LOWER MODULES WITH DOUBLE PUSHBUTTONS
128 mm
Modules with pushbuttons arranged in a double column. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with
rings (1) for hanging in the flush-mounted box.
Available with from 1 to 16 levels or rows of pushbuttons, allowing the configuration of entrance panels with
B mm (depending on the model)

up to 32 call pushbuttons.

Cod. 9660048 MPD-001 Cod. 9660057 MPD-010

Entrance panel module with 1 double pushbutton. Entrance panel module with 10 double pushbuttons.
Total No. of pushbuttons: 2 Total No. of pushbuttons: 20
Dimensions 128 mm x 68.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 260.5 mm x 12 mm

Cod. 9660049 MPD-002 Cod. 9660058 MPD-011

12 mm Entrance panel module with 2 double pushbuttons. Entrance panel module with 11 double pushbuttons.
Total No. of pushbuttons: 4 Total No. of pushbuttons: 22
Dimensions 128 mm x 68.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 308.5 mm x 12 mm

Cod. 9660050 MPD-003 Cod. 9660059 MPD-012

Entrance panel module with 3 double pushbuttons. Entrance panel module with 12 double pushbuttons.
Total No. of pushbuttons: 6 Total No. of pushbuttons: 24
Dimensions 128 mm x 116.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 308.5 mm x 12 mm

Cod. 9660051 MPD-004 Cod. 9660060 MPD-013

Entrance panel module with 4 double pushbuttons. Entrance panel module with 13 double pushbuttons.
Total No. of pushbuttons: 8 Total No. of pushbuttons: 26
Dimensions 128 mm x 116.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 356.5 mm x 12 mm

Cod. 9660052 MPD-005 Cod. 9660061 MPD-014

Entrance panel module with 5 double pushbuttons. Entrance panel module with 14 double pushbuttons.
Total No. of pushbuttons: 10 Total No. of pushbuttons: 28
Dimensions 128 mm x 164.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 356.5 mm x 12 mm

Cod. 9660053 MPD-006 Cod. 9660062 MPD-015

Entrance panel module with 6 double pushbuttons. Entrance panel module with 15 double pushbuttons.
Total No. of pushbuttons: 12 Total No. of pushbuttons: 30
Dimensions 128 mm x 164.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 404.5 mm x 12 mm

Cod. 9660054 MPD-007 Cod. 9660063 MPD-016

Entrance panel module with 7 double pushbuttons. Entrance panel module with 16 double pushbuttons.
1 Total No. of pushbuttons: 14 Total No. of pushbuttons: 32
Dimensions 128 mm x 212.5 mm x 12 mm Dimensions 128 mm x 404.5 mm x 12 mm

Cod. 9660055 MPD-008

Entrance panel module with 8 double pushbuttons.
Total No. of pushbuttons: 16
Dimensions 128 mm x 212.5 mm x 12 mm

Cod. 9660056 MPD-009

Entrance panel module with 9 double pushbuttons.
Total No. of pushbuttons: 18
Dimensions 128 mm x 260.5 mm x 12 mm

70
LOWER ENTRANCE PANEL MODULES WITH CONFIGURABLE PUSHBUTTONS
Modules with configurable pushbuttons. The distribution of the pushbuttons is defined by the user in view of specific requirements of the
installation. These modules are extremely useful when the distribution of dwellings within a building is not homogeneous. This irregular dis-
tribution can be reflected on the entrance panel. Fitted with rubber strips for water-tightness and with rings for fitting inside the flush-moun-
ted box.
Note: For information on how to order entrance panel modules with configurable pushbuttons, see the ALCAD website (www.alcad.net).

128 mm
Cod. 9660064 MPD-900 Cod. 9660065 MPD-901
B mm (depending on rows of pushbuttons)

Configurable entrance panel module with from Configurable entrance panel module with from
1 to 8 levels or rows of pushbuttons. 9 to 16 levels or rows of pushbuttons.
Dimensions: Varies with the number of levels or Dimensions: Varies with the number of levels or
rows of pushbuttons. rows of pushbuttons.

12 mm

128 mm Cod. 9660016 MKD-900

Configurable entrance panel module with from
B mm (depending on the configuration)

1 to 4 levels or rows of pushbuttons and key-

pad for access control.
Dimensions Varies with the number of levels or
rows of pushbuttons.
From 1 to 2 rows of pushbuttons: 128 mm x
1 2 3 164.5 mm x 12 mm
4 5 6
From 3 to 4 rows of pushbuttons: 128 mm x
7 8 9

C 0
212.5 mm x 12 mm

12 mm

71
CONCIERGE SYSTEM
In electronic door entry installations with concierge system, as well as selecting the appropriate upper modu-
le for the entrance panel of the installation (see the table on page 50), you will need a special panel and a
special telephone for the concierge unit. These will enable you, wherever you decide to install them, to recei-
ve and manage all calls made to the dwellings.

Concierge panel

Concierge telephone

CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL

The concierge unit panel consists of two modules. These modules constitute the upper part (1) and lower part
1
(2) of the concierge unit to be installed. Any configuration of the concierge unit panel can be achieved by the
different combinations available. Several concierge unit panels can be connected side by side to obtain the
desired number of pushbuttons.

The choice of the upper and lower modules, as well as the number of entrance panels required , will deter-
mine the final size of the panel and, consequently, the dimensions and the number of flush-mounted or surface
wall-mounted boxes to be used. See chapter 3 “Entrance panels: dimensions and accessories”.
2

CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL UPPER MODULES

These modules, manufactured with an aluminium profile, incorporate the audio unit and the card-holder, or neither of these.
Two TORX tamper-proof screws are provided with the upper modules. These replace the standard screws of the entrance panel
cover frame and prevent unauthorised persons from tampering with the panel.
The following pages describe each of the upper modules of the concierge unit panel.

CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL SINGLE UPPER MODULES

SINGLE MODULES WITH AUDIO UNIT

128 mm Cod. 9670117 MAN-460

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH GRF-206
78.5 mm

CONCIERGE AUDIO UNIT

12 mm
Module which houses the electronic audio unit, for concierge 1

installations, model GRF-206 (1). Fitted with rubber strips for

water-tightness and with rings (2) for hanging in the flush-moun-
ted box.

72
SINGLE MODULES WITH CARD-HOLDER

128 mm Cod. 9670018 MTN-000

ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE WITH CARD-HOLDER 2
78.5 mm

Module which houses an informative card-holder (1) of 76.5mm

x 43.5mm made from polycarbonate. Used in installations, gene-
12 mm rally with several entrance panels, when it is necessary to display 1

information of interest on one of these panels. Fitted with rubber

strips for water-tightness and with rings (2) for hanging in the flush-
mounted box.

SINGLE BLANK MODULES

Cod. 9670021 MLN-000

128 mm
BLANK ENTRANCE PANEL MODULE 1
78.5 mm

Blank module which does not house any element in its interior.
Used in installations, generally with several entrance panels, when
some of the panels do not contain any elements at all (i.e. no audio
12 mm
unit, no video unit and no card-holder). Fitted with rubber strips for
water-tightness and with rings (1) for hanging in the flush-mounted
box.

AUDIO UNITS IN CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL

Technical data related to the audio unit which can be incorporated in the upper module is presented below.

Cod. 9610032 GRF-206

CONCIERGE SYSTEM ELECTRONIC
AUDIO UNIT
2 1
Audio unit with built-in microprocessor for the me controls both for the panel (3) and for telepho-
concierge unit panel. nes (4) and jumper for precision adjustment of
Conventional 4+N connection system. sound level (5).
Generation of electronic call with acoustic confir- The unit also includes lift-up type connection ter-
mation. minals to ensure correct connection
The audio unit incorporates a microphone, a The electronic circuit is protected against short
loudspeaker, a pushbutton to illuminate the card- circuits.
holders of the concierge panel (1), a red light which
indicates when the panel is disabled (2), and volu- Operating temperature -10 to + 55 °C

73
 Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment:
Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

CONCIERGE DEACTIVATED CONCIERGE ACTIVATED

TERMINALS
AT REST WORKING AT REST WORKING

V , 12 V
3 4 5
V , Power supply voltage 1,2 5V 0V
1,2 Concierge lock release
GRF-206 5.6 - 6.6 V 5.6 - 6.6 V
cod. 9610032 3, 2 Telephones microphone 3,2 8V 8V
4,2 Telephones loudspeaker Audio max. 4 Vpp Audio max. 4 Vpp
7,2 Common push button terminal 4,2 Audio max. 7.0 Vpp Audio max. 7.0 Vpp
Made in Spain
20 0V 0V
9 , 10 Panel lighting
J1 J2
13 , 15 Concierge (control signal) Tone max. 10.5 Vpp
12 V~ 14 , 15 Concierge 7,2 14.5 V
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 14.5 V
17 , 18 Several points of entry
20 Concierge connector 9 , 10 0V 12 V 0V 12 V

J2 Precision adjustment 13 , 15 0V 9V
of sound level
Tone max. 7.0 Vpp
14 , 15 0V
9V

17 , 18 0V 8V 0V 8V

CONCIERGE UNIT PANEL LOWER MODULES

The lower modules are the same ones used for the entrance panels with pushbuttons.
Selecting the lower module:
Remember that the concierge unit panel must be installed in parallel with the telephone for concierge system. You must therefore
keep the dimensions of the telephone for concierge system in mind when selecting the lower module of the concierge unit panel.

See the technical data concerning the lower modules on page 69.

74
TELEPHONES FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM

128 mm Telephones manufactured in ABS plastic, on a panel manufactured with an aluminium profile.
Designed to be mounted in parallel with the concierge unit panel.
B mm (depending on the model)

Equipped with a key to activate the concierge unit (1), a light which indicates that the concierge unit
is activated (2), a switch for connecting the audio of the concierge unit to with the dwellings or with the
5
entrance panel (3), and a pushbutton for transferring calls from the main entrance panel to the dwellings
2
(4). A lock-release button (5) is located on one side of the phone, allowing the user to open the entry
door without having to pick up the receiver.
3
Available in several models depending on the dimensions of the panel.
4
OFF

ON Choosing a telephone for the concierge system

The choice of a concierge telephone is determined by the dimensions of the concierge unit panel,
1
which in turn is determined by the number of dwellings in the installation.
You should therefore select a concierge telephone whose panel dimensions are the same as the con-
cierge unit panel which will be installed in parallel.
62.6 mm

Operating temperature +5 to + 55 °C

Cod. 9680001 COA-010

Telephone for concierge system to be installed in parallel with a concierge unit panel composed of a
single concierge unit panel upper module and an MPS-009, MPD-009, MPS-010 or MPD-010 lower
module.
Dimensions: 128 mm x 339 mm x 12 mm

Cod. 9680002 COA-012

Telephone for concierge system to be installed in parallel with a concierge unit panel composed of a
single concierge unit panel upper module and an MPS-011, MPD-011, MPS-012 or MPD-012 lower
module.
Dimensions: 128 mm x 387 mm x 12 mm

Cod. 9680003 COA-014

Telephone for concierge system to be installed in parallel with a concierge unit panel composed of a
single concierge unit panel upper module and an MPS-013, MPD-013, MPS-014 or MPD-014 lower
module.
Dimensions: 128 mm x 435 mm x 12 mm

Cod. 9680004 COA-016

Telephone for concierge system to be installed in parallel with a concierge unit panel composed of a
single concierge unit panel upper module and an MPS-015, MPD-015, MPS-016 or MPD-016 lower
module.
Dimensions: 128 mm x 483 mm x 12 mm

75
Description of terminals and typical voltages depending on the condition of the equipment:
Note: The voltages shown are reference values provided for the testing of the equipment and are intended for use exclusively
with ALCAD audio units. Do not use the terminals of the equipment to supply power to additional devices without previously con-
sulting the manufacturer.

CONCIERGE DEACTIVATED CONCIERGE ACTIVATED

CC1 TERMINALS
1,2 Telephones lock release
3,2 Telephones microphone AT REST WORKING AT REST WORKING
4,2 Telephones loudspeaker

21 , 2 Entrance panel lock release

1,2 5V 0V 5V 0V
1 2 3 4 21 14 13 14 , 2 Electronic call
CC2 5.6 - 6.6 V 5.6 - 6.6 V
13 , 2 Concierge (control signal) 3,2 8V 8V
Audio max. 4 Vpp Audio max. 4 Vpp
CC1 Concierge audio unit key connector
(pre-wired) 4,2 0V Audio max. 7.0 Vpp 0V Audio max. 7.0 Vpp
CC2 Concierge audio unit connector
21 , 2 5V 0V 5V 0V

Tone max. 7.0 Vpp

14 , 2 0V
9V

13, 2 0V 9V

ACCESSORIES FOR ENTRANCE PANELS.

ACCESSORIES FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEMS
FLUSH-MOUNTED BOXES

114 mm 45 mm Flush-mounted boxes are used to fix the entrance panel or the concierge unit in the desired place in
such a way the the panel or the concierge unit is flush with the wall.
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
Flush-mounted boxes have protection plugs (1); support axles to tilt (2); and diverse points through
which the cable hoses can be passed (3). They have lateral walls (4), which facilitates the connection
of several flush-mounted boxes (to install panels in parallel). In this case, CEM-001 separators must be
B mm (depending on the model)

used.
1

Selecting the flush-mounted box:

The choice of flush-mounted box will be determined by the
dimensions of the panel to be installed.
In the Chapter 3 “Entrance panels: dimensions and
accessories”, you will find a table showing which model of
flush-mounted box you should use with which entrance panel 2

or concierge system.
4

SEPARATOR FOR FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX

Cod. 9740004 CEM-001

SET OF SEPARATORS FOR FLUSH-MOUNTED BOXES
Elements which permit the assembly of several flush-mounted boxes. Used
when several panels are installed in parallel, they ensure the necessary separa-
tion between boxes in such a way that the panels remain correctly aligned. One
set of separators is required for each pair of flush-mounted boxes.
Note: Bear in mind that for each set of separators used, the width of the wall
cavity must be increased by 15mm.

76
 243 mm 372 mm

15 mm 15 mm 15 mm

114 mm 114 mm 114 mm 114 mm 114 mm 114 mm

15 mm
ARRIBA ARRIBA ARRIBA
ARRIBA ARRIBA UP UP UP
ARRIBA UP UP
UP HAUT HAUT HAUT
HAUT HAUT
HAUT

Width Enlarge for each 2 flush-mounted boxes in parallel 3 flush-mounted boxes in parallel
flush mounted box set of separators

SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOXES

Surface wall-mounted boxes are used to fix the entrance panel or concierge unit panel in the desired place by installing the panel
on the surface of the wall. They are used when the wall is made from a material that is difficult to work with, such as marble or gra-
nite.
To install several surface wall-mounted boxes (for several panels in parallel), it is recommended that CSU-000 separators be used.
Also available are angular models of surface wall-mounted boxes, which allow the entrance panel to be fixed at an angle. The
angular models are useful when the place of the installation of the entrance panel is difficult to access, for example, behind a fence,
or when the video door entry system requires a better orientation of the video unit.

SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOXES

SINGLE SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED SEPARATORS FOR SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOXES
BOXES Cod. 9740172 CSU-000
40 mm
128 mm SET OF SEPARATORS FOR SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOXES
Elements which permit the assembly of several surface wall-mounted boxes (exclu-
B mm (función del modelo)

ding angular models), making it easy to fix the boxes in the desired place. One set
of separators is required for each pair of surface wall-mounted boxes.

ANGULAR WALL-MOUNTED BOXES

SINGLE ANGULAR WALL-MOUNTED BOXES
128 mm
B mm (depending on the model)

Selecting the surface wall-mounted box:

The choice of surface wall-mounted box will be determined by the dimensions of the entrance panel to be installed.
In the Chapter 3 “Entrance panels: dimensions and accessories”, you will find a table showing which model of surface wall-
mounted box you should use with the panel.
77
 RAIN-SHIELDS
Rain-shield provides additional protection against hostile atmospheric conditions, such as rain, snow, etc.
Available in two models: rain-shields for flush-mounted box and rain-shields for surface wall-mounted box, depending on which
element is to be used to fix the entrance panel.
Within each group, rain-shields are divided into single, double or triple models: a single rain-shield protects a single entrance
panel, a double rain-shield protects two entrance panels in parallel, a triple rain-shield protects three entrance panels in parallel.

RAIN SHIELDS FOR FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX

SINGLE RAIN-SHIELDS DOUBLE RAIN-SHIELDS TRIPLE RAIN-SHIELDS
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm

B mm (depending on the model)

B mm (depending on the model)

B mm (depending on the model)

60 mm 60 mm 60 mm

RAIN SHIELDS FOR SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOX

SINGLE RAIN-SHIELDS DOUBLE RAIN-SHIELDS TRIPLE RAIN-SHIELDS
156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
B mm (depending on the model)

B mm (depending on the model)

B mm (depending on the model)

82 mm 82 mm 82 mm

Selecting the rain-shield:

The choice of rain-shield will be determined by the dimensions of the entrance panel to be installed.
In the Chapter 3 “Entrance panels: dimensions and accessories”, you will find a table showing which model of rain-shield you
should use with the panel.

78
COVER FRAMES FOR ENTRANCE PANEL
Frames manufactured in aluminium. They are used mainly in refurbishing or repair work, when the old entrance panel has to be
replaced by a new but smaller panel. These frames are also useful in installations where the wall on which the entrance panel is to
be located, is uneven or out of true. The frame can either be fixed to the flush-mounted box of the installation or fixed directly to the
wall itself. In the latter case, the possibility exists of ordering the frame ready for attachment to the wall.
Frames are divided into single, double or triple frames for fitting either one panel (cover frame for single panel), two entrance
panels in parallel (cover frame for double panel) or three entrance panels in parallel (cover frame for triple panel).
The frames do not have standard dimensions. It is the user who must define the exact dimensions according to the characteristics
of the installation.
Note: Consult the ALCAD web site (www.alcad.net) to learn how to order cover frames for entrance panel.

Cod. 9740047 MAR-900

COVER FRAME FOR SINGLE PANEL

3 mm

Cod. 9740016 MAR-901

COVER FRAME FOR DOUBLE PANEL

3 mm

Cod. 9740017 MAR-902

COVER FRAME FOR TRIPLE PANEL

3 mm

79
ACCESSORIES
ELECTRIC LOCK

31.8 mm 25.2 mm Cod. 9730000 ABR-001

STANDARD ELECTRIC LOCK
53 mm

Device which permits the opening of the door when the 12 Vac
voltage provided by the audio unit is received. The device
remains activated as long as the lock release button of the tele-
159 mm
67 mm

phone/monitor in the dwelling is pressed.

39 mm

Power supply: 12 Vac, 800 mA

3 mm

Cod. 9730001 ABR-002

31.8 mm 25.2 mm STANDARD ELECTRIC LOCK WITH MANUAL
RELEASE
53 mm

Of the same characteristics as the standard electric lock, model

ABR-001, it includes a mechanism of manual release (1), so that
visitors can enter the building freely without the lock release but-
159 mm
67 mm

1 ton having first to be activated from a dwelling. Useful in offices

or other places where there is a constant flow of visitors at cer-
tain times of the day.
39 mm

3 mm
Power supply: 12 Vac, 800 mA

31.8 mm 25.2 mm Cod. 9730002 ABR-003

AUTOMATIC ELECTRIC LOCK (ACTIVATION BY
53 mm

ELECTRICAL IMPULSE)
Device which permits the opening of the door when the 12 Vac
voltage provided by the audio unit is received. Once the lock
159 mm
67 mm

release button is pushed, the device remains activated while wai-

ting for the visitor to open the door. The electric lock blocks when
the closure of the door has been detected.
39 mm

3 mm Power supply: 12 Vac, 800 mA

31.8 mm 25.2 mm Cod. 9730003 ABR-004

AUTOMATIC ELECTRIC LOCK (ACTIVATION BY
53 mm

ELECTRICAL IMPULSE) WITH MANUAL RELEASE

Of the same characteristics as the automatic electric lock,
159 mm

model ABR-003, this model includes a manual release mecha-

67 mm

1
nism, so that visitors can enter the building freely without the lock
release button first having to be activated from a dwelling. Useful
39 mm

in offices or other places where there is a constant flow of visitors

at certain times of the day.
3 mm
Power supply: 12 Vac, 800 mA

80
 25 mm
Cod. 9730033 ESC-010
LONG SHIELD FOR ELECTRIC LOCK
Device which allows previous models of electric lock to be
adapted so that they can be used together with a lock with key.
Electric lock
250 mm

Deadbolt lock

Cod. 9730004 CNP-001

DOOR CONTACT
Accessory (1) used in conjunction with an electric lock (2) to allow the opening of a double door.

13.2 mm 20 mm 13.2 mm 8.8 mm 1

Wall Door

Double door 2
62.4 mm

62.4 mm
32 mm

32 mm

Electric lock

4.5 mm 4.5 mm
Door contact - Male Door contact - Female
Door contact Door contact
(male) (Female)

81
ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES
CALL EXTENSION UNITS
Accessories which reproduce the call tone, thereby alerting the user that a call
UP TO 3 DEVICES PER DWELLING
has been received from the entrance panel. WITH THE SAME CALL
They are usually installed in parallel with another telephone or monitor so that
the call tone can be heard in a different part of the dwelling.

Number of devices per dwelling:

In ALCAD installations, it is possible to install up to 3 devices (devices are tele- 1 2
phones, monitors or call extension units) in parallel in each dwelling, so that all 2 1
three receive the call at the same time. The following table shows the possible
1 1 1
combinations.
1 2
2 1

ELECTRONIC CALL
50 mm
Cod. 9730019 AAL-200 30 mm

ELECTRONIC CALL EXTENSION UNIT

Repeater which reproduces the electronic call tone. It
75 mm

has an on/off switch (1) on its side as well as a volume

control (2). 1
Position Position
Compatible with ALCAD door entry and video door when on when off
entry systems with electronic call and with the door entry
systems with electronic call of other manufacturers, as
shown in the following compatibility table.

COMPATIBILITY TABLE

MODEL

ALCAD AAL-200 2 5
AUTA TF92 (electronic) 4 12
FERMAX 2044, 20440, 21100 3 4
FRINGE 1 4
GOLMAR T-800 3 0
RITTO ELEGANT 40518 13 14
STR NH205 O S
TEGUI HORIZON (electronic) 2 1

Description of terminals and voltages:

Note: The voltages shown are reference values provided for the testing of the equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equip-
ment to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

5, 2 Electronic call
Tone max
5, 2 7/10.5 Vpp

S2 S5
2
2 5

82
BUZZING CALL
Cód. 9730020 AAL-210 30 mm
50 mm
BUZZING CALL EXTENSION UNIT
Repeater which reproduces the buzzing call tone. It has an
on/off switch (1) on its side.
75 mm

Compatible with ALCAD door entry and video door entry 1

Position Position
systems with buzzing call and with the door entry systems with when on when off
buzzing call of other manufacturers, as shown in the following
compatibility table.

COMPATIBILITY TABLE
MODEL
MODEL
ALCAD AAL-210 2 6
ALCAD AAL-210 2 6
ATEA 3 5
ATEA 3 5
AUTELCO 1 2
AUTELCO 1 2
BOGEN 3 6
BOGEN 3 6
BPT 4 3
BPT 4 3
CENTRAMATIC 1 5
CENTRAMATIC 1 5
CITESA C B
CITESA C B
CITOVOX 9 T
CITOVOX 9 T
ELVOX 9 +
ELVOX 9 +

MODEL

ALCAD AAL-210 2 6
ATEA 3 5
AUTELCO 1 2
BOGEN 3 6
BPT 4 3
CENTRAMATIC 1 5
CITESA C B
CITOVOX 9 T
ELVOX 9 +

Description of terminals and voltages:

Note: The voltages shown are reference values provided for the testing of the equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equip-
ment to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

6, 2 Buzzing call
6, 2 12 V

2 6

83
SWITCH-SELECTOR ACCESSORIES
Accessories with which to operate additional devices via a control signal.
Available in two models. The choice of model is determined by the control signal required and by the maximum voltages which the
accessory is capable of handling.

88 mm Cod. 9730023 ASC-001

ASC-001
cod. 9730023
SWITCH-SELECTOR ACCESSORY
40 mm

V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2 Control signal: alternating current (4-12Vac) or direct current (3-15Vdc).
Maximum values of voltage and current: IA - 24Vac/Vdc.
21 mm Incorporates double-circuit relay and plug-in terminals for the connection of
additional devices which the user wishes to control.
Applications: opening of a second door, etc.

Description of terminals

V , Power supply
Ctrl , Control signal of circuits 1 and 2

ASC-001 Circuit 1
cod. 9730023
C1 Common
NO1 Normally open contact
V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2
NC1 Normally closed contact

Circuit 2
C2 Common
NO2 Normally open contact
NC2 Normally closed contact

Important:
Maximum values of circuits 1 and 2: 1A - 24V /

State of contacts depending on activation signal

STATE OF THE CONTACTS

ACTIVATION BY DIRECT CURRENT (DC) TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

3 - 11 V 11 - 15 V CIRCUIT 1

C1, NO1
V Ctrl V Ctrl

C1, NC1

CIRCUIT 2
15 V
12 V C2, NO2

3 - 11 V 11 - 15 V C2, NC2

STATE OF THE CONTACTS

ACTIVATION BY ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC) TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

4-8V 8 - 12 V CIRCUIT 1

C1, NO1
V Ctrl V Ctrl

C1, NC1

CIRCUIT 2
15 V
12 V C2, NO2

4-8V 8 - 12 V C2, NC2

84
 88 mm Cod. 9730021 ASC-050
ASC-050 SWITCH-SELECTOR ACCESSORY
40 mm

cod. 9730021

5A / 250V~

2
S2
5
S5

Ctrl1
6

Ctrl2 C NO NC
Control signal: electronic call (ALCAD systems), buzzing call (ALCAD
systems), alternating current (8-12Vac) or direct current (5-15Vdc).
21 mm Maximum values of voltage and current: 5A - 250Vac.
Incorporates single-circuit relay and plug-in terminals for the connection of
additional devices which the user wishes to control.
Applications: activation of devices with power supply of up to 250Vac (bells,
sirens, lights, etc.).

Description of terminals
Ctrl1 Control signal 1
5, 2 Electronic call (conventional door entry system)

Ctrl2 Control signal 2

ASC-050
cod. 9730021 6, 2 Buzzing call (conventional door entry system)
5A / 250V~

S2 S5
2 5 6 Circuit 1
C NO NC
Ctrl1 Ctrl2
C Common
NO Normally open contact
NC Normally closed contact

Important:
Maximum values of the control circuit : 5A-250V

State of contacts depending on activation signal

C, NO

C, NC
Electronic Buzzing
call call

5 - 10 V 11 - 15 V

C, NO

C, NC
5 - 10 V 11 - 15 V

C, NO

C, NC 85
8 - 12 V
COMMON DOOR ACCESSORIES
Devices which allow the same electric lock to be activated from several entrance panels or system with separate power supplies. To
be used in installations in which the power supplies of the entrance panel audio units or of the systems which activate the common elec-
tric lock are separate.

230 V V 230 V V 230 V V

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

C 0

Electric lock signal Electric lock signal

APC-001

Electric lock signal Electric lock signal

cod.9730006

AC DC
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 12

Common door
accessory

Electric lock signal

Common electric lock

88 mm Cod. 9730006 APC-001

APC-001 COMMON DOOR ACCESSORY
40 mm

cod.9730006

11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11
AC
12
DC
12 Accessory which makes it possible to concentrate the electric lock signal from as many as 4 sepa-
rate entrance panels or systems. Several accessories can be connected to each other, thereby allowing
21 mm
the signal from a greater number of entrance panels or systems to be concentrated.
It incorporates an internal adjustment system so that DC electric locks can be activated by AC lock
signals.
Suitable dimensions for fitting in the flush-mounted box or in the surface wall-mounted box of the
entrance panel.

Description of terminals and voltages:

Note: The voltages shown here are reference values provided for testing of equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equipment
to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

cod.9730006
12 , 11 Electric lock activation signals
12, 11
0 V /0 V 12 V /15 V
12, 11

AC 12 , 11 AC electric lock AC12, 11 0 V 12 V

DC 12 , 11 DC electric lock
DC12, 11 0 V 15 V

86
CALL ADAPTER ACCESSORIES
88 mm
Cod. 9730005 AAL-001
AAL-001 CALL ADAPTER ACCESSORY
40 mm

Cod.9730005

IN OUT
Device which complements the GRF-203 electronic audio unit for installations with several points of
Made in Spain

V V 2 7 8 16 17

entry with buzzing call. Capable of converting an electronic call to a buzzing call.
21 mm Of suitable dimensions for fixing inside the flush-mounted box or surface wall-mounted box of the
entrance panel.

Description of terminals and voltages:

Note: The voltages shown are reference values provided for the testing of the equipment and are intended for use exclusively
with ALCAD audio units. Do not use the terminals of the equipment to supply power to additional devices without previously con-
sulting the manufacturer.
TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

V , Power supply voltage IN ,V 12 V

AAL-001
Cod.9730005 7,2 Common push button terminal OUT ,V 12 V
(electronic call)
IN OUT Made in Spain 8,2 Common push button terminal
V V 2 7 8 16 17 (buzzing call) 7, 2 14.5 V 10.5 Vpp
16 , 2 Estate
17 , 2 Several points of entry 8, 2 6 V 12 V

16, 2 0 V 4 V

17, 2 0 V 8 V

ELECTRONIC MODULES
Elements necessary for carrying out certain installations of electronic door entry or video door entry systems.

ELECTRONIC MODULES FOR INTERNAL COMMUNICATION INSTALLATIONS

175 mm Cod. 9650001 CGI-001
CONTROL EQUIPMENT FOR INSTALLATIONS WITH INTERNAL COMMUNI-
CATION
90 mm

Unit responsible for managing internal communication system between the TIN-001 telepho-
230 V I2 I1
nes for internal communication. Equipped with a LED to indicate that the unit is in use (1). If a
short-circuit occurs in the internal communication BUS, the LED will blink continuously, ceasing to
1
60 mm do so when the short-circuit has been eliminated. 10-unit DIN rail format for wall or rail moun-
ting.
Only one unit is required for each installation with internal communication (for up to 16 tele-
phones for internal communication).
The electronic circuit is protected against short-circuits.
Operating temperature -10 to + 55 °C

Description of terminals and voltages:

Note: The voltages shown are reference values provided for the testing of the equipment. Do not use the terminals of the equip-
ment to supply power to additional devices without previously consulting the manufacturer.

TERMINALS INACTIVE AT REST WORKING

230 V Mains voltage
230 V 230 V ±10% 50/60 Hz
I1, I2 Internal communication BUS
I1 , I2 10 - 12 V
230 V I2 I1 87
MODULATORS FOR TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

Elements which generate an analogue TV channel from the video signal of the video door entry video unit for coaxial cable and
then distribute this channel to the TV installation of the dwellings. Compatible with the TV standards of several countries.
Equipped with DC outlet to power the B/W video unit (coaxial) for TV door entry system, model TCB-210. Wall-mounting.
Available in two models, depending on the TV channels (i.e. frequencies) they can generate.

111 mm Cod. 9650007 MDA-300

MULTISTANDARD BIII MODULATOR WITH DC OUTPUT TO FEED VIDEO
UNIT WITH EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY
230V~ ±10%
50-60Hz
70 mm

DC OUT : 15V
0.2 A

965 SERIES
MODULATOR

Modulator which can generate any TV channel situated between 174 MHZ and 302MHz from
the video signal of the video unit. Compatible with the following television standards: B CCIR,
B ITALY, D OIRT, D POLAND, I IRELAND and I SOUTH AFRICA.
42 mm Incorporates micro-switches for selecting the TV output channel and TV standard (1) and a level
control for the output channel (2).

Operating temperature -10 to + 55 °C

Description of terminals and technical characteristics

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

B CCIR
B ITALY
Standard D OIRT
D POLAND
I IRELAND
I SOUTH AFRICA
Video signal input
Frequency range 174 - 302 MHz
DC output voltage
1
Video input connection F FEMALE
SW1
TV channel output
2 TV output connection F FEMALE

Video input level 0.7 - 1.4 Vpp (75 Ω)

Modulation DSB

Output level 86 dBµV ± 2.0

Output level adjust 20 dB

Carrier/Noise ratio (C/N) >58 dB

Mains voltage 230 V ±10% 50/60 Hz

15 V 0.2 A

88
 111 mm Cod. 9650009 MDA-400
MULTISTANDARD BIII MODULATOR WITH DC OUTPUT TO FEED VIDEO
230V~ ±10%
50-60Hz UNIT WITH EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY
70 mm

DC OUT : 15V
0.2 A

965 SERIES
MODULATOR Modulator which can generate any TV channel situated between 470 MHZ and 862 MHz
from the video signal of the video unit. Compatible with the following television standards:
G CCIR, G ITALY, K OIRT, K POLAND, I UK, I IRELAND, I SOUTH AFRICA and L FRANCE.
Incorporates micro-switches for selecting the TV output channel and TV standard (1) and a level
42 mm
control for the output channel (2).

Operating temperature -10 to + 55 °C

Description of terminals and technical characteristics

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

G CCIR
G ITALY
K OIRT
K POLAND
Standard I UK
I IRELAND
I SOUTH AFRICA
Video signal input L FRANCE

DC output voltage Frequency range 470 - 862 MHz

1

SW1 TV channel output Video input connection F FEMALE

2

TV output connection F FEMALE

Video input level 0.7 - 1.4 Vpp (75 Ω)

Modulation DSB

Output level 86 dBµV ± 2.0

Output level adjust 15 dB

Carrier/Noise ratio (C/N) >58 dB

Mains voltage 230 V ±10% 50/60 Hz

15 V 0.2 A

89
POWER SUPPLY UNITS
Elements which supply power to the equipment used in the electronic door entry or video door entry installation.
DIN rail format. For wall or DIN rail mounting.
All the power supply units include a terminals cover to protect the connection terminals (1). The connection terminals are lift-up
type to ensure correct connection.
Power supply units are protected against short circuits.

1 1

Wall-mounting Mounting on DIN rail

Choosing power supply units

The correct choice of power supply units is determined by the type of installation (i.e. whether door entry or video door entry ins-
tallation) as well as by the type of electric lock which is going to be used.
See the diagram corresponding to the installation you wish to perform and identify the power supply units you need in Chapter
6, "Diagrams".

106 mm Cod. 9620001 ALA-040

AC POWER SUPPLY UNIT, 25 VA 230/240VAC
90 mm

High capacity power supply unit with AC output

(12Vac).
230 V V

DIN rail format (6 units).

60 mm
Operating temperature -10 to + 55 °C

Description of terminals and technical characteristics

TERMINALS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

230 V Mains voltage 230 V 230 V ±10% 50/60 Hz

V , Output voltage (AC) V , 12 V

230 V V
Output power 25 VA

90
 106 mm Cod. 9620002 ALA-020
AC KIT POWER SUPPLY UNIT, 16 VA 230/240VAC
Power supply unit for installations of door entry
90 mm

system kits with AC output (12Vac).

230 V V
DIN rail format (6 units).

60 mm
Operating temperature -10 to + 55 °C

Description of terminals and technical characteristics

TERMINALS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

230 V Mains voltage 230 V 230 V ±10% 50/60 Hz

V , Output voltage (AC) V , 12 V

230 V V
Output power 16 VA

106 mm Cod. 9620011 ALM-040

AC-DC POWER SUPPLY UNIT, 25 VA 230/240VAC
90 mm

High capacity power supply unit with indepen-

dent AC (12Vac) and DC (15Vdc) outputs.
230 V V

DIN rail format (6 units).

60 mm
Operating temperature -10 to + 55 °C

Description of terminals and technical characteristics

TERMINALS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

230 V Mains voltage

230 V 230 V ±10% 50/60 Hz

V , Output voltage (AC) V , 12 V

, Output voltage (DC) +,-
230 V V 15 V

Output power 25 VA

91
 106 mm Cod. 9620006 ALM-041
AC-DC KIT POWER SUPPLY, 25 VA 230/240VAC
Power supply unit for installations of video door
90 mm

entry system kits with independent AC (12Vac, 1A)

230 V V
and DC (15Vdc, 0.8A) outputs.
DIN rail format (6 units).
60 mm

Operating temperature -10 to + 55 °C

Description of terminals and technical characteristics

TERMINALS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

230 V Mains voltage 230 V 230 V ±10% 50/60 Hz

V , Output voltage (AC) V , 12 V 1A

, Output voltage (DC)
V
+,- 15 V 0.8 A
230 V

Output power 25 VA

Cod. 9620013 ALM-080

AC/DC POWER SUPPLY UNIT, AC 25 VA + AC/DC 25 VA 230/240VAC
175 mm
Power supply unit for installations with electric
lock with high power consumption (12Vac and up
90 mm

to 2A).
Has two separate AC (12Vac) outputs and one
230 V C NC NO Ctrl 11 V

DC (15Vdc) output.
Incorporates a single-circuit relay for activation
60 mm
of the electric lock, with external activation by
alternating current (8-12Vac) or by direct current
(11-15Vdc).
DIN 10-element rail format.

Operating temperature -10 to + 55 °C

92
Description of terminals and technical characteristics

230 V Mains voltage

TERMINALS TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
V , Output voltage (AC)

, Output voltage (DC) 230 V 230/240 V ±10% (50/60 Hz)

, 11 Output voltage (AC)

+, - 15 V
Circuit
230 V C NC NO Ctrl 11 V V , 12 V
Ctrl, Control signal
C Common
, 11 12 V
NO Normally open contact
NC Normally closed contact
Maximum output power 25 VA

State of contacts depending on activation signal

STATE OF THE CONTACTS

ACTIVATION TERMINALS AT REST WORKING

Direct current (DC) Alternating current (AC)

C, NO
C NC NO Ctrl C NC NO Ctrl

C, NC
11 - 15 V 8 - 12 V

93
94
 ENTRANCE PANELS:
3
DIMENSIONS AND ACCESSORIES
ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS
With the right combination of upper and lower entrance panel modules, you can perform any kind of installation: of one or of several
panels, and for one or for several points of entry.
Depending on the model of lower module with pushbuttons and on the type of upper module (simple, double or triple) chosen, the height
of the entrance panel will vary, although the width will remain constant.
The possible combinations of the different upper and lower panel modules are shown on the following pages. The dimensions of the
mounted panel are shown, as are those of the required flush-mounted or surface wall-mounted box in each case.
Bear in mind that, when combining different entrance panels (i.e. panels in parallel), you will need to have as many flush-mounted boxes
as panels, as well as the appropriate number of flush-mounted box separators. These separators will increase the stated width of each
flush-mounted box by 15mm. (For more information, see the technical information of the set of separators on page 76). When using sur-
face wall-mounted boxes, use a single surface wall-mounted box for each entrance panel. If required, use a set of separators for every
two surface wall-mounted boxes. (See the technical information on the set of separators for surface wall-mounted boxes on page 77).

Compact module
with video unit Flush-mounted box Surface wall-mounted box

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

CMO-002
CSU-211

Entrance panel lower module Entrance panel single upper module Flush-mounted box Surface wall-mounted box

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

CMO-002
MPD-002 CSU-211

Entrance panel lower module Entrance panel double upper module Flush-mounted box Surface wall-mounted box

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

CMO-004
MPD-002 CSU-212

Entrance panel lower module Entrance panel single upper module Flush-mounted box Surface wall-mounted box

ARRIBA ARRIBA
UP UP
HAUT HAUT

CMO-002 x 2
MPD-002 MPD-002 + CSU-211 x 2
CEM-001 +
CSU-000

95
 Entrance panel Entrance Flush-mounted box
Entrance panel upper module panel
lower module Single
Compact

147 mm
CMO-002
ARRIBA
UP

131 mm
147 mm
HAUT

MVN-
128 mm

78.5 mm
Single 128 mm
114 mm

module
MAN- MVN- MTN- MLN- CMO-004
128 mm
410 , 430 301 , 302 000 000 ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

MPS-002 441 , 451, 460 004 , 005 , 201

179 mm
MPS-001

195 mm
68.5 mm

126.5 mm
Double
1-2 storeys

module
128 mm
MDN- MMN- MCN- MLT- 114 mm
128 mm 128 mm
441 , 442 410 , 430 441 000
MPD-001 MPD-002 443 , 444 , 445 441 , 451 CMO-006
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
174.5 mm

Triple

227 mm
243 mm
module
MDT-
128 mm 441 , 442
443 , 444
445 128 mm 114 mm

CMO-004
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
78.5 mm

195 mm
Single

179 mm
module
MAN- MVN- MTN- MLN-
128 mm 000 000
410 , 430 301 , 302
441 , 451, 460 004 , 005
128 mm 114 mm
201
CMO-006
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
116.5 mm

126.5 mm

Double

227 mm
243 mm
MPS-003 MPS-004
3-4 storeys

module
128 mm MDN- MMN- MCN- MLT-
128 mm 441 , 442 410 , 430 441 000
443 , 444 441 , 451
445 128 mm 114 mm
CMO-008
MPD-003 MPD-004
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
174.5 mm

Triple
291 mm

275 mm
module
MDT-
128 mm
441 , 442
443 , 444
445 128 mm 114 mm

CMO-006
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
78.5 mm

243 mm

Single
227 mm

module
128 mm
MAN- MVN- MTN- MLN-
410 , 430 301 , 302 000 000
441 , 451, 460 004 , 005
201 114 mm
128 mm
CMO-008
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
164.5 mm

MPS-005 MPS-006
126.5 mm
5-6 storeys

Double
275 mm
291 mm

module
MDN- MMN- MCN- MLT-
128 mm 128 mm
441 , 442 410 , 430 441 000
443 , 444 441 , 451
445 114 mm
128 mm
CMO-010
MPD-005 MPD-006 ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
174.5 mm

Triple
339 mm

323 mm

module

128 mm MDT-
441 , 442
443 , 444
445
128 mm 114 mm
96
 Rain-shield for flush-mounted box Surface wall-mounted box Rain-shield for surface wall-mounted box Angular surface
Single Double Triple Single Single Double Triple wall-mounted box
VIS-111 VIS-121 VIS-131 CSU-211 VIS-211 VIS-221 VIS-231 CSU-311
171.5 mm

140 mm
160 mm
147 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm
128 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm 128 mm
VIS-112 VIS-122 VIS-132 CSU-212 VIS-212 VIS-222 VIS-232 CSU-312
219.5 mm

195 mm

208 mm

188 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm
128 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm 128 mm
VIS-113 VIS-123 VIS-133 CSU-213 VIS-213 VIS-223 VIS-233 CSU-313
267.5 mm

236 mm
256 mm
243 mm

171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm

128 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
VIS-112 VIS-122 VIS-132 CSU-212
VIS-212 VIS-222 VIS-232
CSU-312
195 mm
219.5 mm

208 mm

188 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm 128 mm
VIS-113 VIS-123 VIS-133 CSU-213
VIS-213 VIS-223 VIS-233
CSU-313
267.5 mm

243 mm

236 mm
256 mm

171 mm 299 mm 427 mm

128 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm 128 mm
VIS-114 VIS-124 VIS-134 CSU-214 VIS-214 VIS-224 VIS-234
CSU-314
315.5 mm

291 mm

284 mm
304 mm

171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm 412 mm 128 mm

156 mm 284 mm
VIS-113 VIS-123 VIS-133 CSU-213 VIS-213 VIS-223 VIS-233 CSU-313
267.5 mm

236 mm
243 mm

256 mm

128 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
VIS-114 VIS-124 VIS-134 CSU-214 VIS-214 VIS-224 VIS-234 CSU-314
315.5 mm

284 mm
291 mm

304 mm

171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm

128 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
VIS-115 VIS-125 VIS-135
CSU-215 VIS-215 VIS-225 VIS-235
CSU-315
363.5 mm

332 mm
352 mm
339 mm

128 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
128 mm
97
 Entrance panel Entrance Flush-mounted box
Entrance panel upper module panel
lower module Single
CMO-008
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

78.5 mm

291 mm

275 mm
Single
module
128 mm MAN- MVN- MTN- MLN-
410 , 430 301 , 302 000 000
441 , 451, 460 004 , 005
201
128 mm 114 mm

CMO-010
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

126.5 mm

Double

339 mm

323 mm
7-8 storeys

module
212.5 mm

MPS-007 MPS-008 MDN- MMN- MCN- MLT-

128 mm
441 , 442 410 , 430 441 000
443 , 444 441 , 451
445

114 mm
128 mm
128 mm
CMO-012
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
174.5 mm

MPD-007 MPD-008
Triple

387 mm

371 mm
module
MDT-
128 mm
441 , 442
443 , 444
445

128 mm 114 mm

CMO-010
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
78.5 mm

Single
339 mm

323 mm
module
128 mm MAN- MVN- MTN- MLN-
410 , 430 301 , 302 000 000
441 , 451, 460 004 , 005
201

114 mm
128 mm
CMO-012
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
126.5 mm
9-10 storeys

Double
387 mm

371 mm

module
260.5 mm

MPS-009 MPS-010

128 mm MDN- MMN- MCN- MLT-

441 , 442 410 , 430 441 000
443 , 444 441 , 451
445

128 mm
128 mm 114 mm

CMO-014
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

MPD-009 MPD-010
174.5 mm

Triple
419 mm

module
435 mm

MDT-
128 mm
441 , 442
443 , 444
445

128 mm 114 mm

98
 Rain-shield for flush-mounted box Surface wall-mounted box Rain-shield for surface wall-mounted box Angular surface
Single Double Triple Single Single Double Triple wall-mounted box
VIS-114 VIS-124 VIS-134 CSU-214 VIS-214 VIS-224 VIS-234
CSU-314
315.5 mm

291 mm

284 mm
304 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm
128 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
VIS-115 VIS-125 VIS-135 CSU-215 VIS-215 VIS-225 VIS-235
CSU-315
363.5 mm

332 mm
352 mm
339 mm

128 mm
156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm

VIS-116 VIS-126 VIS-136

CSU-216 VIS-216 VIS-226 VIS-236
CSU-316
387 mm
411.5 mm

400 mm

380 mm
128 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
128 mm

VIS-115 VIS-125 VIS-135 CSU-215 VIS-215 VIS-225 VIS-235

CSU-315
363.5 mm

332 mm
352 mm
339 mm

128 mm
156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm

VIS-116 VIS-126 VIS-136

CSU-216 VIS-216 VIS-226 VIS-236
CSU-316
387 mm
411.5 mm

400 mm

380 mm

128 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
128 mm
VIS-117 VIS-127 VIS-137
CSU-217 VIS-217 VIS-227 VIS-237
CSU-317
459.5 mm

435 mm

448 mm

428 mm

128 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
128 mm

99
 Entrance panel Entrance Flush-mounted box
Entrance panel upper module panel
lower module Single
CMO-012
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

78.5 mm
Single

387 mm

371 mm
module
128 mm MAN- MVN- MTN- MLN-
410 , 430 301 , 302 000 000
441 , 451, 460 004 , 005
201

128 mm 114 mm

CMO-014
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
308.5 mm

126.5 mm
11-12 storeys

MPS-011 MPS-012 Double

419 mm
module

435 mm
128 mm MDN- MMN- MCN- MLT-
441 , 442 410 , 430 441 000
443 , 444 441 , 451
445

128 mm

128 mm 114 mm

CMO-016
ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

MPD-011 MPD-012

467 mm
174.5 mm

483 mm

Triple
module
MDT-
128 mm
441 , 442
443 , 444
445

114 mm
128 mm

100
 Rain-shield for flush-mounted box Surface wall-mounted box Rain-shield for surface wall-mounted box Angular surface
Single Double Triple Single Single Double Triple wall-mounted box
VIS-116 VIS-126 VIS-136
CSU-216 VIS-216 VIS-226 VIS-236
CSU-316
411.5 mm

400 mm
387 mm

380 mm
128 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
128 mm

VIS-117 VIS-127 VIS-137

CSU-217 VIS-217 VIS-227 VIS-237
CSU-317
459.5 mm

448 mm
435 mm

428 mm
128 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
128 mm

VIS-118 VIS-128 VIS-138

CSU-218 VIS-218 VIS-228 VIS-238
CSU-318
507.5 mm

496 mm

476 mm
483 mm

128 mm
156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm
128 mm

101
 Entrance panel Entrance Flush-mounted box
Entrance panel upper module panel
lower module Single
CMO-014

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

78.5 mm
Single

419 mm
module

435 mm
128 mm MAN- MVN- MTN- MLN-
410 , 430 301 , 302 000 000
441 , 451, 460 004 , 005
201

128 mm 114 mm
CMO-016

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

419 mm
13-14 storeys

126.5 mm

483 mm
Double
MPS-013 MPS-014 module
128 mm MDN- MMN- MCN- MLT-
410 , 430 441
356.5 mm

441 , 442 000

443 , 444 441 , 451
445

114 mm
128 mm
CMO-018

128 mm

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

MPD-013 MPD-014

515 mm
531 mm
174.5 mm

Triple
module
MDT-
128 mm
441 , 442
443 , 444
445

128 mm 114 mm

CMO-016

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT
419 mm
78.5 mm

483 mm

Single
module
128 mm MAN- MVN- MTN- MLN-
410 , 430 301 , 302 000 000
441 , 451, 460 004 , 005
201
15-16 storeys

404.5 mm

MPS-015 MPS-016
114 mm
128 mm
CMO-018

ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

128 mm
126.5 mm

515 mm
531 mm

Double
module
128 mm MDN- MMN- MCN- MLT-
441 , 442 410 , 430 441 000
443 , 444 441 , 451
445

MPD-015 MPD-016

128 mm 114 mm
102
 Rain-shield for flush-mounted box Surface wall-mounted box Rain-shield for surface wall-mounted box Angular surface
Single Double Triple Single Single Double Triple wall-mounted box
VIS-117 VIS-127 VIS-137
CSU-217 VIS-217 VIS-227 VIS-237
CSU-317
459.5 mm

448 mm
435 mm

428 mm
128 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
128 mm
VIS-118 VIS-128 VIS-138
CSU-218 VIS-218 VIS-228 VIS-238
CSU-318
507.5 mm

496 mm

476 mm
483 mm

128 mm
156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm
128 mm
VIS-119 VIS-129 VIS-139
CSU-219 VIS-219 VIS-229 VIS-239
CSU-319
555.5 mm

524 mm
496 mm
531 mm

128 mm
156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm

VIS-118 VIS-128 VIS-138

CSU-218 VIS-218 VIS-228 VIS-238
CSU-318
507.5 mm

496 mm

476 mm
483 mm

128 mm
156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm
128 mm
VIS-119 VIS-129 VIS-139
CSU-219 VIS-219 VIS-229 VIS-239
CSU-319
555.5 mm

524 mm
496 mm
531 mm

128 mm
156 mm 284 mm 412 mm
171 mm 299 mm 427 mm 128 mm
103
 MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY
4
ACCESSORIES FOR ENTRANCE PANELS
ACCESSORIES FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEMS
FLUSH-MOUNTED BOXES

Important:
Some models of flush-mounted boxes have one or several
reinforcements which are useful when positioning the box. Do
not remove these reinforcements until you are installing the om e
en ca
de
to lle
e
m d g th
el ca n

entrance panel.
en p la stalli n
r la in tio
tira r en lla
Rest a la wh nel sta
in ove pa l'in e
e
Rem nce rs d de ru
tra e
en er loqu
ir pla
Ret la
de

BREAKING THE PERFORATED HOLES

The flush-mounted box has several perforated holes to pass
the cables through. Break the tab off the holes you need to use.

ASSEMBLING SEVERAL BOXES

To assemble several boxes together, break off the sections on
the side walls of the box. There are two partitions on each side
of the flush-mounted box (1).
1

104
 Assemble the flush-mounted boxes using the set of separa-
tors, model CEM-001.
Note: Use the openings on the sets of separators to pass the
cable between the entrance panels.

PLACE AND POSITIONING HEIGHT

Choose a place for the flush-mounted box so that, when the
entrance panel is fitted, rain, sun rays or strong light sources
do not adversely affect the video unit. In this way you will avoid
certain undesired problems with video door entry systems with
the visualisation of images such as the ghosting effect caused
by strong background light; correct positioning will also pre-
serve the working life of the equipment.

Remember to pass the cables through the cable holes before

fitting the flush-mounted box.
Position the flush-mounted box vertically and in the direction Positioning direction ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

indicated by the sticker. In this position the support axles are ARRIBA
UP

oriented correctly, which will later allow the entrance panel to HAUT

be conveniently opened.
Position the box in such a way that the top part is at a height
of 1.7m from floor level. Make sure that the box is perfectly
flush with the surface of the wall. ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

1.7 m

105
SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOX

BREAKING THE PERFORATED HOLES

Non-angular surface wall-mounted boxes
The surface wall-mounted box has several perforated holes to
pass the cables through .Break the tab off the holes you need
to use.

ASSEMBLING SEVERAL BOXES

Non-angular surface wall-mounted boxes
To assemble several surface wall-mounted boxes, break off
the sections on the side walls of the boxes as required. You will
then have 2 openings on the right side and two on the left side
(1).
1

Use the CSU-000 set of separators to guide you when assem-

bling the surface wall-mounted boxes. By doing so, you will
ensure that the boxes are correctly aligned when they are fixed
to the wall.

106
PLACE AND HEIGHT OF PANEL POSITION
Choose a place for the surface wall-mounted box so that,
when the entrance panel is fitted, rain, sun rays or strong light
sources do not adversely affect the video unit. In this way you
will avoid certain undesired problems with video door entry
systems with the visualisation of images such as the ghosting
effect caused by strong background light; correct positioning
will also preserve the working life of the equipment.

Remember to pass the cables through the cable holes before

fitting the surface wall-mounted box.
Fix the box to the wall using the wall-plugs and screws pro-
vided. Place it vertically and in such a way that the top part is
at a height of 1.7m from floor level.

1.7 m

1.7 m

Angular models

107
RAIN-SHIELDS

RAIN-SHIELDS FOR FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX

FIXING THE RAIN-SHIELD TO THE FLUSH-
MOUNTED BOX
de
to lle
en ca
om e
m de g th

Fix the rain shield to the flush-mounted box using the four self-
el ac a
en pl stallin n
ar la in tio
tir r en lla
Resta la wh nel nsta
in ove pa l'i e
m e de ru
Retranc lors de
en er aque
tir pl
Re la
de

screwing screws provided with the product.

RAIN-SHIELDS FOR SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOX

FIXING THE RAIN-SHIELD TO THE SURFACE

WALL-MOUNTED BOX
Slide the axles provided into the upper decorative fitting of
the surface wall-mounted box. Position them in such a way that
the curve of the axle is directed outwards from the surface wall-
mounted box. The surface wall-mounted box is now ready for
the entrance panel to be fixed.

Fix the rainshield to the surface wall-mounted box using the

self-screwing screws provided with the product.

108
COVER FRAMES

FIXING TO THE FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX

Fix the frame to the flush-mounted box using the four screws
provided with the product.

FIXING DIRECTLY TO THE WALL

Insert the supplied nuts in the frame. In this way, the frame is
ready for the entrance panel to be fixed later.

Drill the required holes in the frame and fix it to the wall in
the desired place.

With frames prepared for wall attachment, use the wall-plugs

and screws provided to fix them in place. Use the 2.5 Allen key
provided with the products.

109
ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS
CONCIERGE SYSTEMS: CONCIERGE UNIT PANELS
ENTRANCE PANEL LOWER MODULES AND UPPER MODULES

EXPLODED VIEW OF PANEL COMPONENTS

The illustration shows all the different parts of two modular
entrance panels.

ASSEMBLING THE PANELS

Join the upper and lower modules of the entrance panel as
follows. Insert the two tongues of the lower pushbutton module
into the slots of the upper module and press. Make sure that the
intermediate separator is correctly in place.

Connect the commons of the pushbuttons (1) and the illumi-

nating lights (2) of the pushbutton module.
7

Electronic
call
1 Buzzing
call
8

9 10

110
 If the upper module is an informative card-holder then lift the
cover of the card-holder and insert the card to be displayed.
Close the card-holder cover.

In the lower module of the entrance panel, lever open the

cover of each card-holder and insert the card that identifies the
pushbutton. You may use the pre-printed cards or the blank
cards which are supplied with the lower pushbutton module.

DISASSEMBLING THE PANELS

To separate the entrance panel modules, gently slide the
upper module upwards until it is completely free of the tongues
of the lower module.

111
POSITIONING THE ENTRANCE PANELS
POSITIONING THE CONCIERGE UNIT PANELS
POSITIONING THE PANEL IN THE FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX
POSITIONING THE PANEL IN A FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX WITH RAIN-SHIELD
POSITIONING THE PANEL IN A FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX WITH COVER FRAME
Some models of flush-mounted boxes have one or several
reinforcements, which are useful when the box is being fitted to
the wall. If this is the case, remove these reinforcements.

de
to ll e
en ca
om e e
m d g th
el ca n
en p la stalli n
r la in tio
tira r en lla
Rest a la wh nel sta
in ove p a l' in e
m ce de ru
Retran lors e de
n
e rer qu
ti pla
Re la
de

Remove the protective plugs from the flush-mounted box. The

box is now ready for the entrance panel to be fixed in it at a
later stage.

The flush-mounted box has a hinge or support axle on each

of its sides. Extract the two axles according to the direction in
which you wish to open the entrance panel, i.e. from left to
right or right to left or from top to bottom. The unused axles
should be fully inserted in their appropriate slots.

112
 Introduce the rings of the entrance panel on the extracted
axles. In this way the panel will be held in place and all the
connections can be easily made.

Once the connections and adjustments have been made on

the panel (as shown in the diagrams and connection and adjus-
tment instructions of this manual), separate the upper and lower
decorative fittings, loosening the screws holding them in posi-
tion.

Close the entrance panel and press it against the flush-moun-

ted box. Fix the panel to the box using the fixing screws.

Adjust the upper and lower decorative fittings.

113
 If a rain-shield is being added, fit the top cap of the rain-shield.

POSITIONING THE ENTRANCE PANEL IN THE Angular models

SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOX

Once the connections and adjustments have been made on
the panel (as shown in the diagrams and connection and adjus-
tment instructions of this manual), separate the upper and lower
decorative fittings, loosening the screws holding them in posi-
tion.

Fix the entrance panel to the surface wall-mounted box with

the clamping screws.
Angular models

114
 Adjust the upper and lower decorative fittings. Angular models

POSITIONING THE ENTRANCE PANEL IN A SUR-

FACE WALL-MOUNTED BOX WITH RAIN-SHIELD
Separate the upper and lower decorative fittings of the
entrance panel (1) and remove the fixing screws (2).

Adjust the upper decorative fitting. The entrance panel is

now ready to be fixed later.
Note: The lower fixing screw will be used later to fix the
entrance panel into position.

115
 Once the electrical connections and adjustments have been
made on the panel (as shown in the diagrams and connection
and adjustment instructions of this manual), tilt the entrance
panel slightly, pressing it against the rain shield.

Push the entrance panel upwards until the axles of the surfa-
ce wall-mounted box slide into the upper rings of the entrance
panel (1). Press the entrance panel as far as it will go into the
rain shield (2). The entrance panel is now fixed in position by
the axles of the surface wall-mounted box.

Fix the entrance panel to the surface wall-mounted box using

the lower fixing screw.

116
 Adjust the lower decorative fitting.

POSITIONING THE ENTRANCE PANEL IN THE

COVER FRAME FIXED DIRECTLY TO THE WALL
Once the connections and adjustments have been made on
the panel (as shown in the diagrams and connection and adjus-
tment instructions of this manual), separate the upper and lower
decorative fittings by loosening the screws holding them in
position.

Fix the entrance panel to the frame using the fixing screws of 2
the entrance panel (1). Adjust the upper and lower decorative
fittings of the entrance panel (2).

117
CONCIERGE SYSTEMS: TELEPHONES FOR CONCIERGE
DISASSEMBLING THE RECEIVER
Disconnect the cord between the base of the telephone and the
receiver.

DISASSEMBLING THE COVER FROM THE BASE

OF THE TELEPHONE
Move the cover on the base of the telephone towards the
right.

Remove the cover from the base of the telephone.

118
POSITIONING THE TELEPHONE FOR CONCIER-
GE IN A FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX
Some models of flush-mounted boxes have one or several
reinforcements, which are useful when the box is being fitted to
the wall. If this is the case, remove these reinforcements.

de
to ll e
en ca
om e the
m d
el c a ing
en p la stall n
r la in tio
e tirala r hen l a lla
R st a w ne inst
in ove pa l' e
m ce de ru
Retran lors e de
en rer qu
ti pla
Re la
de

Remove the protective plugs from the flush-mounted box. The

box is now ready for the entrance panel to be fixed in it at a
later stage.

The flush-mounted box has a hinge or support axle on each

of its sides. Extract the two axles according to the direction in
which you wish to open the panel, i.e. from left to right or right
to left or from top to bottom. The unused axles should be fully
inserted in their appropriate slots.

119
 Separate the upper and lower decorative fittings by loose-
ning the screws holding them in position.

Introduce the rings of the entrance panel on the extracted

axles. In this way the panel will be held in place and all the
connections can be easily made.

Pass the cable connections through the opening at the base

of the telephone.

120
 Close the panel and press it against the flush-mounted box.
Fix the panel to the box using the fixing screws.

Adjust the upper and lower decorative fittings.

121
POSITIONING THE TELEPHONE FOR CONCIER-
GE IN THE SURFACE WALL-MOUNTED BOX
Separate the upper and lower decorative fittings by loose-
ning the screws holding them in position.

Pass the cable connections through the opening at the base

of the telephone.

122
 Close the panel and press it against the flush-mounted box.
Fix the panel to the box using the screws provided.

Adjust the upper and lower decorative fittings.

123
ASSEMBLING THE COVER OF THE TELEPHONE
Once the connections and adjustments have been made as
indicated in the diagrams and connection and adjustment ins-
tructions of this manual, close the telephone and fix the cover
to the base using the fixing screw.

ASSEMBLING THE RECEIVER

Connect the cord between the base of the telephone and the
receiver.

124
AUDIO UNITS

ASSEMBLING THE AUDIO UNIT

Position the audio unit and press firmly to fix the audio unit
to the entrance panel.

DISASSEMBLING THE AUDIO UNIT

Using a screwdriver, lever the audio unit out from its ancho-
ring points.

VIDEO UNITS

ASSEMBLING THE VIDEO UNIT

Position the visor of the video unit and press to fix the video
unit to the entrance panel.

DISASSEMBLING THE VIDEO UNIT

Using a screwdriver, lever the video unit out from its ancho-
ring points.

125
PUSHBUTTONS

ASSEMBLING THE PUSHBUTTONS

Press firmly to fix the pushbuttons to the entrance panel.

DISASSEMBLING THE PUSHBUTTONS

Using a screwdriver, lever the group of pushbuttons out from
its anchoring points.

DECORATIVE FITTINGS FOR ENTRANCE PANEL

REPLACEMENT OF THE FIXING SCREWS OF THE

DECORATIVE FITTINGS WITH TORX-HEAD TAM-
PER-PROOF SCREWS
Loosen and remove fixing screws of the upper and lower
decorative fittings of the entrance panel.

Using the TORX-head tamper-proof screws provided with the

upper modules of the entrance panel, adjust the upper and
lower decorative fittings. Use a standard TORX T10 security
screwdriver.

126
REPLACING THE DECORATIVE FITTINGS OF
ENTRANCE PANEL
Completely separate the upper and lower decorative fittings
of the entrance panel by loosening the fixing screws.

Separate the upper module from the lower module of the

entrance panel (See “Disassembling the panels”, page 111).
Remove the intermediate separator. Position the new separator
and re-assemble the upper and lower modules of the entrance
panel (see “Assembling the panels”, page 110).

Position the new upper and lower decorative fittings of the

entrance panel.

127
 TAP-OFFS AND SPLITTERS
LOCATION
Tap-offs and splitters should be located in a dry and warm <50m Monitor
place away from harmful agents such as water, damp, etc. Tap-off
DIV-034
cod.9730015

Important: T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

In video door entry installations with twisted pair, make sure

that the place chosen for the tap-off is not further than 50
metres from the place where the monitor will later be placed.

FIXING TAP-OFFS AND SPLITTERS FOR COAXIAL

CABLE TO THE WALL
Lever off the protective cover of the equipment.

Make the connections of the tap-off or splitter as shown in the

diagrams and connection instructions of this manual. Break
open the cable holes as required in order to pass the cables
through them.

Fix the tap-off or splitter to the wall.

Replace the protective cover.

128
FIXING TAP-OFFS AND SPLITTERS FOR TWISTED
PAIR TO THE WALL
Fix the tap-off or the splitter to the wall using the wall-plugs
50
-0 023

and screws provided with the product. ASC

30
97
d.
co C2
C1
2
1 NO
2 NO
1 NC
NC
rl
Ct

ACCESSORIES FOR TELEPHONES

DESKTOP SUPPORTS FOR TELEPHONES

PREPARING THE SUPPORT PRIOR TO FIXING

THE TELEPHONE
Place the anti-slip feet on the desktop support.

Place the cable-holding ring over the lower opening of the

3
desktop support (1). Then pass the cable through the front and
lower openings (2). The securing loop can be used to hold the
cable to the desktop support in position (3). 1

The telephone is now ready for the electrical connections to

be made.

129
 TELEPHONES FOR HOUSES AND FLATS
DISASSEMBLING THE RECEIVER
Disconnect the cord between the base of the telephone and the
receiver.

DISASSEMBLING THE COVER FROM THE BASE

OF THE TELEPHONE
Move the cover of the base of the telephone towards the
right.

Remove the cover of the base of the telephone.

130
WALL-MOUNTED. FIXING THE BASE OF TELE-
PHONE TO THE WALL
Remember to pass the cables through the cable hole before
fixing the base of the telephone to the wall.
The base has numerous fixing points. Using the four most
convenient points, fix the base of the telephone to the wall with
the screws and wall-plugs provided.
The telephone is now ready for the electrical connections to
be made.
Note: The use of the fixing points in the four corners is
recommended.

DESKTOP INSTALLATION. FIXING THE BASE OF

THE TELEPHONE TO THE DESKTOP SUPPORT
Remember to pass the cables through the cable hole before
fixing the base of the telephone to the desktop support.
Fix the base of the telephone to the desktop support with the
M3 screws provided with the support.
The telephone is now ready for the electrical connections to
be made.

ASSEMBLING THE COVER TO THE BASE OF THE

TELEPHONE
Make the connections and adjustments as indicated in the
diagrams and connection and adjustment instructions of this
1
manual. CC
In telephones for internal communication, connect the tele-
phone cover connector.
3
2
1 6
5
4 9
8
7
0
C

131
 Close the telephone and fix the cover to the base using the
fixing screw.

ASSEMBLING THE RECEIVER

Connect the cord between the base of the telephone and the
receiver.

ACCESSORIES FOR MONITORS

DESKTOP SUPPORT FOR MONITORS

CONNECTION BASE
LOCATION
Make sure that the place chosen is no more than 2 metres
(i.e. the length of the multiwire SCART connector cable) from
2m
the place where the desktop support will later be positioned.

132
POSITIONING THE CONNECTION BASE
Remove the protective cover.

Fix the connection base to the wall using the wall-plugs and
screws provided with the product.

Once the connections and adjustments have been made as

indicated in the diagrams and connection and adjustment ins-
tructions of this manual, cut the required perforated openings
and fix the protective cover to the base using the fixing screw.

DESKTOP SUPPORT

LOCATION
To avoid undesired effects in the visualisation of images
(reflections, etc.) and to preserve the working life of the equip-
ment, choose a place that avoids sources of direct light or inten-
se heat, damp and steam.

PREPARATION OF THE DESKTOP SUPPORT FOR

SUBSEQUENT FIXING OF THE CONNECTION
BRACKET
Place the anti-slip feet on the desktop support.
The desktop support is now ready for both the connection
bracket (see page 136) and the monitor (see page 137) to be
fixed and connected.
133
COVER FRAMES FOR MONITORS

PLACE AND POSITIONING HEIGHT

To avoid undesired effects in the visualisation of images IBA
ARR

(reflections, etc.) and to preserve the working life of the equip-

UP
UT
HA

ment, choose a place that avoids sources of direct light or inten-

se heat, damp and steam.
Bear in mind the dimensions of the monitor cover frame itself.
Position the monitor cover frame in such a way that the top part
of the connection bracket to be fixed at a later stage is at a
height of 1.6 metres above floor level (see illustration).

1.6 m

FIXING THE COVER FRAME FOR MONITORS TO Direction of frame position

THE WALL
ARRIBA

Drill the required holes in the frame and fix it to the wall in UP
HAUT

the desired place. Position the frame vertically and in the direc-
tion indicated by the sticker.
The frame is now ready to be fixed and connected to the con-
nection bracket. ARR
UP
HA
IBA

UT

The frame and the connections bracket can also be fixed

directly to the wall without having to make any holes in the
Direction of frame position
frame. Make sure you install the frame in the direction indica-
ted on the sticker. ARRIBA
UP
HAUT

The joined frame/connections bracket are now ready for the

connections bracket to be connected.
IBA
ARR
UP
UT
HA

134
MONITORS AND CONNECTION BRACKETS FOR
HOUSES AN FLATS
CONNECTION BRACKET FOR HOUSES AND FLATS

WALL-MOUNTED. PLACE AND POSITIONING

HEIGHT 197 mm

Choose a place to install the connection bracket where the 15 mm 20 mm

wall is flat, even and hard.

To avoid undesired effects in the visualisation of images

193 mm
(reflections, background light, etc.) and to preserve the wor-

224 mm
king life of the equipment, choose a place that avoids direct
light sources, intense heat
1.6 m
Bear in mind the dimensions of the monitor which will later
166 mm
be connected to the connection bracket and that the top part of
the connection bracket is at a height of 1.6m from floor level Monitor and connection bracket size
(see illustration).

WALL-MOUNTED. FIXING THE CONNECTION

BRACKET TO THE WALL
Remember to pass the cables through the cable opening
before positioning the bracket.
Fix the connection bracket to the wall with the screws and
wall-plugs supplied with the product.
Position the bracket vertically.
Note: The use of the anchoring points in the four corners is
recommended.
Make the connections and adjustments as indicated in the
diagrams and connection and adjustment instructions of this
manual.

INSTALLATION ON A STANDARD ELECTRICAL

BOX. PLACE AND POSITIONING HEIGHT
Bear in mind the dimensions of the monitor which will later
be connected to the connections bracket (see illustration). 197 mm

To avoid undesired effects in the visualisation of images 15 mm 20 mm

(reflections, background light, etc.) and to preserve the wor-

king life of the equipment, choose a place that avoids direct
193 mm

light sources, intense heat

224 mm

Remember to pass the cables through the cable opening

before positioning the standard electrical box. 1.5 m

Make sure that the standard electrical box is vertical and uni-
166 mm
formly aligned or flush with the wall. Place the box at a height
of 1.5 metres above floor level. The connection bracket will Monitor and connection bracket size
then be at a height of 1.6 metres above the floor.

135
INSTALLATION ON A STANDARD ELECTRICAL
BOX. FIXING CONNECTION BRACKET TO THE
STANDARD ELECTRICAL BOX.
Remember to pass the connections cable through the cable
hole of the connections bracket.
Fix the connection bracket to the standard electrical box.
Make the connections and adjustments as indicated in the
diagrams and connection and adjustment instructions of this
manual.

DESKTOP INSTALLATION. FIXING THE CONNEC-

TION BRACKET TO THE DESKTOP SUPPORT
Fix the connection bracket to the desktop support with the M3
screws provided with the support.
Make the connections and adjustments in the connection
bracket using the multiwire SCART connector cable as indicated
in the diagrams and connection and adjustment instructions of
this manual.

Connect the multiwire SCART connector cable to the connec-

tion base.

FIXING TO THE COVER FRAME FOR MONITORS

Remember to pass the connections cable through the cable ARR
UP
HA
IBA

UT

hole of the connections bracket.

Fix the connection bracket to the cover frame using the
screws provided with the frame.
Make the connections and adjustments as indicated in the
diagrams and connection and adjustment instructions of this
manual.

136
MONITORS FOR HOUSES AND FLATS

IDENTIFYING THE TYPE OF MONITOR

The steps to follow in order to install or to dismount the moni-
tor depend on which type of monitor it is. For monitors with a
fixing tongue of type (1) in their base, follow the steps shown
under “Monitors Type 1”. For monitors with a fixing tongue of
type (2) in their base, follow the steps shown under “Monitors
Type 2”.
1 2

Monitor type 1 Monitor type 2

FITTING THE MONITOR TO THE CONNECTION

BRACKET
Connect the connector of the monitor to the connection
bracket.

“Monitors type 1”
Clip the two top fitting hooks of the bracket into the guides Monitor type 1 Monitor type 2
on the base of the monitor housing (1). To do so, incline the
1 20mm
monitor as shown in the picture below. The monitor will then be
held by the connection bracket. 20mm

“Monitors type 2”
1
Starting from the position shown in the illustration (i.e. with 1
the upper part of the monitor approximately 20mm above the
connections bracket), move the monitor closer to the connec-
tions bracket in such a way that the upper fixing tongues of the
bracket clip into the guides in the base of the monitor (1).

“Monitors type 1”
Monitor type 1 Monitor type 2
Push the monitor downwards (2). While still pushing (2),
apply frontal pressure to the lower part of the monitor (3) until 2
it is in a position parallel to the wall. Then move the monitor
slightly upwards to anchor it to the connections support (4).

“Monitors type 2”
While holding the position indicated in the former step, push
the monitor downwards.
4 3

137
 Put the receiver in place and connect the receiver cord.

REMOVING THE MONITOR FROM THE CONNEC-

TION BRACKET Monitor type 1 Monitor type 2

“Monitors type 1” 2
Lightly press the fixing tongue downwards (1) and push the
monitor downwards (2). In this position, separate the lower 2
part of the monitor from the connection bracket (3).
1
The monitor will then only be supported on the connection
bracket. 1

“Monitors type 2” 1
3
Move the fixing tongue located in the lower part of the moni-
tor outwards (1).

“Monitors type 1 and Monitors type 2” Monitor type 1 Monitor type 2

Move the monitor upwards until it is free of the fixing tongues
of the connections bracket.

“Monitors type 1 and Monitors type 2”

Disconnect the connector which joins the monitor to the con-
nection bracket.

138
“Monitors type 2”
Return the fixing tongue (1) to its initial position. The monitor
is once again ready to be fixed to the connections bracket.

ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES
CALL EXTENSION UNITS
FIXING TO THE WALL
Move the lower tab gently and remove the cover from the
base of the call extension unit.

Break off the partitions so as to be able to pass the wires

through. There are two openings at the back (1) and two at the
bottom (2).

Remember to pass the cables through the opening before

attaching the call extension unit.
Fix the base of the call extension unit to the wall using the
screws and wallplugs provided.

Once the connections and adjustments have been made as

indicated in the diagrams and connection and adjustment ins-
tructions of this manual, replace the cover..

139
SWITCH-SELECTOR ACCESSORIES
LOCATION
If you use the accessory to handle voltages, choose a place in which there is no possibility of control voltages accidentally tou-
ching (electrical box, etc.).

FIXING TO THE WALL

The accessory can be fixed to the wall with the wall-plugs
and screws provided with the product.
50
-0 023
ASC
30
97
d.
co C2
C1
2
1 NO
2 NO
1 NC
NC
rl
Ct

FIXING TO THE FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX

Depending on the model which is being used, the accessory
can be fixed to the flush-mounted box using the screws provi-
ded with the product.

0
05 3
C- 002
AS. 973
cod C2
C1
2
1 NO
2 NO
1 NC
NC
l
Ctr

COMMON DOOR ACCESSORIES

FIXING TO THE FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX

Fix the accessory to the flush-mounted box using the 4 screws
provided.

0
05 3
C- 002
AS. 973
cod C2
C1
2
1 NO
2 NO
1 NC
NC
l
Ctr

CALL ADAPTER ACCESSORIES

FIXING TO THE FLUSH-MOUNTED BOX
Fix the accessory to the flush-mounted box using the 4 screws
provided.

0
05 3
C- 002
AS. 973
cod C2
C1
2
1 NO
2 NO
1 NC
NC
l
Ctr

140
ELECTRONIC MODULES
ELECTRONIC MODULES FOR INTERNAL COMMUNICATION INSTALLATIONS

LOCATION
The control equipment should be installed in a dry and well-ventilated place, away from direct sources of heat. This will ensure
the correct functioning of the equipment and preserve its working life.

WALL-MOUNTING
Fix the control equipment to the wall using the screws provi-
ded with the product.

MOUNTING ON DIN RAIL

Mount the control equipment on the DIN rail as shown in the
illustration.

REMOVING FROM DIN RAIL

To remove the control equipment from the DIN rail, simply
lever it off with a screwdriver as shown in the illustration.

CONNECTIONS AND ASSEMBLY OF TERMINAL

COVER
Once the connections have been made as indicated in the
diagrams and connection instructions of this manual, cut the
required perforated openings of the terminal cover. Fix it to the
control equipment using the fixing screws supplied with the pro-
duct.

141
MODULATORS FOR TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

LOCATION
The modulator should be installed in a dry and well-ventilated place, away from direct sources of heat. This will ensure the correct
functioning of the equipment and preserve its working life.

PREPARATION OF CONNECTORS
→ 6.5 - 6.8 mm 12 mm → 6.8 - 7.1 mm
To ensure the best possible connection of the coaxial cable, 6±1mm

follow steps 1 to 4. Use the male F-type connectors provided.

1 1 6±1mm

2 2
3±1 8±1mm 6±1mm

3 3

4 4
Male type F connector

DISASSEMBLING THE COVER

Lever the protective cover off the equipment.

WALL-MOUNTING
The modulator can be fixed to the wall using the wall-plugs
and screws provided.

142
CONNECTIONS, ADJUSTMENT AND ASSEMBLY
OF THE COVER
Make the connections, select the output channel and adjust
the channel level as shown in the diagrams and connection
and adjustment instructions of this manual. Replace the protec-
tive cover.

POWER SUPPLY UNITS

Remember to protect the power supply units of the installation by complying with the regulations in force governing electrical ins-
tallations (keep away from strong magnetic fields, ensure correct fusing, etc.).

LOCATION
The power supply unit should be installed in a dry and well-ventilated place, away from direct sources of heat. This will ensure
the correct functioning of the equipment and preserve its working life.

WALL-MOUNTING
Fix the power supply unit to the wall with the screws supplied
with the product.

MOUNTING ON DIN RAIL

Mount the unit on the rail as shown in the illustration.

REMOVING FROM DIN RAIL

To remove the control equipment from the DIN rail, simply
lever it off with a screwdriver as shown in the illustration.

143
CONNECTIONS AND ASSEMBLY OF TERMINAL
COVER
Once the connections have been made as indicated in the
diagrams and connection instructions of this manual, cut the
required perforated openings of the terminal cover. Fix it to the
power supply unit using the fixing screws supplied with the pro-
duct.

144
 CONNECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
5
INSTRUCTIONS
ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS
ENTRANCE PANEL UPPER MODULES
AUDIO UNITS IN ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS
AUDIO UNIT GRF-201
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:
V , Power supply voltage
GRF-201
cod. 9610028

1,2 Telephone lock release

Made in Spain
3, 2 Telephone microphone
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
3 2 J2 7,2 Common push button terminal

9 , 10 Panel lighting
12 V~
V~ 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 7 11 , 12 Electric lock

J2 Selecting the electronic call tone

Description of connections:

Telephones
4,3,2,1
GRF-201
cod. 9610028

Power supply unit

Made in Spain
V~,
3 2 J2

12 V~
V~ 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 7

Electric lock Entrance panel lamps Common push-buttons

Connection Activation Connection Connection

From the dwelling

9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 7
9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 7 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 7

Using external pushbutton

9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 7

ABR-001

145
ADJUSTMENT
Selecting the call tone
The audio unit leaves the factory with the double-tone electro- J2
nic call (with the J2 jumper installed). If a triple-tone electronic GRF-201
cod. 9610028

call is preferred, remove the J2 jumper.

Made in Spain

3 2 J2

12 V~
V~ 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 7

Adjusting the volume controls

The audio units leave the factory with the audio system pre-
set. Use the potentiometers of the audio unit if re-adjustment is
required by your particular installation. Volume control for
the entrance panel

Volume control for

the telephones

AUDIO UNIT GRF-203

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:
V , Power supply voltage
Electronic door entry installations G
cod. 9610029
1,2 Telephones lock release
3, 2 Telephones microphone
Made in Spain 4,2 Telephones loudspeaker
J1 J2 7,2 Common push button terminal

9 , 10 Panel lighting
12 V~ 11 , 12 Electric lock
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
16 , 18 Housing estate

17 , 18 Several points of entry

J1 Main panel selection

J2 Precision adjustment of sound level

Electronic door entry with concierge system installations

V , Power supply voltage

GRF-203 1,2 Telephones lock release

cod. 9610029

3, 2 Telephones microphone
4,2 Telephones loudspeaker
Made in Spain
7,2 Common push button terminal
J1 J2
9 , 10 Panel lighting
12 V~ 11 , 12 Electric lock
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
13 , 15 Concierge (control signal)
14 , 15 Concierge

17 , 18 Several points of entry

146
J1 Main panel selection
J2 Precision adjustment
of sound level
Description of connections:
Electronic door entry installations

Audio unit
(Installations with
Telephones several points of entry)
4,3,2,1 17,18
cod. 9610029

Power supply unit

Made in Spain
V~,
J1 J2

12 V~
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

Audio unit
16 (Housing estates
External point
of entry)

From the dwelling

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

Using external pushbutton

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

ABR-001

147
 Electronic door entry with concierge system installations
Audio unit (several points of entry)
4,3,2,1 14,13 18,17
GRF-203
cod. 9610029

Power supply
Made in Spain
V~,
J1 J2

12 V~
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

18
17
4 Audio unit
3 (Concierge)
2
14
13

4
3
Concierge
21 telephone
14
13

Electric lock Entrance panel lamps Common push-buttons

Connection Activation Connection Connection

From the dwelling

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

Using external pushbutton

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

ABR-001

ADJUSTMENT
J1 Jumper for the selection of the main panel
Definition of main panel
It is necessary to define the entrance panel with which tele-
phones communicate when on standby. This panel will be the J1 J1
main panel of the system and must have the J1 jumper installed.
Carry out the following steps: GRF-104 GRF-104
cod. 9610015 cod. 9610015

In standard installations, leave the J1 jumper installed. 19 Made in Spain

19 Made in Spain

In installations with several points of entry, select the main J1

12 V~
J1
12 V~

panel and remove the J1 jumper from all the other entrance V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

panels.
Main entrance panel Other entrance panels
In installations in housing estates, define the main panel for
each building in the estate and remove the J1 jumpers from all
the other panels.

148
Adjusting the volume controls
The audio units leave the factory with the audio system pre-set. Volume control for
Use the potentiometers of the audio unit (1) if re-adjustment is the entrance panel
required by your particular installation. Volume control for
the monitors/telephones
If it is necessary to make a more precise adjustment, remove
the J2 jumper (2) and repeat the adjustment. 1
2

J2

AUDIO UNIT GRF-204

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:
Electronic door entry installations with confidentiality feature

V , Power supply voltage

G
cod. 9610030 1,2 Telephone lock release
3, 2 Telephone microphone
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
19 Made in Spain

7,2 Common push button terminal

J1 J2
9 , 10 Panel lighting
12 V~ 11 , 12 Electric lock
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
16 , 18 Housing estate

17 , 18 Several points of entry

J1 Main panel selection

J2 Precision adjustment of sound level

Electronic video door entry installations

V , Power supply voltage

1,2 Telephones/monitors lock release

G
cod. 9610030 3, 2 Telephones/monitors microphone
4,2 Telephones/monitors loudspeaker
7,2 Common push button terminal
19 Made in Spain

J1 J2 9 , 10 Panel lighting
11 , 12 Electric lock
12 V~ 16 , 18 Housing estate
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
17 , 18 Several points of entry

19 Alimentation (according to installations)

and video unit control
J1 Main panel selection
J2 Precision adjustment of sound level

149
Description of connections:
Electronic door entry installations with confidentiality feature

Audio unit
Telephones (Installation with several points of entry)
Power supply unit
V~,
4,3,2,1 17,18
GRF-204
cod. 9610030

19 Made in Spain

J1 J2

12 V~
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

Audio unit
16 (Housing estates)

Electric lock Entrance panel lamps Common push-buttons

Connection Activation Connection Connection

From the dwelling

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

Using external pushbutton

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

ABR-001

150
 Electronic video door entry installations

Video unit
Telephones and Audio unit
monitors (Installation with several points of entry)
4,3,2,1 18,17

GRF-204
cod. 9610030

Power supply unit

19 Made in Spain
V~,
J1 J2

12 V~
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

Audio unit
16 (Housing estates)

Electric lock Entrance panel lamps Common push-buttons

Connection Activation Connection Connection

From the dwelling

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

Using external pushbutton

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

ABR-001

ADJUSTMENT
J1 Jumper for the selection of the main panel
Definition of main panel
It is necessary to define the entrance panel with which tele-
phones/monitors communicate when on standby. In electronic J1
video door entry installations, this panel will be activated when J1
the automatic switch-on function is used from the monitor of a
dwelling. GRF-104
cod. 9610015
GRF-104
cod. 9610015

This panel will be the main panel of the system and must have 19 Made in Spain
19 Made in Spain

the J1 jumper installed. J1

12 V~
J1
12 V~
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

Do the following:
In standard installations, leave the J1 jumper installed. Main entrance panel Other entrance panels

In installations with several points of entry, select the main

panel and remove the J1 jumper from all the other entrance
panels.
In installations in housing estates, define the main panel for
each building in the estate and remove the J1 jumpers from all
the other panels.

151
Adjusting the volume controls
The audio units leave the factory with the audio system pre-set. Volume control for
Re-adjust the controls of the audio unit if it is necessary to do so the entrance panel

because of the requirements of the installation (1). Volume control for

the monitors/telephones
If it is necessary to make a more precise adjustment, remove
the J2 jumper (2) and repeat the adjustment.
1 2

J2

AUDIO UNIT GRF-205

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:
Electronic door entry installations

V , Power supply voltage

GRF-205
cod. 9610031 1,2 Telephones lock release
3, 2 Telephones microphone
Made in Spain
4,2 Telephones loudspeaker
7,2 Common push button terminal
3 2 J2 (electronic call)
8,2 Common push button terminal
(buzzing call)
12 V~ ~
V~ 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 , 10 Panel lighting
11 , 12 Electric lock

J2 Selecting the electronic call tone

Replacement installations
V , Power supply voltage
GRF-205 0 System with separate commons
cod. 9610031

1,2 Telephone lock release

Made in Spain 3, 2 Telephone microphone
3 2 J2 4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
7,2 Common push button terminal
(electronic call)
12 V~ ~ 8,2 Common push button terminal
V~ 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8 (buzzing call)

9 , 10 Panel lighting
11 , 12 Electric lock

J2 Electronic call tone selection

152
Description of connections:
Electronic door entry installations

Telephones
Power supply unit
GRF-205 4,3,2,1
V~, cod. 9610031

Made in Spain

3 2 J2

12 V~ ~
V~ 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8

Electric lock Entrance panel lamps Common push-buttons Common push-buttons

Connection Activation Connection Connection Connection

Electronic call Buzzing call
From the dwelling
~ ~ ~
9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8 ~ 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8
9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8

Using external pushbutton

~
9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8

ABR-001

153
 Replacement installations

Power supply unit

GRF-205
V~, cod. 9610031

Made in Spain

3 2 J2

12 V~ ~
V~ 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8

Electric lock Entrance panel lamps Common push-buttons Common push-buttons

Connection Activation Connection Electronic call Buzzing call

connection connection
From the dwelling
~ ~ ~
9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8 ~ 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8
9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8

Using external pushbutton

~
9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8

ABR-001

Consult the technical data provided by the manufacturer of the entrance panel which is being replaced to know which terminals
correspond to the loudspeaker, microphone, lock release and common of the telephones in the installation; and whether the system
has a single common or separate commons. Then make the connections as indicated below.

SINGLE COMMON LINE SYSTEM

Telephones
GRF-205
cod. 9610031

Made in Spain

3 2 J2
Telephone
loudspeaker
12 V~ ~
V~ 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8
Telephone
microphone

Telephone
common terminal

Telephone
lock release

154
SEPARATED COMMON LINES SYSTEM

Telephones
GRF-205
cod. 9610031

Made in Spain

3 2 J2 Telephone
loudspeaker
12 V~ ~
V~ 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8
Telephone
microphone

Telephone
common terminal

Telephone
lock release

ADJUSTMENT
Selecting the call tone
The audio unit leaves the factory with the double-tone electro-
nic call (with the J2 jumper installed). If a triple-tone electronic G
cod. 9610031
call is preferred, remove the J2 connection jumper.
Made in Spain

12 V~
V~ 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 7

Adjusting the volume controls

The audio units leave the factory with the audio system pre-set.
Re-adjust the controls of the audio unit if it is necessary to do so
because of the requirements of the installation.
Volume control for
the entrance panel

Volume control for

the telephones

155
VIDEO UNITS IN ENTRANCE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS

VIDEO UNIT TCB-011, TBC-021

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:

+,- Power supply voltage

V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4 V1 , M Video signal to the monitors

15V
V2 , M Video signal installations
with several points of entry
Made in Spain

19 Video unit control

Description of connections:

For installations with several points of entry, extract

the resistence from the terminals (V2, M) where the
coaxial cable is to be connected (steps 1 and 2).
Video output to the monitors
V1, M

75 Ohm

V2, M Made in Spain

V2, M
Video unit Video unit
(Installation with several points of entry) (Installation with several points of entry)

Standard installation Installation with several points of entry

V2 M M V2 White V2 M M V2
White

+_ +_
19

Red Black
Red

19
Audio unit 19 +_
Black Audio unit Power supply

156
ADJUSTMENT
Control of the angle of vision
If necessary, manually control the orientation of the video unit.
It can be adjusted up to 10° in any direction.

VIDEO UNIT TCB-040, TCB-050

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:

T1+ , T1- Video signal to the monitors

T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+
T2+ , T2- Video signal installations
with several points of entry
Made in Spain
19 Alimentation and video unit control
19

Description of connections:

For installations with several points of access, extract

the resistence from the terminals (T2+,T2_) where the
twisted pair cable is to be connected (steps 1 and 2).
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

Video output to the monitors

1 2 T1+, T1-
220 Ohm

T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+

Made in Spain

19

19
Audio unit

T2+, T2- T2+, T2-

Video unit Video unit
(Installation with (Installation with
several points of entry) several points of entry)

157
ADJUSTMENT
Control of the angle of vision
If necessary, manually control the orientation of the video unit.
It can be adjusted up to 10° in any direction.

VIDEO UNIT TCB-210

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:

V1 M +,- Power supply voltage

15V V1 , M Video signal to the modulator

Made in Spain

TCB-210
cod. 9640012

Description of connections:

V1 M

15V
Made in Spain

TCB-210
cod. 9640012

VIDEO

Modulator
DC OUT

Black White-Black

+ _

ADJUSTMENT
Control of the angle of vision
If necessary, manually control the orientation of the video unit.
It can be adjusted up to 10° in any direction.

158
CONCIERGE SYSTEMS
CONCIERGE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS
CONCIERGE PANELS UPPER MODULES
AUDIO UNITS IN CONCIERGE PANELS WITH PUSHBUTTONS
AUDIO UNIT GRF-206
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.
Description of terminals:
V , Power supply voltage
GRF-206 1,2 Audio concierge lock release
cod. 9610032
3, 2 Telephones microphone
4,2 Telephones loudspeaker
Made in Spain
20 7,2 Common push button terminal
J1 J2 9 , 10 Panel lighting
11 , 12 Electric lock
12 V~
13 , 15 Concierge (control signal)
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
14 , 15 Concierge

16 , 18 Estate

17 , 18 Several points of entry

20 Concierge audio unit connector
Description of connections:

Pushbutton Concierge telephone

Connection

Concierge telephone
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
CC2

GRF-206
cod. 9610032

Power supply Made in Spain

20
V~,
J1 J2

12 V~
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

18
17
4
Audio unit 3
at the entry to the building 2
14
13

Entrance panel lamps Common push-buttons

Connection Connection

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

159
ADJUSTMENT
Volume control for
Adjusting the volume controls the concierge panel
The audio units leave the factory with the audio system pre-set.
Volume control for
Re-adjust the controls of the audio unit if it is necessary to do so the telephones
because of the requirements of the installation (1).
1
2
If it is necessary to make a more precise adjustment, remove the
J2 jumper (2) and repeat the adjustment.
J2

TELEPHONES FOR CONCIERGE SYSTEM

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.
Description of terminals:

CC1
1,2 Telephones lock release
3,2 Telephones microphone
4,2 Telephones loudspeaker

21 , 2 Entrance panel lock release

1 2 3 4 21 14 13 14 , 2 Electronic call
CC2 13 , 2 Concierge (control signal)

CC1 Concierge audio unit key connector

(pre-wired)
CC2 Concierge audio unit connector

Description of connections:
Telephones
1234

CC1

1 2 3 4 21 14 13
CC2
20 Concierge audio unit

3
4
Audio unit 1
at the entry to the building
14
13

160
TAP-OFFS AND SPLITTERS
TAP-OFFS

COAXIAL CABLE

TAP-OFF DIV-024
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:

DIV
cod. 9730031

Video signal input

Video output to next tap-off
Video outputs to monitors

Description of connections:

Connection of the coaxial cable

→ 6.5 - 6.8 mm 12 mm

1 2
3±1 8±1 mm
DIV-024
cod. 9730031

Next tap-off
3 4
M M

Monitors V1, M V1, M Monitors

V1, M V1, M

Video signal input

For installing tap-offs in cascade,

steps 1 and 2 (except for terminal tap-off).

1 2
75 Ohm

161
TWISTED PAIR

TAP-OFF DIV-034
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:

DIV-034
cod.9730015 Video signal input
T1+ T1-

Video output to next tap-off

T1- T1+
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

Video outputs to monitors

T1+ T1-

Description of connections:
DIV-034
cod.9730015

Next tap-off T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

T1+,T1 Monitors

T1+,T1

T1+,T1

T1+,T1
Video signal input

SPLITTERS
COAXIAL CABLE

SPLITTER DIV-124
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.
Description of terminals:

DIV-124
cod. 9730032 P1 , Power supply (15 V )

Video signal input

Video outputs
M 15V M

Description of connections:

Connection of the coaxial cable

→ 6.5 - 6.8 mm 12 mm

1 2
3±1 8±1 mm
Video risers DIV-124 Video risers
cod. 9730032 P1

3 4
M 15V M

Power supply
162

Video signal input

ADJUSTMENT
Amplification of the video signal
Depending on the installation it may be necessary to amplify
the level of the video signal of the outputs of the splitter. Use the
P1 potentiometer until the desired signal level is obtained. The
maximum output level which can be obtained is 1.3.

TWISTED PAIR

SPLITTER DIV-134
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:

DIV-134 V , Power supply AC (12 V )

cod.9730016

+,- Power supply DC (15 V )

12 V 15 V

V
+ T1 + T1 T1 + T1 T1 + T1 T1 + T1 T1 + T1 Video signal input
T1+ T1-

Video outputs
T1+ T1-

Description of connections:
cod.9730016

+
Video risers

AC
Power supply V
(AC or DC)
DC

Video signal input

163
TELEPHONES FOR HOUSES AND FLATS
TELEPHONE TEL-001
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:

1,2 Lock release

3,2 Telephone microphone
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call

1 2 3 4 5

Description of connections:
Electronic door entry installations
Electronic door entry installations with internal communication
Next telephone

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 Call

Audio unit Pushbutton in the panel

Electronic door entry installations with concierge unit

Next telephone

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 Call Call

Concierge telephone Pushbutton Pushbutton

Concierge entrance panel Entrance panel
at the entry to the building

164
TELEPHONE TEL-002
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:

1,2 Lock release

3,2 Telephone microphone
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call
24 , 25 Auxiliary push-button

1 2 3 4 5 24 25 Important:
The terminals 24, 25 are potential-free
contacts.
Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V

Description of connections:
Electronic door entry installations
Electronic door entry installations with internal communication

Next telephone

1 2 3 4 5 24 25

1 2 3 4 Call

Audio unit Pushbutton in the panel Auxiliary push-button

Connection Activation

From the dwelling

24 25

Connect to
auxiliary installation

165
 Electronic door entry installations with concierge unit

Next telephone

1 2 3 4 5 24 25

1 2 3 4 Call Call

Concierge telephone Pushbutton Pushbutton Auxiliary push-button

Concierge entrance panel Entrance panel
at the entry to the building Connection Activation

From the dwelling

24 25

Connect to
auxiliary installation

TELEPHONE TES-001
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:

1,2 Lock release

3,2 Telephone microphone
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call

1 2 3 4 5

Description of connections:
Next telephone

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 Call
166
Audio unit Pushbutton in the panel
TELEPHONE TES-002
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:
1,2 Lock release
3,2 Telephone microphone
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call
24 , 25 Auxiliary push-button

1 2 3 4 5 24 25 Important:
The terminals 24, 25 are potential-free
contacts.
Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V

Description of connections:

Next telephone

1 2 3 4 5 24 25

1 2 3 4 Call

Audio unit Pushbutton in the panel Auxiliary push-button

Connection Activation

From the dwelling

24 25

Connect to
auxiliary installation

167
TELEPHONE FOR INTERNAL COMMUNICATION TIN-001
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:

Internal communication system

I1, I2 Internal communication BUS
I3 Internal communication audio
1 2 3 4 5 I3 I2 I1

CC1 4+N door entry system

1,2 Lock release
3,2 Telephone microphone
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call
1 2 3 4

ON

SW1

Description of connections for internal communication system:

Internal communication
Telephones
I1 I2 I3

1 2 3 4 5 I3 I2 I1

CC1
1 2 3 4

ON

SW1

I1 I2
Control equipment

Description of connections for internal communication system + 4+N door entry system:

Telephones
for internal communication
1234 I1 I2 I3

1 2 3 4 5 I3 I2 I1

CC1
1 2 3 4

ON

SW1

I1 I2
Control equipment

168 1234 Call

Audio unit Entrance panel pushbutton
ADJUSTMENTS
Assigning extension numbers
Each telephone is equipped with a multiswitch with 4 microswitches
(SW1); these are used to define the extension number of the telephone.
Depending on the position of the microswitches, the extension number of the

ON
telephone will be between 1 and 16. Assign a different extension to each

1 2 3 4
telephone in the installation.
1
The following table shows the extension number of each telephone accor- SW
ding to the position of the 4 microswitches. Place the microswitches in the
appropriate positions to assign the desired extension.

ON ON ON ON
Extension Extension Extension Extension
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

SW1
ON 1 5 9 13

1 2 3 4 2 6 10 14

3 7 11 15

4 8 12 16

TELEPHONE TUN-001
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:
Electronic door entry installations
J1
1,2 Lock release
3,2 Telephone microphone
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call
6,2 Buzzing call

1 2 3 4 5 6

Replacement installations
J1 1,2 Lock release
3,2 Telephone microphone
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call
6,2 Buzzing call

J1 Compatibility jumper
1 2 3 4 5 6
Description of connections:
Electronic door entry installations Next telephone

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4
Electronic Buzzing
Audio unit call call
169
Pushbutton in the panel
 Replacement installations Next telephone

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6

Alcad's equipments Other manufacturers Electronic Buzzing

call call

1 2 3 4 See "Compatibility Pushbutton in the entrance panel

Audio unit tables" on page 173

ADJUSTMENTS
Replacement installations Volume control for the
telephone microphone
Adjusting the volume controls
The telephones leave the factory with the audio system pre-set. Volume control for the
telephone loudspeaker
Use the potentiometers of the telephone if re-adjustment is requi-
red by your particular installation.

TELEPHONE TUN-002
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:
J1 1,2 Lock release
Electronic door entry installations 3,2 Telephone microphone
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call
6,2 Buzzing call

24 , 25 Auxiliary push-button
1 2 3 4 5 6 24 25 Important:
The terminals 24, 25 are potential-free
contacts.
Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V
Replacement installations

1,2 Lock release

J1 3,2 Telephone microphone
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call
6,2 Buzzing call
24 , 25 Auxiliary push-button

J1 Compatibility jumper
1 2 3 4 5 6 24 25
Important:
170 The terminals 24, 25 are potential-free
contacts.
Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V
Description of connections:
Electronic door entry installations

Next telephone

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 24 25

Auxiliary push-button
1 2 3 4
Connection Activation
Electronic Buzzing
Audio unit call call
From the dwelling
24 25
Pushbutton in the panel

Connect to
auxiliary installation

Replacement installations

Next telephone

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 24 25

Alcad's equipments Other manufacturers Electronic Buzzing

call call Auxiliary push-button

1 2 3 4 See "Compatibility Connection Activation

Pushbutton in
Audio unit tables" on page 173 the entrance panel
From the dwelling
24 25

Connect to
auxiliary installation

171
ADJUSTMENTS
Replacement installations
Adjusting the volume controls Volume control for the
The telephones leave the factory with the audio system pre-set. telephone microphone

Use the potentiometers of the telephone if re-adjustment is requi- Volume control for the
red by your particular installation. telephone loudspeaker

172
COMPATIBILITY TABLE
MODEL
A B

ALCAD TUN-001/TUN-002 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1
ACET 5 2 10 7 9 A
AMPER D C A B E A
ATEA 2 3 4 1 5 A
AUTA TF92 (Electronic) 10 4 3 7 12 A
AUTELCO P5 1 a b 2 A
BELL SYSTEM TELEPHO Z O R T I A
BOGEN T 3 1 2 6 A
BPT 2 4 1 5 3 A
CENTRAMATIC 4 1 2 3 5 A
CITESA 1 C 4 3 B A
CITOVOX 5 9 10 7 T A
COMELIT OKAY 5 4 3/6 2 1 A
ELBEX LOW MIC SPEC + A
ELVOX 2 9 6 4 + A
ELVOX 801-822, 870, 902/000 7 3/4/5 2 1 6 A
FARFISA 5 3 1 2 6 A
FERMAX GONDOLA 4 3 1 2 V/5 A
FERMAX REKTO TF-4 P C A B E A
FERMAX 2044, 20440, 21100 1 3 2 6 4 B
FRINGE 2 1 3 6 4 4 A
GAME P 3 2 1 Z A
GIRO 2 1 3 6 4 A
GOLMAR T-600 T 3 1 2 6 A
GOLMAR T-800 P1 3 5 10 0 A
GOLMAR T-810 P1 3 5 10 7 A
GOLMAR T-1000 X A M S N A

GOLMAR T-2800 4 3 5 10 7 A
LT TERRANEO 603N T1 3 1 2 6 A
OSTELVI 9 6 2 1 7 A
PORMAT
RIPOLLES 3 8 1 2 4 A
RITTO ELEGANT 40518 11 13 12 15 14 A
SAFNAT 4 2 1 3 V A
SELTI 5 3 1 2 6 A
SIEDLE HT 611-01 1 9/C 2 11 7 A
SPRINT "/" 3 1 2 6 A
STR NH200 1 O M T S A
STR NH205 1 O M T S A
TAGRA 8 6 2 1 4 A
TEGUI GL 3 2 4 5 1 A
TEGUI HORIZON (Buzzer) 3 2 4 5 1 A
TEGUI HORIZON (Electronic) 3 2 4 5 1 A
TELEVES 4 3 2 1 T A
TESLA DDZ 85 1 3 2 6 4 A
TESLA DDZ 93 Z 3 2 6 4 A
TUNE 8 6 2 1 4 A
URMET 730, 930, 1030, 1130 8/9 11 2 1 7 A
URMET 9 6 2 1 7 A
VIDEX 5 7 1 2 6 A
173
YUS PHONE EL - T R B/PT A
ACCESSORIES FOR MONITORS
DESKTOP SUPPORTS
DESKTOP SUPPORT SSM-001
CONNECTION BASE
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown.

Description of terminals:
+,- Power supply voltage
1,2 Lock release
3,2 Telephone microphone
4,2 Telephone loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call
T1+ T1- T1- T1+ +15V S2 D1 D2 S5
V1 M M V1 T1+ , T1- Signal of video (twisted pair)
1 2 3 4 5 24 25
V1 , M Signal of video (coaxial)

24 , 25 Auxiliary push-button (P1)

Description of connections:

T1+ T1- T1- T1+ +15V S2 D1 D2 S5

V1 M M V1 1 2 3 4 5 24 25

Call 4 32 1
Power supply Pushbutton in the panel Audio unit

COAXIAL TWISTED PAIR

Next monitor Next monitor

T1+ T1- T1- T1+ T1+ T1- T1- T1+

V1 M M V1 V1 M M V1

V1, M T1+, T1_

Video signal input Video signal input

Electronic call extension Auxiliary push-button

or accessory
Connection Activation Connection Activation
Electronic call When a call is
2 S5
extension received
AAL-200 in the dwelling 5 24 25

S2 S5
2 5

5 Additional
Elements
2
Switch-selector
accessory
ASC-050
5A / 250V~

S2 S5
2 5 6

Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

Additional
Elements
5
174 2
MULTIWIRE SCART CONNECTOR CABLE
CONNECTIONS TO SCM-010 CONNECTION BRACKET FOR COAXIAL CABLE
Connect the multiwire SCART connector cable to the connection bracket in accordance with the following colour-coding.
Description of connections:

TERMINAL CABLE COLOUR TERMINAL CABLE COLOUR

Pink 24 Yellow
Brown-white 25 Brown
1 Green V1 Pink-black
2 Purple-white M White-black
3 Black V1 Yellow-black
4 White M Blue
5 Red

CONNECTIONS TO SCM-020 CONNECTION BRACKET FOR TWISTED PAIR

Connect the multiwire SCART connector cable to the connection bracket in accordance with the following colour-coding.
Description of connections:

TERMINAL CABLE COLOUR TERMINAL CABLE COLOUR

Pink 24 Yellow
Brown-white 25 Brown
1 Green T1+ Pink-black
2 Purple-white T1- White-black
3 Black T1+ Yellow-black
4 White T1- Blue

5 Red

MONITORS AND CONNECTION BRACKETS FOR HOUSES

AND FLATS
CONNECTION BRACKETS FOR HOUSES AND FLATS
COAXIAL CABLE

CONNECTION BRACKET SCM-010

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.
Important: Use the guides on the bracket to pass the connection cables.

175
Description of terminals: CC1

CC1 Monitor connector

J1
A B
1,2 Lock release
3,2 Monitors microphone
4,2 Monitors loudspeaker
R1 5,2 Electronic call

V1 , M Signal of video
V1 +,- Power supply voltage
M
M
24 , 25 Auxiliary push-button (P1)
V1
26 , 27 Auxiliary push-button (P2)
24
25
26 Important:
27 The terminals 24, 25, 26 and 27
28
are potential-free contacts.
Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V

1 2 3 4 5

Description of connections:
Next monitor
(Installation in series
or
in parallel) Next monitor
CC1
V1, M 4321

A B J1

COAXIAL
CABLE
Internal R1
conductor
Mesh

V1
M
M
V1 Video signal input

24
25
26
27
28

1 2 3 4 5

Call 4321
Power supply Pushbutton Audio unit
in the panel

Electronic call extension

Auxiliary push-button 2 Auxiliary push-button 1
or switch-selector accessory
Connection Activation Connection Activation Connection Activation
Electronic call When a call is 25
extension received 26 24
AAL-200 in the dwelling
27 25
28 26

S2 S5
2 5

5 Additional Additional
Elements Elements
2
Switch-selector
accessory
ASC-050
5A / 250V~

S2 S5
2 5 6

Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

Additional
Elements
5
176 2
ADJUSTMENT
Configuration of the J1 jumper (supplying power to the tap-off)
In installations where the video signal is distributed via tap-offs, for the monitors to be able to receive the signal captured by the
video unit the connection brackets must supply power through the coaxial cable to the tapped output of the corresponding tap-off.
The J1 jumper permits the configuration of the connection bracket to send the necessary voltage through the coaxial cable in such
cases.
Switch the J1 jumper to position B if the video signal for the dwelling comes from a tap-off. If this is not the case, leave the J1 jum-
per in position A.

Configuration of the 75 Ω end-of-line R1 resistor

To guarantee the best possible image quality, it is important that the video line is loaded with 75 Ω in the last monitor.
For this to be so, proceed as follows:
If distribution of the video signal is performed with tap-offs, leave the 75 Ω resistor in the monitor of each dwelling. If a dwelling
has several monitors installed in parallel, associated to the same call, then leave the resistor only in the monitor at the end of the line.
In installations with distribution in cascade, cut the 75 Ω resistor in all the monitors except the one at the end of the line.

Examples
The following examples show the configuration of the J1 jumper and the R1 resistor depending on the type of installation.

Distribution of the video signal via tap-offs

DIV-024

DIV-024

B J1
DIV-024 DIV-024

R1
V1
M
M
V1

DIV-024

DIV-024

177
 Distribution of the video signal via tap-offs. Two monitors in parallel in the same dwelling

B J1 B J1

R1
R1
V1 V1
M M
M M
V1 V1

DIV-024 DIV-024

Distribution of the video signal in cascade

A J1

R1
V1
M
M
V1

A J1

R1

V1
M
M
V1

Distribution of the video signal in cascade. Two monitors in parallel in the same dwelling

A J1 A J1

R1
R1
V1 V1
M M
M M
V1 V1

178
 Distribution of the video signal in two columns: One column with tap-offs, the other in cascade

DIV-024
A J1
DIV-024

R1
DIV-024 V1
M
M
V1

DIV-024 B J1
DIV-024

R1
V1 A J1
DIV-124 M
M
V1 R1

V1
M
M
DIV-024 V1

DIV-124

TWISTED PAIR

CONNECTION BRACKET SCM-020

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.
Important: Use the guides on the bracket to pass the connection cables.

Description of terminals:

CC1

CC1 Monitor connector

1,2 Lock release
J1
3,2 Monitors microphone
A B
4,2 Monitors loudspeaker
5,2 Electronic call
R1 T1+ , T1- Signal of video

+,- Power supply voltage

T1+
T1-
24 , 25 Auxiliary push-button (P1)
T1-
T1+
26 , 27 Auxiliary push-button (P2)

24 Important:
25
The terminals 24, 25, 26 and 27
26
27
are potential-free contacts.
28 Connection limit: 50 mA - 12 V

1 2 3 4 5

179
Description of connections:

Next monitor
(Installation in series
or
CC1 in parallel) Next monitor
T1+,T1 4321

A B J1

R1

T1+
T1-
T1- T1+,T1
T1+
Video signal input
24
25
26
27
28

1 2 3 4 5

Call 4321
Power supply Pushbutton Audio unit
in the panel

Electronic call extension

Auxiliary push-button 2 Auxiliary push-button 1
or switch-selector accessory
Connection Activation Connection Activation Connection Activation
Electronic call When a call is 25
extension received 26 24
AAL-200 in the dwelling
27 25
28 26

S2 S5
2 5

5 Additional Additional
Elements Elements
2
Switch-selector
accessory
ASC-050
5A / 250V~

S2 S5
2 5 6

Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

Additional
Elements
5
2

180
ADJUSTMENT
Configuration of the J1 jumper (supplying power to the tap-off)
In installations where the video signal is distributed via tap-offs, for the monitors to be able to receive the signal captured by the
video unit the connection brackets must supply power to the tapped output of the corresponding tap-off.
The J1 jumper permits the configuration of the connection bracket to activate the tapped output in such cases.
Switch the J1 jumper to position B if the video signal for the dwelling comes from a tap-off. If this is not the case, leave the J1 jum-
per in position A.

Configuration of the 120 Ω end-of-line R1 resistor

To guarantee the best possible image quality, it is important that the video line is loaded with 120 Ω in the last monitor.
For this to be so, proceed as follows:
If distribution of the video signal is performed with tap-offs, leave the 120 Ωresistor in the monitor of each dwelling. If a dwelling
has several monitors installed in parallel, associated to the same call, then leave the resistor only in the monitor at the end of the line.
In installations with distribution in cascade, cut the 120 Ω resistor in all the monitors except the one at the end of the line.

Examples
The following examples show the configuration of the J1 jumper and the R1 resistor depending on the type of installation.

Distribution of the video signal via tap-offs

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

B J1
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

R1
T1+
T1
T1
T1+

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

181
 Distribution of the video signal via tap-offs. Two monitors in parallel in the same dwelling

B J1 B J1

R1 R1

T1+ T1+
T1 T1
DIV-034 T1 T1
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1+
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

Distribution of the video signal in cascade

A J1

R1
T1+
T1
T1
T1+

A J1

R1

T1+
T1
T1
T1+

Distribution of the video signal in cascade. Two monitors in parallel in the same dwelling

A J1 A J1

R1 R1

T1+ T1+
T1 T1
T1 T1
T1+ T1+

182
Distribution of the video signal in two columns: one column with tap-offs, the other in cascade

DIV-034
DIV-034
A J1 DIV-034
cod.9730015

DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

R1
T1+
T1
T1
T1+
DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015
B J1
J1
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

DIV-034 R1
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

R1 T1+
T1
T1+ T1
T1 T1+
T1
T1+

DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

DIV-134 DIV-134
cod.9730016

12 V 15 V
+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
V

DIV-134
DIV-134
cod.9730016

12 V 15 V
+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
V

MONITORS FOR HOUSES AND FLATS

MONITORS MVB-001, MVC-001

ADJUSTMENT
Adjusting the contrast and brilliance of the image
The monitors leave the factory with the image contrast and
brilliance pre-set. Use the controls of the monitor to re-adjust the
contrast and brilliance if the installation requires it.

CONTRAST BRILLIANCE

Turning the video on and off

If so desired, calls can be received in the dwelling without the
image of the visitor appearing on the screen of the monitor. All
that is required is to move the video on/off switch to the right.
To be able to see visitors once more, move the switch back to
its initial position.

ON OFF
SWITCH TO TURN
ON-OFF

183
ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES
CALL EXTENSION UNITS

CALL EXTENSION UNIT AAL-200

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown.
Description of terminals:

5, 2 Electronic call

S2 S5
2 5

Description of connections:

S2 S5
2 5

2
ALCAD equipment
5

See compatibility tables Other manufacturers

COMPATIBILITY TABLE

MODEL

ALCAD AAL-200 2 5
AUTA TF92 (electronic) 4 12
FERMAX 2044, 20440, 21100 3 4
FRINGE 1 4
GOLMAR T-800 3 0
RITTO ELEGANT 40518 13 14
STR NH205 O S
TEGUI HORIZON (electronic) 2 1

184
ADJUSTMENT
Adjusting the call volume
The call extension units leave the factory with the call volume
pre-set. Use the potentiometers of the call extension units if re-
adjustment is required by your particular installation.

Turning the call extension unit on and off

If so desired, it is possible to deactivate the call extension unit
so that it does not reproduce the call tone. All that is required is
to move the on/off switch downwards. To be able to hear the
call tone again, move the switch back to the “on” position.

Position Position
when on when off

CALL EXTENSION UNIT AAL-210

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown.
Description of terminals:

6, 2 Buzzing call

2 6

Description of connections:

2 6

2 ALCAD equipment
6
185
See compatibility tables Other manufacturers
COMPATIBILITY TABLE ADJUSTMENT
Turning the call extension unit on and off
MODEL If so desired, it is possible to deactivate the call extension unit
so that it does not reproduce the call tone. All that is required is
ALCAD AAL-210 2 6 to move the on/off switch downwards. To be able to hear the
ATEA 3 5 call tone again, move the switch back to the “on” position.
AUTELCO 1 2
BOGEN 3 6
BPT 4 3
CENTRAMATIC 1 5
CITESA C B
CITOVOX 9 T
ELVOX 9 +
FRINGE 1 4
GAME 3 Z Position Position
when on when off
GIRO 1 4
GOLMAR T-600 3 6
GOLMAR T-1000 A N
GOLMAR T-2800 3 7
OSTELVI 6 7
RIPOLLES 8 4
SAFNAT 2 V
TAGRA 6 4
TEGUI GL 2 1
TEGUI HORIZON (Buzzer) 2 1
TELEVES 3 T
TUNE 6 4
URMET 6 7

Note: For other models or for the equipment of other manufactures, ensure that the voltage of the buzzer is 12 Vac.

SWITCH-SELECTOR ACCESSORIES

SWITCH-SELECTOR ACCESSORY ASC-001

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:

V , Power supply
Ctrl , Control signal of circuits 1 and 2

ASC-001 Circuit 1
cod. 9730023

C1 Common
NO1 Normally open contact
Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2 NC1 Normally closed contact

Circuit 2
C2 Common
NO2 Normally open contact
NC2 Normally closed contact

Maximum values of circuits 1 and 2: 1A - 24V /

186
Description of connections:
Power supply
, V~ ASC-001
cod. 9730023

V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2

Control signal

Additional elements

Range of values of the control signals

Depending on the value of the control signal, it may be necessary to feed the ASC-001 through the power supply terminals.

Control signal values which require a power supply.

Power supply
3 - 11 V 15 V
Ctrl , 4-8V V , 12 V

Control signal values which do not require a power supply.

Power supply
11 - 15 V
Ctrl , 8 - 12 V V ,

SWITCH-SELECTOR ACCESSORY ASC-050

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:
Ctrl1 Control signal 1
5, 2 Electronic call (conventional door entry system)

Ctrl2 Control signal 2

ASC-050 6, 2 Buzzing call
cod. 9730021

5A / 250V~

2
S
5
S
6 Circuit 1
Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC C Common
NO Normally open contact
NC Normally closed contact

Important:
Maximum values of the control circuit : 5A-250V

Description of connections:
ACTIVATING BY CALL
ASC-050
cod. 9730021

5A / 250V~

S2 S5
2 5 6
Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

Telephones/Monitors 5, 2
Electronic call

Telephones 6, 2
Buzzing call Additional elements
187
 ACTIVATING BY EXTERNAL CONTROL SIGNAL
ASC-050
cod. 9730021

5A / 250V~

S2 S5
2 5 6
Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

Control signal 1 Ctrl1,

Control signal 2 Ctrl2,

Additional elements

Range of values of the control signals

Ctrl 1, 5 - 10 V

Ctrl 2, 11 - 15 V
8 - 12 V

COMMON DOOR ACCESSORIES

COMMON DOOR ACCESSORY APC-001

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown.

Description of terminals:

cod.9730006
12 , 11 Electric lock activation signals AC/DC

12

AC 12 , 11 AC electric lock
DC 12 , 11 DC electric lock

Description of connections:
cod.9730006

12

DC electric lock

11,12
11,12
11,12
11,12 AC electric lock
Electric lock signals

Note: To activate an AC electric lock, it is necessary that all the electric lock signals be AC.

188
Connection of accessories in parallel
To concentrate the electric lock signal of more than 4 entrance panels or systems, several APC-001 accessories must be connec-
ted in parallel.

APC-001 APC-001
cod.9730006 cod.9730006

AC DC AC DC
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 12
12 12

DC electric lock
signals

AC electric lock
signals
Electric lock signals
Electric lock
signals

CALL ADAPTER ACCESSORIES

CALL ADAPTER ACCESSORY AAL-001

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:

V , Power supply voltage

AAL-001
Cod.9730005 7,2 Common push button terminal
(electronic call)
Made in Spain
8,2 Common push button terminal
V V 2 7 8 16 17 (buzzing call)
16 , 2 Housing estate
17 , 2 Several points of entry

189
Description of connections:
Power supply
V~,
Cod.9730005

Made in Spain

V V

V~
2
Audio unit
7
(Housing estates) 16

(Several points of entry 17

and housing estate)

Connection

V V

ELECTRONIC MODULES
ELECTRONIC MODULES FOR INTERNAL COMMUNICATION INSTALLATIONS
CONTROL EQUIPMENT GCI-001
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:

230 V Mains voltage

I1, I2 Internal communication BUS

230 V I2 I1

Description of connections:
Telephone for
Main voltage internal communication
230 V~ I1 I2

GCI-001
cod. 9650001

230 V I2 I1

190
MODULATORS FOR TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS
MODULATORS MDA-300, MDA-400

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:

Video signal input

DC output voltage

SW1 TV channel output

Description of connections:

TV channel output

SW1

Black White-Black

+ _

+ _ V1, M
Video unit. External power supply unit
TCB-210

191
ADJUSTMENT
Selecting the output channel
Select the output channel. All modulators are equipped with a
switch with 10 microswitches which are used to define the TV
standard in use in different countries as well as the desired out-
put channel.
The following tables show the TV standards and the TV output
channels which are defined according to the positions of the 10
microswitches. Set the microswitches to the appropriate posi-
tions to obtain the required TV standard and output channel.

MDA-300 BIII MODULATOR

Standard B CCIR EUROPE Standard I IRELAND

MDA-300 MDA-300
B CCIR EUROPE standard I IRELAND standard
CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL
x10 x1 x10 x1 x10 x1 x10 x1
ON ON ON ON
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Channel Channel Channel Channel

STD STD STD STD

5 S12 D S12

6 S13 E S13

7 S14 F S14

8 S15 G S15

9 S16 H S16

10 S17 I S17

11 S18 J S18

12 S19 S11

S11 S20

Standard D OIRT Standard B ITALY

MDA-300 MDA-300
D OIRT standard B ITALY standard
CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL
x10 x1 x10 x1 x10 x1 x10 x1
ON ON ON ON
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Channel Channel Channel Channel

STD STD STD STD

6 S12 D S13

7 S13 E S14

8 S14 F S15

9 S15 G S16

10 S16 H S17

11 S17 H1 S18

12 S18 H2 S19

S11 S20 S11 S20

S12

192
Standard I SOUTH AFRICA Standard D POLAND
MDA-300 MDA-300
I SOUTH AFRICA standard D POLAND standard
CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL
x10 x1 x10 x1 x10 x1
ON ON x10 x1
ON ON
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Channel Channel Channel Channel

STD STD STD STD

4 12 6 S10
5 S14 7 S11

6 S15 8 S12
7 S16 9 S13

8 S17 10 S14
9 S18 11 S15

10 12 S16

S9 S17

MDA-400 UHF MODULATOR

TABLE SHOWING STANDARDS TABLE SHOWING CHANNELS
MDA-400 MDA-400
STANDARDS TABLE CHANNELS TABLE
CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL
x10 x1 x10 x1 x10 x1 x10 x1
ON ON ON ON
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Standard Standard Channel Channel

STD STD STD STD

G CCIR I SOUTH AFRICA 21 46

G ITALY K OIRT 22 47

I UK K POLAND 23 48

I IRELAND L FRANCE 24 49

25 50

26 51

27 52

28 53

29 54

30 55

31 56

32 57

33 58

Adjusting the output level of the TV channel 34 59

Use the potentiometers of the modulator if re-adjustment of 35 60

the channel output level is required by your particular insta- 36 61
llation. 37 62

38 63

39 64

40 65

41 66

42 67

43 68

44 69

45

193
POWER SUPPLY UNITS
POWER SUPPLY ALA-040
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals: Description of connections:

230 V Main voltage

ALA-040
ALA-040 cod. 9620001
cod. 9620001
V , Output voltage (AC)
230 V V 230 V V

230 V ,V Elements requiring power supply

POWER SUPPLY ALA-020

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals: Description of connections:

230 V Main voltage

ALA-020
ALA-020 cod. 9620002
cod. 9620002
V , Output voltage (AC)
230 V V 230 V V

230 V ,V Elements requiring power supply

POWER SUPPLY ALM-040

CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals: Description of connections:

230 V Main voltage

ALM-040
V , Output voltage (AC)
cod. 9620011
ALM-040
cod. 9620011
, Output voltage (DC)
230 V V
230 V V

230 V Elements requiring power supply

V
Elements requiring power supply
194
POWER SUPPLY ALM-080
CONNECTIONS
Make the terminal connections as shown. For more information consult the installation wiring diagrams at the back of this manual.

Description of terminals:

230 V Main voltage

V , (AC) output voltage

, (DC) output voltage

ALM-080
cod. 9620013
, 11 (AC) output voltage

230 V C NC NO Ctrl 11 V Circuit

Ctrl , Control signal
C Common
NO Normally open contact
NC Normally closed contact

Description of connections:

Elements requiring
power supply
+ -
ALM-080
cod. 9620013

230 V~
230 V C NC NO Ctrl 11 V

,V Elements requiring power supply

11,12 Audio unit

Electric lock

Range of values of the control signal

11 - 15 V
Ctrl , 8 - 12 V

195
 DIAGRAMS
6
GENERAL POINTS CONCERNING INSTALLATIONS
POWER SUPPLY UNITS
RecuerdeRemember to protect the power supply units of the installation by complying with regulations in force governing electri-
cal installations (keep away from strong magnetic fields and high temperature locations, ensure correct fusing, etc).
Choose a dry, well-ventilated place away from direct sources of heat. Avoid blocking the ventilation slots.

DISTRIBUTION OF THE VIDEO SIGNAL

In video door entry systems, it is recommended that the video signal be distributed using tap-offs and splitters.
If the installation does not permit distribution to be made with tap-offs, you can join the connection brackets in cascade.

Next tap-off Next monitor

Connection bracket DIV-024 Connection bracket

dwelling 2 dwelling 2

Connection bracket Connection bracket

dwelling 1 dwelling 1

INSTALLATION WITH TAP-OFF INSTALLATION WITHOUT TAP-OFF

WIRING
To ensure the correct functioning of the installation, it is essential that the cable used be of the correct section and characteristics.

POWER SUPPLY
To avoid problems with the audio caused by possible inductions between the power supply wires and the other wiring of the elec-
tronic door entry or video door entry system, it is recommended that a separate cable hose be used to feed the entrance panel.

SECTIONS
Two factors directly affect which section of cable should be used: the distance between the different elements of the installation to
be connected; and the number of monitors, telephones and call wires associated to the same call wire.
All the diagrams in the present chapter include a table showing the minimum size of sections which can be used, depending on the
distances and the number of devices which are to be installed in the dwelling.
For distances different to those shown in the diagrams, consult the manufacturer.

196
CHARACTERISTICS OF COAXIAL CABLE
In electronic video door entry installations where the video signal is transmitted via coaxial cable, use coaxial cable with a cha-
racteristic impedance of 75 ohm to obtain a high-quality video signal and to ensure correct functioning.
In addition, remember that the coaxial cable line of the installation should be charged with 75 ohm. The tap-offs and the con-
nection brackets include a 75 ohm end-of-line resistor.

CHARACTERISTICS OF TWISTED PAIR

In electronic video door entry installations where the video signal is transmitted via twisted pair, use twisted pair of category 5e
or of equivalent characteristics to obtain a high-quality video signal and to ensure correct functioning.
In addition, remember that the twisted pair line of the installation should be charged with 120 ohm. The tap-offs and the connec-
tion brackets include a 120 ohm end-of-line resistor.

DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS. ELECTRONIC CALL.

CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for door entry installations with electronic call in buildings with a single point of entry.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
5 5

TEL-001 TEL-001
LAST FLOOR

5 5

TEL-001 TEL-001
GROUND FLOOR

4+N
ALA-040 (230 V ) POINT SECTION TABLE
OF ENTRY AWG
2
Up to 50 metres
MAN-410 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
230 V V
+
MPD-004 Up to 25 metres
+ 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
2 CMO-004
(1) Up to 100 metres
1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Use separate cable hose

(2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
ABR-001 (3) Section according to the number
(2) of telephones in the dwelling 197
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
WIRED DIAGRAM

TEL-001 TEL-001

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Call Call

TEL-001 TEL-001

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Call Call

ALA-040
Point of entry
Entrance panel

GRF-201

230 V V Made in Spain

3 2 J2

V~ 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 7
230 V (1)

ABR-001

(1) Use separate cable hose Calls

198
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
One of the entrance panels must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed). The panels of the other
points of entry must be configured as secondary panels (remove the J1 jumper from audio units).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

5 5

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 50 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
TEL-001 TEL-001
Up to 25 metres
LAST FLOOR
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
Up to 100 metres
1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
5 5 (3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Use separate cable hose

(2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
(3) Section according to the number
of telephones in the dwelling
TEL-001 TEL-001
GROUND FLOOR

ALA-040 (230 V ) 4+N ALA-040 (230 V )

POINT OF POINT OF NEXT

230 V V
ENTRY 1 ENTRY 2 230 V V
POINT OF ENTRY 230 V V
(1)
2 2
6+N 6+N
(1)
2 2

MAN-430 MAN-430
+ +
MPD-004 MPD-004
+ +
CMO-004 CMO-004

ABR-001 ABR-001
(2) (2)

199
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
WIRED DIAGRAM

TEL-001 TEL-001

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Call Call

TEL-001 TEL-001

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Call Call

Next
Point
of entry

J1 Point of entry 1 J1 Point of entry 2

Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel

ALA-040 ALA-040

GRF-203 GRF-203

Made in Spain Made in Spain

J1 J2 J1 J2
230 V V 230 V V

V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
230 V 230 V

(1) (1)

Next
Point of entry

ABR-001 ABR-001
Calls

Calls
(1) Use separate cable hose

Note: Make the same connections

at all the secondary entrance panels
200
HOUSING ESTATE WITH 3 BUILDINGS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE)
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for door entry installations in housing estates with 3 buildings, each building has a point of entry, and
one external point of entry or gate used by all 3 buildings.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
The entrance panels of the external point of entry must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed).
The panels of the interior points of entry must be configured as secondary panels (remove the J1 jumper from audio units).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3

5 5 5 5 5 5

TEL-001 TEL-001 TEL-001 TEL-001 TEL-001 TEL-001

LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR

5 5 5 5 5 5

TEL-001 TEL-001 TEL-001 TEL-001 TEL-001 TEL-001

GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR

ALA-040 (230 V ) 4+N ALA-040 (230 V ) 4+N ALA-040 (230 V ) 4+N

POINT POINT POINT

230 V V
OF ENTRY 230 V V
OF ENTRY 230 V V
OF ENTRY

2 MAN-430 2 MAN-430 2 MAN-430

+ + +
(1) MPD-004 (1) MPD-004 (1) MPD-004
2 + 2 + 2 +
CMO-004 CMO-004 CMO-004

ABR-001 ABR-001 ABR-001

(2) (2) (2)
6+N 6+N 6+N

ALA-040 (230 V )
SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 50 metres
230 V V

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

2 Up to 25 metres

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(1) Up to 100 metres
2
1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
MAN-430 x 3 (3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
+
MPD-004 x 3 4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
+
CMO-004 x 3 (1) Use separate cable hose
+
(2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
201
CEM-001 x 2
ABR-001 (3) Section according to the number
(2) of telephones in the dwelling
EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY
HOUSING ESTATE WITH 3 BUILDINGS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE)

BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3

Interior point of entry Interior point of entry Interior point of entry
J1 External point of entry J1 External point of entry J1 External point of entry
Main entrance panel Main entrance panel Main entrance panel
ALA-040
GRF-203 GRF-203 GRF-203
Made in Spain Made in Spain Made in Spain
J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2
230 V V
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
230 V
(1) (1) (1)
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM

Calls Calls Calls

BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
Interior point Interior point Interior point
of entry of entry of entry
ABR-001
(1) Use separate cable hose

202
 203
HOUSING ESTATE WITH 3 BUILDINGS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE)

BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3

TEL-001
TEL-001 TEL-001
1 2 3 4 5
Call Call
Call
J1 Interior point of entry. Building 1
Secondary entrance panel
GRF-203 J1 J1
ALA-040 Made in Spain
J1 J2 Interior point of entry Interior point of entry
Building 2 Building 3
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
Secondary Secondary
ALA-040 (230 V ) entrance panel ALA-040 (230 V ) entrance panel
230 V V
MAN-430 MAN-430
+ +
(1) MPD-004 MPD-004
230 V + +
230 V V
(1) CMO-004
230 V V
(1) CMO-004
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE BUILDINGS
BUILDING 1
External ABR-001 ABR-001
BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
point of entry External External
ABR-001
point of entry point of entry
Calls Calls Calls
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
Calls External point of entry Calls External point of entry Calls External point of entry
(1) Use separate cable hose BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT
ELECTRONIC CALL.
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
STANDARD INSTALLATION WITH CONCIERGE UNIT
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for door entry installations with electronic call in buildings with a single point of entry, controlled by
a concierge.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

5 5
SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 50 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Up to 25 metres

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
TEL-001 TEL-001
Up to 100 metres
LAST FLOOR
1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18 5 5
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Use separate cable hose

(2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
(3) Section according to the number
of telephones in the dwelling

TEL-001 TEL-001
GROUND FLOOR

ALA-040 (230 V ) ALA-040 (230 V )

4+N

230 V V
POINT 230 V V

OF ENTRY CONCIERGE
2 2

(1) 8+N (1)

MAN-460
MAN-430 +
+ COA-010 MPD-009
MPD-009 + +
+ CMO-010 CMO-010
2 CMO-010 +
CEM-001

ABR-001
(2)

204
 205
CC2 CONECTOR - COLORS
RED
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 GREY
(1) Use separate cable hose
Call Call
TEL-001 TEL-001
ALA-040
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
230 V V
(1) 230 V
STANDARD INSTALLATION WITH CONCIERGE UNIT

Call Call
Point of entry Concierge
J1
ALA-040
GRF-203 GRF-206
Made in Spain Made in Spain
20
J1 J2 J1 J2
230 V V
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 2114 13 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
(1)
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM

CC2
230 V
WIRED DIAGRAM
ABR-001
Calls
(1) Use separate cable hose
Calls
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY WITH CON-
CIERGE UNIT
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry, controlled by a concierge.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
One of the entrance panels must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed). The panels of the other
points of entry must be configured as secondary panels (remove the J1 jumper from audio units).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

5 5
SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 50 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Up to 25 metres

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
TEL-001 TEL-001
Up to 100 metres
LAST FLOOR
1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18 5 5
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Use separate cable hose

(2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
(3) Section according to the number
of telephones in the dwelling

TEL-001 TEL-001
GROUND FLOOR

ALA-040 (230 V ) ALA-040 (230 V ) ALA-040 (230 V )

4+N

230 V V
NEXT 230 V V
POINT OF 230 V V
POINT OF 230 V V

POINT OF ENTRY ENTRY 2 ENTRY 1 CONCIERGE

2 2 2

8+N (1) 8+N (1) 8+N (1)

MAN-460
MAN-430 MAN-430 +
+ + COA-010 MPD-009
MPD-009 MPD-009 + +
+ + CMO-010 CMO-010
2 CMO-010 2 CMO-010 +
CEM-001

ABR-001 ABR-001
(2) (2)

206
 207
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY WITH

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
CC2 CONECTOR - COLORS
RED
GREY
Call Call
TEL-001 TEL-001
ALA-040
(1) Use separate cable hose
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
230 V V
(1) 230 V
Call Call
Next
Point of entry
Point of entry 2 Point of entry 1
Secondary entrance panel Main entrance panel Concierge
J1
J1
ALA-040 ALA-040
GRF-203 GRF-203 GRF-206
Made in Spain Made in Spain Made in Spain
20
J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2
230 V V 230 V V
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 2114 13 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
(1) (1)
CC2
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM

230 V 230 V
CONCIERGE UNIT Next ABR-001 ABR-001
Point of entry

WIRED DIAGRAM
Calls Calls Calls
Calls
DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS. BUZZING CALL.
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
STANDARD INSTALLATION. BUZZING CALL
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for door entry installations with buzzing call in buildings with a single point of entry.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

5 5

TUN-001 TUN-001
LAST FLOOR

5 5

TUN-001 TUN-001
GROUND FLOOR
4+N
ALA-040 (230 V ) SECTION TABLE
POINT
OF ENTRY AWG
Up to 50 metres
2
230 V V
MAN-451 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
+
Up to 25 metres
MPD-004
+ 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
2 CMO-004
(1) Up to 100 metres
1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Use separate cable hose

(2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
ABR-001 (3) Section according to the number
(2) of telephones in the dwelling

208
STANDARD INSTALLATION. BUZZING CALL
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
WIRED DIAGRAM

TUN-001 TUN-001
J1 J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

Call Call

TUN-001 TUN-001
J1 J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

Call Call

Point of entry
ALA-040 Entrance panel

GRF-205

Made in Spain
230 V V~
3 2 J2

V~ 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8
230 V (1)

ABR-001
Calls
(1) Use separate cable hose

209
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY. BUZZING CALL
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for door entry installations with buzzing call in buildings with several points of entry.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
One of the entrance panels must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed). The panels of the other
points of entry must be configured as secondary panels (remove the J1 jumper from audio units).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

5 5

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 50 metres
TUN-001 TUN-001 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
LAST FLOOR Up to 25 metres

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
Up to 100 metres
1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
5 5 2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Use separate cable hose

(2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
(3) Section according to the number
TUN-001 TUN-001 of telephones in the dwelling
GROUND FLOOR

ALA-040 (230 V ) 4+N ALA-040 (230 V )

POINT OF POINT OF NEXT

230 V V
ENTRY 1 ENTRY 2 230 V V
POINT OF ENTRY 230 V V

(1)
2 2
6+N 6+N
(1)
2 MAN-430 MAN-430 2
+ +
AAL-001 AAL-001
+ +
MPD-004 MPD-004
+ +
CMO-004 CMO-004

ABR-001 ABR-001
(2) (2)

210
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY. BUZZING CALL

211
TUN-001 TUN-001
J1 J1
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
Call Call
TUN-001 TUN-001
J1 J1
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
Call Call
Point of entry 1 Point of entry 2
Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel
J1 J1 Next
Point of entry
GRF-203 GRF-203
Made in Spain Made in Spain
J1 J2 J1 J2
AAL-001 AAL-001
AAL-001 AAL-001
Cod.9730005 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 Cod.9730005
IN OUT IN OUT
Made in Spain Made in Spain
V V 2 7 8 16 17 V V 2 7 8 16 17
ALA-040
ALA-040
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM

230 V V
230 V V
230 V 230 V
(1)
(1)
Next
Point of entry

WIRED DIAGRAM
ABR-001 Calls ABR-001
(1) Use separate cable hose Calls
Note: Make the same connections
at all the secondary entrance panels
HOUSING ESTATE WITH 3 BUILDINGS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE).
BUZZING CALL
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for door entry installations with buzzing call in housing estates with 3 buildings, each building has a
point of entry, and one external point of entry or gate used by all 3 buildings.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
The entrance panels of the external point of entry must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed).
The panels of the interior points of entry must be configured as secondary panels (remove the J1 jumper from audio units).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3

5 5 5 5 5 5

TUN-001 TUN-001 TUN-001 TUN-001 TUN-001 TUN-001

LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR

5 5 5 5 5 5

TUN-001 TUN-001 TUN-001 TUN-001 TUN-001 TUN-001

GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR

ALA-040 (230 V ) 4+N ALA-040 (230 V ) 4+N ALA-040 (230 V ) 4+N

POINT POINT POINT

230 V V
OF ENTRY 230 V V
OF ENTRY 230 V V
OF ENTRY

2 MAN-430 2 MAN-430 2 MAN-430

+ + +
AAL-001 AAL-001 AAL-001
(1) + (1) + (1) +
2 MPD-004 2 MPD-004 2 MPD-004
+ + +
CMO-004 CMO-004 CMO-004

ABR-001 ABR-001 ABR-001

(2) (2) (2)
6+N 6+N 6+N

ALA-040 (230 V )
SECTION TABLE
AWG
230 V V
Up to 50 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2
Up to 25 metres
(1) 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
2
Up to 100 metres
2
1 0.25 mm 0.6 mm 22
MAN-430 x 3 2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
+ (3) 2
AAL-001 x 3 3 0.75 mm 1.0 mm 18
+ 4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
MPD-004 x 3
+ (1) Use separate cable hose
CMO-004 x 3
ABR-001 + (2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
(2) CEM-001 x 2 (3) Section according to the number
of telephones in the dwelling
212 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY
HOUSING ESTATE WITH 3 BUILDINGS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE).
BUZZING CALL
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY

BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2
Interior point of entry Interior point of entry

External point of entry External point of entry

Main entrance panel Main entrance panel
J1 J1

GRF-203 GRF-203

Made in Spain Made in Spain

J1 J2 J1 J2
AAL-001 AAL-001
AAL-001 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 AAL-001
Cod.9730005 Cod.9730005

IN OUT IN OUT
Made in Spain Made in Spain
V V 2 7 8 16 17 V V 2 7 8 16 17

ALA-040 ALA-040

230 V V 230 V V

Calls Calls 230 V

230 V
(1) BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2
Interior Interior
point of entry point of entry (1)

ABR-001 ABR-001

(1) Use separate cable hose

213
 BUILDING 3
Interior point of entry

External point of entry

Main entrance panel
J1
GRF-203

Made in Spain

J1 J2
AAL-001 ALA-040
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 AAL-001
Cod.9730005

IN OUT
Made in Spain
V V 2 7 8 16 17
230 V V

230 V

(1)

Calls
BUILDING 3
Interior
point of entry

ABR-001

(1) Use separate cable hose

214
HOUSING ESTATE WITH 3 BUILDINGS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE).

215
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
TUN-001 TUN-001 TUN-001
J1
1 2 3 4 5 6
Call Call Call
Interior point of entry. Building 1
J1 Secondary entrance panel
GRF-203
Made in Spain
AAL-001 J1 J2 J1 J1
AAL-001
Cod.9730005 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 Interior point of entry Interior point of entry
Building 2 Building 3
IN OUT
V V 2 7 8 16 17
Made in Spain Secondary Secondary
entrance panel entrance panel
ALA-040 (230 V ) MAN-430 ALA-040 (230 V ) MAN-430
+ +
AAL-001 AAL-001
ALA-040 + +
MPD-004 MPD-004
230 V V
(1) + 230 V V
(1) +
CMO-004 CMO-004
230 V V
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM

230 V
(1)
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE BUILDINGS
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
External External External
point of entry ABR-001 point of entry ABR-001 point of entry
ABR-001
BUZZING CALL Calls Calls Calls
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
(1) Use separate cable hose Calls External point of entry Calls External point of entry Calls External point of entry
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH CONFIDENTIALITY
FEATURE. ELECTRONIC CALL.
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING. CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for door entry installations with confidentiality feature in buildings with a single point of entry.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

5 5

TES-001 TES-001
LAST FLOOR

5 5

TES-001 TES-001
GROUND FLOOR

4+N
ALA-040 (230 V ) POINT SECTION TABLE
OF ENTRY AWG
2 Up to 50 metres
MAN-441 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
230 V V
+
MPD-004 Up to 25 metres
+ 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
2 CMO-004
(1) Up to 100 metres
1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Use separate cable hose

(2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
ABR-001 (3) Section according to the number
(2) of telephones in the dwelling

216
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING. CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
WIRED DIAGRAM

TES-001 TES-001

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Call Call

TES-001 TES-001

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Call Call

J1 Point of entry
ALA-040 Entrance panel

GRF-204

19 Made in Spain

230 V V J1 J2

V~ 9 10 11 12 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
(1)
230 V

ABR-001

Calls
(1) Use separate cable hose

217
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY. CONFIDENTIALITY
FEATURE.
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for door entry installations with confidentiality feature in buildings with several points of entry.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
One of the entrance panels must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed). The panels of the other
points of entry must be configured as secondary panels (remove the J1 jumper from audio units).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

5 5

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 50 metres
TES-001 TES-001 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
LAST FLOOR Up to 25 metres

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
Up to 100 metres
1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
5 5 2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Use separate cable hose

(2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
(3) Section according to the number
TES-001 TES-001 of telephones in the dwelling
GROUND FLOOR

ALA-040 (230 V ) 4+N ALA-040 (230 V )

POINT OF POINT OF NEXT

230 V V
ENTRY 1 ENTRY 2 230 V V
POINT OF ENTRY
(1)
230 V V

2 2
6+N 6+N
(1)
2 MAN-441 MAN-441 2
+ +
MPD-004 MPD-004
+ +
CMO-004 CMO-004

ABR-001 ABR-001
(2) (2)

218
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY. CONFIDENTIALITY
FEATURE.
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
WIRED DIAGRAM
TES-001 TES-001

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Call Call

TES-001 TES-001

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Call Call

Next
Point
of entry

J1 Point of entry 1 J1 Point of entry 2

Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel

ALA-040 ALA-040

GRF-204 GRF-204

19 Made in Spain 19 Made in Spain

J1 J2 J1 J2
230 V V 230 V V

V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
230 V (1) 230 V (1)

Next
Point of entry

ABR-001 ABR-001
Calls

Calls
(1) Use separate cable hose

Note: Make the same connections

at all the secondary entrance panels 219
HOUSING ESTATE WITH 3 BUILDINGS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE).
CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for door entry installations with confidentiality feature in housing estates with 3 buildings, each buil-
ding has a point of entry, and one external point of entry or gate used by all 3 buildings.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
The entrance panels of the external point of entry must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed).
The panels of the interior points of entry must be configured as secondary panels (remove the J1 jumper from audio units).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3

5 5 5 5 5 5

TES-001 TES-001 TES-001 TES-001 TES-001 TES-001

LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR

5 5 5 5 5 5

TES-001 TES-001 TES-001 TES-001 TES-001 TES-001

GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR

ALA-040 (230 V ) 4+N ALA-040 (230 V ) 4+N ALA-040 (230 V ) 4+N

POINT POINT POINT

230 V V
OF ENTRY 230 V V
OF ENTRY 230 V V
OF ENTRY

2 MAN-441 2 MAN-441 2 MAN-441

+ + +
(1) MPD-004 (1) MPD-004 (1) MPD-004
2 + 2 + 2 +
CMO-004 CMO-004 CMO-004

ABR-001 ABR-001 ABR-001

(2) (2) (2)
6+N 6+N 6+N

ALA-040 (230 V )
SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 50 metres
230 V V

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

2 Up to 25 metres

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(1) Up to 100 metres
2
1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
MAN-441 x 3 (3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
+
MPD-004 x 3 4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
+
CMO-004 x 3 (1) Use separate cable hose
+
CEM-001 x 2 (2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
ABR-001
220 (2)
(3) Section according to the number
of telephones in the dwelling
EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY
HOUSING ESTATE WITH 3 BUILDINGS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE).

221
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
Interior point of entry Interior point of entry Interior point of entry
J1 External point of entry J1 External point of entry J1 External point of entry
Main entrance panel Main entrance panel Main entrance panel
GRF-204 GRF-204 GRF-204
ALA-040
19 Made in Spain
19 Made in Spain
19 Made in Spain
J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
230 V V
230 V
(1) (1) (1)
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM

Calls Calls Calls

CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE

BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3

Interior point Interior point Interior point
of entry of entry of entry
ABR-001
(1) Use separate cable hose
HOUSING ESTATE WITH 3 BUILDINGS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (GATE).

BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3

TES-001
TES-001 TES-001
1 2 3 4 5
Call Call
Call
J1 Interior point of entry. Building 1
Secondary entrance panel
GRF-204 J1 J1
ALA-040 19 Made in Spain
J1 J2 Interior point of entry Interior point of entry
Building 2 Building 3
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 Secondary Secondary
ALA-040 (230 V ) entrance panel ALA-040 (230 V ) entrance panel
230 V V
MAN-441 MAN-441
+ +
(1) MPD-004 MPD-004
230 V + +
230 V V
(1) CMO-004
230 V V
(1) CMO-004
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE

WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE BUILDINGS BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3

External ABR-001 External ABR-001 External
point of entry point of entry point of entry
ABR-001
Calls Calls Calls
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
Calls External point of entry Calls External point of entry Calls External point of entry
(1) Use separate cable hose BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3

222
INSTALLATIONS WITH INTERNAL COMMUNICATION
STANDARD INSTALLATION WITH INTERNAL COMMUNICATION
CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for internal communication installations with electronic call and internal communication channel, with
complete confidentiality, between different points or rooms in the same or in different dwellings.

Remarks
Assigning a extension number to each telephone
A different extension number is assigned to each telephone with internal communication. (See in chapter 5 the adjustment ins-
tructions of telephone for internal communication).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

TIN-001 TIN-001 TIN-001

1 2 3
1 1 2 3
1 1 2 3
4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6
7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9

2 C 0

2
C 0

2
C 0

GCI-001 SECTION TABLE

AWG
Up to 100 metres
230 V I2 I1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

STANDARD INSTALLATION WITH INTERNAL COMMUNICATION

CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM

WIRED DIAGRAM

TIN-001 TIN-001 TIN-001

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6
7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9
C 0 C 0 C 0

1 2 3 4 5 I3 I2 I1 1 2 3 4 5 I3 I2 I1 1 2 3 4 5 I3 I2 I1

GCI-001

230 V I2 I1

230 V

223
STANDARD ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATION IN DETACHED HOUSE
WITH INTERNAL COMMUNICATION BETWEEN TELEPHONES
CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for electronic door entry system with electronic call in detached houses with a single point of entry where
the possibility of internal communication is required between a number of telephones in the house. Characteristics of the internal
communication: electronic call and and internal communication channel, with complete confidentiality.

Remarks
Assigning a extension number to each telephone
A different extension number is assigned to each telephone with internal communication. (See in chapter 5 the adjustment ins-
tructions of telephone for internal communication).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

TIN-001 TIN-001 TIN-001

5 5

1 2 3
1 1 2 3
1 1 2 3
4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6
7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9

2 2 2
C 0 C 0 C 0

SECTION TABLE
2 AWG
Up to 50 metres
ALA-040 (230 V ) GCI-001
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
5
Up to 25 metres

230 V V
POINT 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
230 V I2 I1

OF ENTRY Up to 100 metres

2
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
MAN-410
(1) 2 + 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
MPS-001
+ 1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
CMO-002 2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
ABR-001
(2) (1) Use separate cable hose
(2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
(3) Section according to the number
of telephones in the dwelling

224
STANDARD ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATION IN DETACHED HOUSE
WITH INTERNAL COMMUNICATION BETWEEN TELEPHONES
CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM

WIRED DIAGRAM

TIN-001 TIN-001 TIN-001

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6
7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9
C 0 C 0 C 0

1 2 3 4 5 I3 I2 I1 1 2 3 4 5 I3 I2 I1 1 2 3 4 5 I3 I2 I1

Call

GCI-001

Point of entry
ALA-040 Entrance panel 230 V I2 I1

GRF-201 230 V
Made in Spain

230 V V
3 2 J2

V~ 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 7

230 V

(1)

Call
ABR-001 (1) Use separate cable hose

225
STANDARD ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH
INTERNAL COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE TELEPHONES IN ONE OF THE
DWELLINGS
CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for electronic door entry system with electronic call in buildings with a single point of entry where the
possibility of internal communication is required between the telephones of one dwelling. Characteristics of the internal communi-
cation: electronic call and and internal communication channel, with complete confidentiality.

Remarks
Assigning a extension number to each telephone
A different extension number is assigned to each telephone with internal communication. (See in chapter 5 the adjustment ins-
tructions of telephone for internal communication).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

TEL-001
LAST FLOOR

5 5 1
4
2
5
3
6
5 1
4
2
5
3
6
7 8 9 7 8 9
C 0 C 0

2 2

TIN-001 TIN-001

TEL-001
GROUND FLOOR

SECTION TABLE
AWG
ALA-040 (230 V ) Up to 50 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
4+N 2
Up to 25 metres
230 V V

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
POINT
OF ENTRY Up to 100 metres
2
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) 230 V I2 I1
0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22

2 1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
GCI-001
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
MAN-410
+ 4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
MPD-004
+ (1) Use separate cable hose
ABR-001 CMO-004 (2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
(2)
(3) Section according to the number
of telephones in the dwelling

226
STANDARD ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH
INTERNAL COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE TELEPHONES IN ONE OF THE
DWELLINGS
CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM

WIRED DIAGRAM
TEL-001 TEL-001

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Call Call

TIN-001

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0

1 2 3 4 5 I3 I2 I1 1 2 3 4 5 I3 I2 I1

Call

Point of entry
Entrance panel

ALA-040
GCI-001
GRF-201

Made in Spain

3 2 J2
230 V V

V~ 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 7
230 V 230 V I2 I1

230 V
(1)

ABR-001

(1) Use separate cable hose Calls

227
ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS
OF ENTRY WITH INTERNAL COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE TELEPHONES IN
ONE OF THE DWELLINGS
CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for electronic door entry system with electronic call in buildings with several points of entry where the
possibility of internal communication is required between the telephones of one dwelling. Characteristics of the internal communi-
cation: electronic call and and internal communication channel, with complete confidentiality.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
One of the entrance panels must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed). The panels of the other
points of entry must be configured as secondary panels (remove the J1 jumper from audio units).
Assigning a extension number to each telephone
A different extension number is assigned to each telephone with internal communication. (See in chapter 5 the adjustment ins-
tructions of telephone for internal communication).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
5
AWG
Up to 50 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Up to 25 metres

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
Up to 100 metres
TEL-001 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
LAST FLOOR 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22

1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
1
(3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
5 5 1 2 3
5 1 2 3

4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
4 5 6 4 5 6
7 8 9 7 8 9
C 0 C 0

2 2
(1) Use separate cable hose
(2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
(3) Section according to the number
of telephones in the dwelling
TIN-001 TIN-001

TEL-001
GROUND FLOOR
2
GCI-001

230 V I2 I1

ALA-040 (230 V ) ALA-040 (230 V )

4+N

230 V V
POINT OF 230 V V
POINT OF 230 V
NEXT
ENTRY 1 ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY
2 2

(1) 6+N (1) 6+N

2 2

MAN-430 MAN-430
+ +
MPD-004 MPD-004
+ +
CMO-004 CMO-004
ABR-001 ABR-001
(2) (2)

228
ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF
ENTRY WITH INTERNAL COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE TELEPHONES IN ONE OF
THE DWELLINGS
CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM

WIRED DIAGRAM

TEL-001 TEL-001

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Call Call
TIN-001

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0

1 2 3 4 5 I3 I2 I1 1 2 3 4 5 I3 I2 I1

GCI-001

230 V I2 I1

Call
230 V

Next
point of entry

J1 Point of entry 1 J1 Point of entry 2

Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel

ALA-040 ALA-040

GRF-203 GRF-203

Made in Spain Made in Spain

J1 J2 J1 J2
230 V V 230 V V

V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
230 V 230 V

(1) (1)

Next
point of entry

ABR-001 Calls ABR-001

Calls
(1) Use separate cable hose
Note: Make the same connections
at all the secondary entrance panels
229
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS. ELECTRONIC CALL
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+COAXIAL SYSTEM
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+COAXIAL SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for conventional video door entry installations in buildings with a single point of entry.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

5
DIV-024

MVB-001
MVC-001
+ COAX
SCM-010
LAST FLOOR

5
DIV-024

MVB-001
MVC-001
+ SECTION TABLE
SCM-010
AWG
GROUND FLOOR
Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
ALM-040 (230 V ) 2 4+N
COAX 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
Up to 100 metres
230 V V
POINT OF ENTRY
COAXIAL 75 Ω
2 MDN-441
MDN-442 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
ALA-040 (230 V ) +
MPS-004 1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
+ 2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
CMO-006 (3)
230 V V 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
2
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2

(1) (1) Use separate cable hose

(2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
ABR-001
(2) (3) Section according to the number
of devices in the dwelling

230
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+COAXIAL SYSTEM
WIRED DIAGRAM

B J1 DIV-024 75 Ohm

R1
M M
V1
M M
M
V1

24
25
26
27
28

1 2 3 4 5

Call
SCM-010

B J1 DIV-024

R1
M M
V1
M
M
V1

24
25
26
27
28

1 2 3 4 5

75 Ohm
Point of entry
Call Entrance panel
SCM-010

V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4

White
19 + _
TCB-011
J1 TCB-011
TCB-021

GRF-204

ALA-040 ALM-040 19 Made in Spain

Red J1 J2

GRF-204

V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

230 V V~ 230 V V~

230 V 230 V

(1)

(1) Use separate cable hose ABR-001

Calls

231
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING: DISTRIBUTION IN 3 COLUMNS
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+COAXIAL SYSTEM

Standard wiring diagram for conventional video door entry installations in buildings with a single point of entry, with three sepa-
rate risers or staircases.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

5 DIV-024 5 DIV-024 5 DIV-024

2 2 2

MVB-001 MVB-001 MVB-001

MVC-001 MVC-001 MVC-001
+ COAX + COAX + COAX
SCM-010 SCM-010 SCM-010
LAST FLOOR

5 5 5
DIV-024 DIV-024 DIV-024

2 2 2

MVB-001 MVB-001 MVB-001

MVC-001 MVC-001 MVC-001
+ + +
SCM-010 SCM-010 SCM-010
GROUND FLOOR

DIV-124
COAX COAX COAX
ALM-040 (230 V )

2
230 V V
2

2 4+N
COAX
POINT SECTION TABLE
ALA-040 (230 V ) OF ENTRY AWG
Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
230 V V
2
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
2
Up to 100 metres
MDN-441 COAXIAL 75 Ω
(1) MDN-442
+ 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
MPD-004 ABR-001
+ (2) 1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
CMO-006 2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Use separate cable hose

(2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
(3) Section according to the number
of devices in the dwelling

232
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING: DISTRIBUTION IN 3 COLUMNS
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+COAXIAL SYSTEM
WIRED DIAGRAM

DIV-024 75 Ohm
B J1

R1
M M
DIV-024 DIV-024
V1
M M
M
V1
SCM-010 SCM-010
24
25
26
27
28

1 2 3 4 5

Call
SCM-010
SCM-010 SCM-010

B J1 DIV-024

DIV-024 DIV-024
R1
M M
V1
M
M
DIV-124
V1
P1

24
25
26 M 15V M
27
28

1 2 3 4 5

Call
SCM-010
75 Ohm Point of entry
Entrance panel
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4

White 19
+ _ TCB-011
TCB-021
TCB-011
J1
GRF-204
ALM-040
19 Made in Spain

Red J1 J2
GRF-204

V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
230 V V~

230 V

ALA-040

230 V V~

230 V
(1) ABR-001

(1) Use separate cable hose

Calls

233
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+COAXIAL SYSTEM

Standard wiring diagram for conventional video door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry, each equip-
ped with the video system.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
One of the entrance panels must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed). The panels of the other
points of entry must be configured as secondary panels (remove the J1 jumper from audio units).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

5 DIV-024 SECTION TABLE

AWG
Up to 25 metres
2
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
MVB-001 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
MVC-001
+ COAX Up to 100 metres
SCM-010 COAXIAL 75 Ω
LAST FLOOR 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
5
DIV-024
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

2 (1) Use separate cable hose

(2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
MVB-001 (3) Section according to the number
MVC-001 of devices in the dwelling
+
SCM-010
GROUND FLOOR

ALM-040 (230 V ) 2 4+N ALM-040 (230 V ) ALA-040 (230 V )

COAX
230 V V

POINT OF POINT OF 230 V V 230 V V

NEXT
2
ENTRY 1 ENTRY 2 POINT OF ENTRY
2 2
(1)
2
COAX COAX
ALA-040 (230 V )
6+N 6+N
2 2
230 V V

2 MDN-441 MDN-441
MDN-442 MDN-442
(1) + +
MPS-004 MPS-004
+ ABR-001 ABR-001
(2) + (2)
CMO-006 CMO-006

234
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+COAXIAL SYSTEM
WIRED DIAGRAM

75 Ohm
B J1 DIV-024

R1
M M
V1
M M
M
V1

24
25
26
27
28

1 2 3 4 5

SCM-010
Call

DIV-024
B J1

R1
M M
V1
M
M
V1

24
25
26
27
28

1 2 3 4 5

Point of entry 1 ALM-040 Point of entry 2

75 Ohm
Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel
SCM-010
Call
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4 230 V V~ V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
White 19
+ White White
19 19
+ _ 230 V + _
TCB-011
TCB-021
TCB-011
TCB-021
TCB-011 TCB-011

Red
19
Next
Point of entry
ALM-040 19
J1
Made in Spain
White 19
19 Made in Spain
J1
+
Red J1 J2
Red J1 J2
GRF-204 GRF-204

V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
19

230 V V~ Red

Next
230 V Point of entry

ALA-040 ALA-040

230 V V~ 230 V V~

ABR-001
230 V
230 V ABR-001 Next
(1) (1) Point of entry
(1) Use separate cable hose
Calls
Calls
Note: Make the same connections
at all the secondary entrance panels
235
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH 2 POINTS OF ENTRY:
1 WITH VIDEO, 1 WITH AUDIO
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+COAXIAL SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for conventional video door entry installations in buildings with two points of entry; one equipped with
a video system, the other with an audio system.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
Configure the entrance panel with the video system as the main panel (J1 jumper inserted). This panel will be the one which
becomes active when the auto switch-on feature is activated from the monitor in the dwelling. The panel at the other point of entry
must be configured as the secondary panel (with the J1 jumper removed from its audio unit).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

5 DIV-024
SECTION TABLE
AWG
2 Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
MVB-001
MVC-001 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
+ COAX
SCM-010 Up to 100 metres

COAXIAL 75 Ω
LAST FLOOR
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
5
DIV-024 (3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

2
(1) Use separate cable hose
(2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
MVB-001
MVC-001 (3) Section according to the number
+ of devices in the dwelling
SCM-010
GROUND FLOOR

ALM-040 (230 V ) 2 4+N

COAX
ALA-040 (230 V )
230 V V

POINT OF
2 ENTRY 1
POINT OF
2
230 V V

ENTRY 2
6+N 2
ALA-040 (230 V )
(1)
2 2
230 V V

2 MDN-441 MAN-441
MDN-442 +
(1) + MPS-004
MPS-004 ABR-001 + ABR-001
+ (2) CMO-004 (2)
CMO-006

236
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH 2 POINTS OF ENTRY:
1 WITH VIDEO, 1 WITH AUDIO
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+COAXIAL SYSTEM
WIRED DIAGRAM

75 Ohm
B J1 DIV-024

R1
M M
V1
M M
M
V1

24
25
26
27
28

1 2 3 4 5

SCM-010
Call

B J1 DIV-024

R1
M M
V1
M
M
V1

24
25
26
27
28

1 2 3 4 5

75 Ohm
Point of entry 1
Main entrance panel
SCM-010
Call
V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4

White
Point of entry 2
19 White Secondary entrance panel
+ 19 + _ TCB-011
TCB-021
TCB-011

GRF-204
19

Red J1 J1
19 Made in Spain
19 Made in Spain

ALM-040 Red J1 J2 J1 J2
GRF-204

V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

230 V V~

230 V
ALA-040 ALA-040

230 V V~ 230 V V~

ABR-001 230 V ABR-001

230 V (1) (1)

(1) Use separate cable hose

Calls
Calls

237
HOUSING ESTATE WITH 3 BUILDINGS WITH VIDEO. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF
ENTRY (GATE) WITH AUDIO
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+COAXIAL SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for conventional video door entry installations in housing estates with 3 buildings, each building has
a point of entry with video system, and one external point of entry or gate used by all 3 buildings, with audio system.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
The entrance panels of the external point of entry must be configured as secondary panels (remove the J1 jumper from audio
units). The panels of the interior points of entry must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed). These
panels will be which become active when the auto switch-on feature is activated from the monitor of the dwelling in each building.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3

5 DIV-024 5 DIV-024 5 DIV-024

2 2 2

MVB-001 MVB-001 MVB-001

MVC-001 MVC-001 MVC-001
+ COAX + COAX + COAX
SCM-010 SCM-010 SCM-010
LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR

5 5 5
DIV-024 DIV-024 DIV-024

2 2 2

MVB-001 MVB-001 MVB-001

MVC-001 MVC-001 MVC-001
+ + +
SCM-010 SCM-010 SCM-010
GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR

ALM-040 (230 V ) 2 4+N ALM-040 (230 V ) 2 4+N ALM-040 (230 V ) 2 4+N

COAX COAX COAX
230 V V 230 V V 230 V V

POINT POINT POINT

2 2 2
OF ENTRY OF ENTRY OF ENTRY
2 MDN-441 2 MDN-441 2 MDN-441
MDN-442 MDN-442 MDN-442
+ + +
MPS-004 MPS-004 MPS-004
ALA-040 (230 V ) + ALA-040 (230 V ) + ALA-040 (230 V ) +
CMO-006 CMO-006 CMO-006
2 2 2
230 V V 230 V V 230 V V

2 2 2

(1) (1) (1)

ABR-001 ABR-001 ABR-001

(2) (2) (2)
6+N
6+N 6+N

ALA-040 (230 V ) SECTION TABLE

AWG
Up to 25 metres
230 V V
2
1 mm 1.1 mm 17
2
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(1) Up to 100 metres
2
COAXIAL 75 Ω

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
MAN-441 x 3
+ 1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
MPS-004 x 3 2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
+ (3)
CMO-004 x 3 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
ABR-001 +
(2) 4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
CEM-001 x 2
(1) Use separate cable hose
EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY (2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
(3) Section according to the number
238 of devices in the dwelling
 239
HOUSING ESTATE WITH 3 BUILDINGS WITH VIDEO. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF

BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3

Interior point of entry Interior point of entry Interior point of entry
J1 External point of entry J1 External point of entry J1 External point of entry
Secondary entrance panel Secondary entrance panel Secondary entrance panel
GRF-204 GRF-204 GRF-204
ALA-040
19 Made in Spain
19 Made in Spain
19 Made in Spain
J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
230 V V
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+COAXIAL SYSTEM

230 V
(1) (1) (1)
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY

Calls Calls Calls

BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
Interior point Interior point Interior point
ENTRY (GATE) WITH AUDIO

of entry of entry of entry

ABR-001
(1) Use separate cable hose
HOUSING ESTATE WITH 3 BUILDINGS WITH VIDEO. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF

BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3

B J1 DIV-024
R1 B J1 B J1
M M
V1 DIV-024 DIV-024
M
M R1 R1
V1
24
25
26
27
28
1 2 3 4 5 SCM-010 SCM-010
75 Ohm
Interior point of entry
Building 1
SCM-010 Main entrance panel Call Call
Call
White 19 V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
+
White 19 + _
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+COAXIAL SYSTEM

TCB-011
TCB-011
TCB-021 Interior point of entry Interior point of entry
Red
19
J1 Building 2 Building 3
cod. 9610015
Main entrance panel Main entrance panel
ALM-040 19 Made in Spain
Red J1 J2 J1 J1
GRF-204 ALM-040 ALM-040
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
230 V V~
230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V 230 V
ENTRY (GATE) WITH AUDIO

ALA-040
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE BUILDINGS
ALA-040 ALA-040
MDN-441 MDN-441
230 V V~ MDN-442 MDN-442
230 V V~ + 230 V V~ +
ABR-001 MPS-004 ABR-001 BUILDING 2 MPS-004 ABR-001 BUILDING 3
BUILDING 1 + External + External
230 V CMO-006 point of entry CMO-006 point of entry
(1) External
point of entry 230 V 230 V
(1) (1)
Calls Calls Calls
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
(1) Use separate cable hose Calls External point of entry Calls External point of entry Calls External point of entry
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3

240
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS. ELECTRONIC CALL
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+TWISTED PAIR SYSTEM
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+ TWISTED PAIR SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for conventional video door entry installations in buildings with a single point of entry.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

<50m
5 DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

MVB-001
MVC-001 TWISTED
+ PAIR
SCM-020
LAST FLOOR

<50m
5
DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

MVB-001
MVC-001
+
SCM-020 SECTION TABLE
GROUND FLOOR AWG
Up to 25 metres
ALM-040 (230 V ) 2 4+N 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
TWISTED PAIR
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
230 V V
Up to 100 metres
2 POINT OF ENTRY
UTP CAT 5E
MDN-444
1 MDN-445 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
+
ALA-040 (230 V ) MPD-004 1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
+ 2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
CMO-006 (3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
230 V V
2
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2
(1) Use separate cable hose
(1) (2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
ABR-001 (3) Section according to the number
(2) of devices in the dwelling

241
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+ TWISTED PAIR SYSTEM
WIRED DIAGRAM

B J1 T1+ DIV-034
T1 DIV-034
T1 cod.9730015

T1+
R1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
24
25
26
27

1 2 3 4 5
120 Ohm
SCM-020

Call DIV-034
B J1 T1+
DIV-034
T1 cod.9730015
T1
T1+
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
R1
24
25
26
27

1 2 3 4 5

SCM-020

Call
ALM-040 2x220 Ohm Point of entry
Entrance panel

T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+

230 V V~

19
230 V 19 JJ1
1 TCB-040
TCB-050

ALA-040
cod. 9610001

19 Made in Spain

J1 J2

GRF-204
230 V V~ V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

230 V
(1)

ABR-001
Calls
(1) Use separate cable hose

242
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING: DISTRIBUTION IN 3 COLUMNS
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+ TWISTED PAIR SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for conventional video door entry installations in buildings with a single point of entry, with three sepa-
rate risers or staircases.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
The entrance panel of the building must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

<50m <50m <50m

5 5 5
DIV-034 DIV-034 DIV-034
DIV-034 DIV-034 DIV-034
cod.9730015 cod.9730015 cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 2 2

MVB-001 MVB-001 MVB-001

MVC-001 MVC-001 MVC-001
+ + +
SCM-020 SCM-020 SCM-020
LAST FLOOR

<50m <50m <50m

5 5 5
DIV-034 DIV-034 DIV-034
DIV-034 DIV-034 DIV-034
cod.9730015 cod.9730015 cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 2 2

MVB-001 MVB-001 MVB-001

MVC-001 MVC-001 MVC-001
+ + +
SCM-020 SCM-020 SCM-020
GROUND FLOOR

ALM-040 (230 V )
TWISTED PAIR TWISTED PAIR TWISTED PAIR

230 V V
2 2 2
2

ALA-040 (230 V ) POINT

4+N
OF ENTRY
1
DIV-134
cod.9730016

12 V 15 V
+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
V

230 V V

2 DIV-134
2 SECTION TABLE

(1) AWG
2 TWISTED PAIR Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

MDN-444 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

ABR-001 MDN-445 Up to 100 metres
(2) +
MPD-004 UTP CAT 5E
+
CMO-006 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Use separate cable hose

(2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
(3) Section according to the number
of devices in the dwelling

243
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING: DISTRIBUTION IN 3 COLUMNS
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+ TWISTED PAIR SYSTEM
WIRED DIAGRAM

DIV-034
cod.9730015

120 Ohm
SCM-020

Call
DIV-034
cod.9730015

SCM-020

ALM-040
Call

230 V V~ 2x220 Ohm DIV-134

cod.9730016

230 V

ALA-040
cod. 9610001

Made in Spain

230 V V~

230 V
(1)

ABR-001

Calls
244 (1) Use separate cable hose
 B J1
T1+
T1
T1
R1 T1+

DIV-034 24
DIV-034
cod.9730015
25
26
27
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

SCM-020 1 2 3 4 5

120 Ohm

B J1 T1+
T1
T1
T1+
R1

DIV-034 Call
24
DIV-034
cod.9730015
25
26
27
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

SCM-020 1 2 3 4 5

GRF-204
Audio unit

Call
ALM-040
Power supply unit

DIV-134
Splitter

245
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+ TWISTED PAIR SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for conventional video door entry installations in buildings with several points of entry, each equipped
with the video system.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
One of the entrance panels must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed). The panels of the other
points of entry must be configured as secondary panels (remove the J1 jumper from audio units).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

<50m
5
DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

SECTION TABLE
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 AWG
Up to 25 metres
MVB-001
MVC-001 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
TWISTED
+ PAIR
SCM-020 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
Up to 100 metres
LAST FLOOR
UTP CAT 5E

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

<50m 1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22

5 2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
DIV-034 (3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2
(1) Use separate cable hose
MVB-001 (2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
MVC-001
+ (3) Section according to the number
SCM-020 of devices in the dwelling
GROUND FLOOR

ALM-040 (230 V ) 2 4+N

TWISTED PAIR ALA-040 (230 V )
230 V V POINT OF POINT OF NEXT
2 ENTRY 1 ENTRY 2 V
POINT OF ENTRY
230 V

1 (1)
2
ALA-040 (230 V ) 6+N 6+N

TWISTED PAIR TWISTED PAIR

230 V V 2 2

2
MDN-444 MDN-444
MDN-445 MDN-445
(1) + +
MPD-004 ABR-001 MPD-004 ABR-001
+ (2) + (2)
CMO-006 CMO-006

246
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+ TWISTED PAIR SYSTEM
WIRED DIAGRAM

DIV-034
T1+
DIV-034 T1
cod.9730015

B J1 T1
T1+
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

24
R1 25
26
27

120 Ohm
SCM-020 1 2 3 4 5
Call
T1+
DIV-034
cod.9730015 T1
T1
B J1 T1+
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
ALM-040
24
25
R1 26
DIV-034 27

230 V V~

SCM-020 1 2 3 4 5
Call
230 V

Next
Point of entry
Point of entry 1 ALA-040 Point of entry 2
Main entrance panel Secondary entrance panel

220 Ohm

T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+ T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+
ALA-040 230 V V~

19 TCB-040 19 TCB-040
19 JJ11J 1 TCB-050 19 J1 J1 TCB-050

230 V V~
cod. 9610001

19 Made in Spain
19 Made in Spain

Next
J1 J2 J1 J2
230 V Point of entry
GRF-204 GRF-204
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
(1)

(1) 230 V

Next
Point of entry

ABR-001 ABR-001
Calls

Calls
(1) Use separate cable hose

Note: Make the same connections

at all the secondary entrance panels

247
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH 2 POINTS OF ENTRY:
1 WITH VIDEO, 1 WITH AUDIO
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+ TWISTED PAIR SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for conventional video door entry installations in buildings with two points of entry; one equipped with
a video system, the other with an audio system.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
Configure the entrance panel with the video system as the main panel (J1 jumper inserted). This panel will be the one which beco-
mes active when the auto switch-on feature is activated from the monitor in the dwelling. The panel at the other point of entry must
be configured as the secondary panel (with the J1 jumper removed from its audio unit).

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

<50m
5
DIV-034
DIV-034
cod.9730015

SECTION TABLE
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 AWG
Up to 25 metres
MVB-001
MVC-001 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
+ TWISTED
SCM-020 PAIR 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
Up to 100 metres
LAST FLOOR
UTP CAT 5E

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

<50m 1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22

5 2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
DIV-034 (3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2
(1) Use separate cable hose
MVB-001 (2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
MVC-001
+ (3) Section according to the number
SCM-020 of devices in the dwelling
GROUND FLOOR

ALM-040 (230 V ) 2 4+N

TWISTED PAIR ALA-040 (230 V )
230 V V POINT OF
2 ENTRY 1
POINT OF 230 V V

ENTRY 2
1
6+N 2
ALA-040 (230 V )
(1)

230 V V 2 2

2
MDN-444 MAN-441
MDN-445 +
(1) + MPD-004
MPD-004 ABR-001 + ABR-001
+ (2) CMO-004 (2)
CMO-006

248
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH 2 POINTS OF ENTRY:
1 WITH VIDEO, 1 WITH AUDIO
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+ TWISTED PAIR SYSTEM
WIRED DIAGRAM

DIV-034
T1+
DIV-034 T1
cod.9730015

B J1 T1
T1+
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

24
R1 25
26
27

120 Ohm
SCM-020 1 2 3 4 5

DIV-034
T1+ Call
cod.9730015 T1
T1
B J1 T1+
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

24
25
R1 26
DIV-034 27
ALM-040

SCM-020 1 2 3 4 5

230 V V~
Call

230 V

Point of entry 1
Main entrance panel
220 Ohm

T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+

ALA-040 ALA-040
Point of entry 2
Secondary entrance panel
19 TCB-040
19 J 1J 1
J1 TCB-050

230 V V~
cod. 9610001
230 V V~
J1
19 Made in Spain
19 Made in Spain

J1 J2 J1 J2
230 V
GRF-204 GRF-204
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
(1)

230 V
(1)

ABR-001 ABR-001
Calls

Calls
(1) Use separate cable hose

249
HOUSING ESTATE WITH 3 BUILDINGS WITH VIDEO. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF
ENTRY (GATE) WITH AUDIO
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+ TWISTED PAIR SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for conventional video door entry installations in housing estates with 3 buildings, each building has a
point of entry with video system, and one external point of entry or gate used by all 3 buildings, with audio system.

Remarks
Determining the main entrance panel
The entrance panels of the external point of entry must be configured as secondary panels (remove the J1 jumper from audio
units). The panels of the interior points of entry must be configured as the main panel (audio unit with J1 jumper installed). These
panels will be which become active when the auto switch-on feature is activated from the monitor of the dwelling in each building.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3

<50m <50m <50m
5 5 5
DIV-034 DIV-034 DIV-034
DIV-034 DIV-034 DIV-034
cod.9730015 cod.9730015 cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 2 2

MVB-001 MVB-001 MVB-001

MVC-001 MVC-001 MVC-001
+ + +
SCM-020 SCM-020 SCM-020
LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR LAST FLOOR

<50m <50m <50m

5 5 5
DIV-034 DIV-034 DIV-034
DIV-034 DIV-034 DIV-034
cod.9730015 cod.9730015 cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 2 2

MVB-001 MVB-001 MVB-001

MVC-001 MVC-001 MVC-001
+ + +
SCM-020 SCM-020 SCM-020
GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR GROUND FLOOR

ALM-040 (230 V ) 2 4+N ALM-040 (230 V ) 2 4+N ALM-040 (230 V ) 2 4+N

TWISTED PAIR TWISTED PAIR TWISTED PAIR

230 V V POINT 230 V V POINT 230 V V POINT

2 OF ENTRY 2 OF ENTRY 2 OF ENTRY
MDN-444 MDN-444 MDN-444
1 MDN-445 1 MDN-445 1 MDN-445
+ + +
ALA-040 (230 V ) MPS-004 ALA-040 (230 V ) MPS-004 ALA-040 (230 V ) MPS-004
+ + +
CMO-006 CMO-006 CMO-006
230 V V 2 230 V V 2 230 V V 2

2 2 2

(1) ABR-001 (1) ABR-001 (1) ABR-001

(2) (2) (2)

6+N 6+N 6+N

SECTION TABLE
AWG
ALA-040 (230 V ) Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

230 V V 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

2 Up to 100 metres

UTP CAT 5E
(1)
2 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
MAN-441 x 3 (3)
+ 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
MPS-004 x 3 4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
+
ABR-001 CMO-004 x 3
+ (1) Use separate cable hose
(2)
CEM-001 x 2 (2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
(3) Section according to the number
250 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY of devices in the dwelling
 251
HOUSING ESTATE WITH 3 BUILDINGS WITH VIDEO. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF

BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3

Interior point of entry Interior point of entry Interior point of entry
J1 External point of entry J1 External point of entry J1 External point of entry
Secondary entrance panel Secondary entrance panel Secondary entrance panel
GRF-204 GRF-204 GRF-204
ALA-040
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+ TWISTED PAIR SYSTEM

19 Made in Spain
19 Made in Spain
19 Made in Spain
J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18 V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
230 V V
230 V
(1) (1) (1)
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY

Calls Calls Calls

ENTRY (GATE) WITH AUDIO

BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3

Interior point Interior point Interior point
of entry of entry of entry
ABR-001
(1) Use separate cable hose
HOUSING ESTATE WITH 3 BUILDINGS WITH VIDEO. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF

B J1
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
R1 DIV-034
T1+
DIV-034
T1 cod.9730015
T1
T1+
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 B J1 B J1
24
25
26
27 R1 R1
DIV-034 DIV-034
DIV-034 DIV-034
cod.9730015 cod.9730015
1 2 3 4 5
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
SCM-020
Call SCM-020 SCM-020
ALM-040 Interior point of entry
2x220 Ohm Building 1
Main entrance panel
Call Call
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+ TWISTED PAIR SYSTEM

230 V V~
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+
230 V
19 TCB-040
19 J1 TCB-050
Interior point of entry Interior point of entry
ALA-040 J1 Building 2 Building 3
Main entrance panel Main entrance panel
cod. 9610001
19
ALM-040 ALM-040
Made in Spain
J1 J2 J1 J1
GRF-204
230 V V~ V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
230 V V~ 230 V V~
MDN-444 MDN-444
MDN-445 MDN-445
230 V 230 V + 230 V +
(1) MPS-004 MPS-004
+ +
ENTRY (GATE) WITH AUDIO

CMO-006 CMO-006
ALA-040 ALA-040
WIRED DIAGRAM OF THE BUILDINGS
230 V V~ 230 V V~
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
External External External
point of entry 230 V point of entry 230 V point of entry
(1) (1)
Calls Calls Calls
BUILDING 1 BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
ABR-001 ABR-001 ABR-001
Calls External point of entry Calls External point of entry Calls External point of entry
(1) Use separate cable hose BUILDING 2 BUILDING 3
BUILDING 1

252
EXTENSION OF THE INSTALLATIONS
EXTENSION OF THE INSTALLATION WITH TELEPHONES

DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

Use
It is possible to extend the installation in a dwelling by adding telephones, to a maximum of 4 telephones. Each telephone will be
able to receive calls, communicate with the entrance panel and open the street door..

Operation
The electronic call signal is shared by all the telephones. By respecting the sections indicated in this technical manual, it is possi-
ble to install up to 4 telephones.
All the telephones receive the call simultaneously.

DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS. ELECTRONIC CALL

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18 5 5 5
(1)
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Section according to the number

of telephones in the dwelling

TEL-001 TEL-001 TEL-001

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
(1)
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Section according to the number

of telephones in the dwelling

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

TEL-001

253
DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT. ELECTRONIC CALL

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18 5 5 5
(1)
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Section according to the number

of telephones in the dwelling

TEL-001 TEL-001 TEL-001

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
(1)
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Section according to the number

of telephones in the dwelling

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

TEL-001

DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS. BUZZING CALL

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

(1)
3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18 5 5 5
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Section according to the number

of telephones in the dwelling

TUN-001 TUN-001 TUN-001

254
 WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
(1)
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Section according to the number

of telephones in the dwelling

J1 J1 J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

TUN-001

DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

(1)
3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18 5 5 5
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Section according to the number

of telephones in the dwelling

TES-001 TES-001 TES-001

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
(1)
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Section according to the number

of telephones in the dwelling

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

TES-001

255
DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH INTERNAL COMMUNICATION

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM
SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
(1)
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Section according to the number

of telephones in the dwelling

5 5 5
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
1 1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
1 1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
1
C 0 C 0 C 0

2 2 2

TIN-001 TIN-001 TIN-001

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
(1)
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Section according to the number

of telephones in the dwelling

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
4 5 6 4 5 6 4 5 6
7 8 9 7 8 9 7 8 9
C 0 C 0 C 0

1 2 3 4 5 I3 I2 I1 1 2 3 4 5 I3 I2 I1 1 2 3 4 5 I3 I2 I1

TIN-001 TIN-001 TIN-001

256
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS
Use
It is possible to extend the installation in a dwelling by adding telephones, to a maximum of 4 devices per dwelling (devices are
telephones and monitors). Each telephone will be able to receive calls, communicate with the entrance panel and open the street
door.

Operation
The electronic call signal is shared by all the monitors and telephones. By respecting the sections indicated in this technical manual,
it is possible to install up to 4 devices (devices are telephones and monitors).
All the devices receive the call simultaneously.

CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM 6+N+COAXIAL

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COAXIAL

2
5 5 5 5

TES-001 TES-001 TES-001 SCM-010

+
SECTION TABLE MVB-001
AWG MVC-001
Up to 100 metres

COAXIAL 75 Ω

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
(1)
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Section according to the number

of devices in the dwelling

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
CC1
AWG
A B J1
Up to 100 metres
COAXIAL 75 Ω

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18 R1
(1)
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17 MVB-001 SCM-010 V1
MVC-001 M
(1) Section according to the number M
of devices in the dwelling V1

24
25
26
27
28
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5

TES-001

257
CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM 6+N+TWISTED PAIR

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

TWISTED PAIR

2
5 5 5 5

TES-001 SCM-020
+
SECTION TABLE MVB-001
AWG MVC-001
Up to 100 metres

UTP CAT 5E

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
(1)
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Section according to the number

of devices in the dwelling

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
CC1
AWG J1
A B

Up to 100 metres

UTP CAT 5E

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18 R1
(1) MVB-001
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17 SCM-020 T1+
MVC-001 T1-
(1) Section according to the number T1-
of devices in the dwelling T1+

24
25
26
27
1 2 3 4 5 28
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5

TES-001

258
EXTENSION OF THE INSTALLATION WITH MONITORS
Use
It is possible to extend the installation in a dwelling by adding more monitors, to a maximum of 4. Each monitor will have the
same features as the original monitor: auto switch-on, reception of calls, showing of image on screen, communication with the entran-
ce panel, and door-opening.

Operation
The electronic call signal is shared by all the monitors. By respecting the sections indicated in this technical manual, it is possible
to install up to 4 monitors.
All the monitors receive the call simultaneously.

EXTENSION OF THE INSTALLATION WITH 1 MONITOR

CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM 6+N+COAXIAL

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

INSTALLATION WITH TAP-OFF INSTALLATION WITHOUT TAP-OFF

Second monitor First monitor Second monitor First monitor
DIV-024
COAXIAL COAXIAL COAXIAL COAXIAL

2 2 2 2

5 5 5 5

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALM-040 (230 V )

230 V V
230 V V

2 2

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
COAXIAL 75 Ω

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

259
 WIRED DIAGRAM

INSTALLATION WITH TAP-OFF

Second monitor First monitor

A B
CC1
J1
B J1 A B
CC1
J1
B J1
75 Ohm

R1 SCM-010 R1 SCM-010
V1 V1
M M
M M
M M M

V1 V1 DIV-024

24 24
25 25
26 26
27 27
28 28

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

ALM-040

230 V V~

230 V
75 Ohm

INSTALLATION WITHOUT TAP-OFF V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4

TCB-011
A J1 A J1 TCB-021
TCB-011

GRF-204

R1 R1 Made in Spain

J2

V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
SCM-010 SCM-010

260
CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM 6+N+TWISTED PAIR

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

INSTALLATION WITH TAP-OFF INSTALLATION WITHOUT TAP-OFF

Second monitor TWISTED First monitor TWISTED Second monitor TWISTED First monitor TWISTED
DIV-034
PAIR PAIR DIV-034
cod.9730015
PAIR PAIR
T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 2 2 2

5 5 5 5

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALM-040 (230 V )

230 V V
230 V V

2 2

1 1

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres

UTP CAT 5E

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

261
 WIRED DIAGRAM

INSTALLATION WITH TAP-OFF

Second First
monitor monitor

CC1 CC1
A B J1 B J1 A B J1 B J1

DIV-034
R1 SCM-020 R1 SCM-020
DIV-034
cod.9730015
T1+ T1+
T1- T1-
T1- T1- T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

T1+ T1+

24 24
25 25 120 Ohm
26 26
27 27
28 28

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

ALM-040

230 V V~

230 V
2x220 Ohm

INSTALLATION WITHOUT TAP-OFF

T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+

A J1 A J1

19 TCB-040
R1 R1 JJ11 TCB-050

GRF-204

Made in Spain

SCM-020 SCM-020 J2

V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

262
EXTENSION OF THE INSTALLATION WITH 3 MONITORS
Remarks
The power supply unit which is shown in the diagrams of this manual feeding the video system of the monitors can feed up to 2
monitors per dwelling. If 3 or 4 monitors are installed in a dwelling, an additional ALM-040 power supply unit will be required.

CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM 6+N+COAXIAL

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

INSTALLATION WITH TAP-OFF

Fourth monitor Third monitor Second monitor First monitor
DIV-024
COAXIAL COAXIAL COAXIAL COAXIAL

2 2 2 2
5 5 5 5

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALM-040 (230 V )

230 V V 230 V V

2
2

INSTALLATION WITHOUT TAP-OFF

Fourth monitor Third monitor Second monitor First monitor
COAXIAL COAXIAL COAXIAL COAXIAL

2 2 2 2
5 5 5 5

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALM-040 (230 V )

SECTION TABLE 230 V V 230 V V

AWG
Up to 100 metres
2
COAXIAL 75 Ω 2
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

263
 INSTALLATION WITH TAP-OFF
Fourth Third Second First
monitor monitor monitor monitor
A B

CC1
J1
B J1 A B

CC1
J1 B J1 A B

CC1
J1 B J1 A B

CC1
J1 B J1
75 Ohm
R1 SCM-010 R1 SCM-010 R1 SCM-010 R1 SCM-010
V1 V1 V1 V1
M M
M M M M
M M M M M
V1 V1 V1 V1 DIV-024
24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25
26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
ALM-040 ALM-040
INSTALLATION WITHOUT TAP-OFF
230 V V~ 230 V V~
A J1 A J1 A J1 A J1
230 V 230 V
R1 R1 R1 R1
75 Ohm
SCM-010 SCM-010 SCM-010 SCM-010 V2 M M V2 V1 M M V4
TCB-011
TCB-021
WIRED DIAGRAM TCB-011
GRF-204
Made in Spain
J2
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

264
CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM 6+N+TWISTED PAIR

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

INSTALLATION WITH TAP-OFF

Fourth monitor TWISTED Third monitor TWISTED Second monitor TWISTED First monitor TWISTED DIV-034
PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR DIV-034
cod.9730015

T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1

2 2 2 2
5 5 5 5

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALM-040 (230 V )

230 V V 230 V V

2
2
1
1

INSTALLATION WITHOUT TAP-OFF

Fourth monitor TWISTED Third monitor TWISTED Second monitor TWISTED First monitor TWISTED
PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR

2 2 2 2
5 5 5 5

ALM-040 (230 V ) ALM-040 (230 V )

V V
SECTION TABLE
230 V 230 V

AWG 2
Up to 100 metres

UTP CAT 5E 2
1 mm 2
1.1 mm 17 1
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
1

265
 INSTALLATION WITH TAP-OFF
Fourth Third Second First
monitor monitor monitor monitor
A B

CC1
J1
B J1 A B

CC1
J1 B J1 A B

CC1
J1 B J1 A B

CC1
J1 B J1
R1 DIV-034
SCM-020 R1 SCM-020 R1 SCM-020 R1 SCM-020
DIV-034
cod.9730015
T1+ T1+ T1+ T1+
T1- T1- T1- T1-
T1- T1- T1- T1- T1+ T1 T1 T1+ T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1 T1+ T1
T1+ T1+ T1+ T1+
24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25 120 Ohm
26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
ALM-040 ALM-040
INSTALLATION WITHOUT TAP-OFF
A J1 A J1 A J1 A J1
230 V V~ 230 V V~
230 V 230 V
R1 R1 R1 R1
2x220 Ohm
SCM-020 SCM-020 SCM-020 SCM-020
T2+ T2- T2- T2+ T1+ T1- T4- T4+
19 TCB-040
JJ11 TCB-050
GRF-204
WIRED DIAGRAM
Made in Spain
J2
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

266
EXTENSION OF THE INSTALLATION WITH CALL EXTENSIONS

DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

Use
It is possible to extend the installation in a dwelling by adding call extensions, to a maximum of 3 devices per dwelling (where
devices are call extensions and telephones). Each call extension will be able to receive calls.

Operation
The electronic call signal is shared by the call extensions and telephones. By respecting the sections indicated in this technical
manual, it is possible to install up to 3 devices (where devices are telephones and call extensions).
All the devices receive the call simultaneously.

DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS. ELECTRONIC CALL

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(1) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18 2 5
(1) Section according to the number AAL-200
of devices in the dwelling

TEL-001

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(1) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18

(1) Section according to the number

of devices in the dwelling

2 5
1 2 3 4 5

AAL-200 TEL-001

267
DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT. ELECTRONIC CALL

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(1) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18 2 5
(1) Section according to the number AAL-200
of devices in the dwelling

TEL-001

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(1) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18

(1) Section according to the number

of devices in the dwelling

2 5
1 2 3 4 5

AAL-200 TEL-001

DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS. BUZZING CALL

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20 2 5
(1) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
AAL-210
(1) Section according to the number
of devices in the dwelling

TUN-001

268
 WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

(1) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18

(1) Section according to the number

of devices in the dwelling

J1

2 6
1 2 3 4 5 6

AAL-210 TUN-001

DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20 2 5
(1) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
AAL-200
(1) Section according to the number
of devices in the dwelling
TES-001

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(1) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18

(1) Section according to the number

of devices in the dwelling

2 5
1 2 3 4 5

AAL-200 TES-001

269
DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH INTERNAL COMMUNICATION

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG 1 2 3
4 5 6

Up to 100 metres 5
7
C
8
0
9

5
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(1) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18 AAL-200
(1) Section according to the number
of devices in the dwelling
TIN-001

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(1) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18

(1) Section according to the number

of devices in the dwelling

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
C 0

2 5

1 2 3 4 5 I3 I2 I1

AAL-200
TIN-001

VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

Use
It is possible to extend the installation in a dwelling by adding call extensions, to a maximum of 3 devices per dwelling (where
devices are call extensions, monitors and telephones). Each call extension will be able to receive calls.

Operation
The electronic call signal is shared by the call extensions, monitors and telephones. By respecting the sections indicated in this tech-
nical manual, it is possible to install up to 3 devices (where devices are call extensions, monitors and telephones).
All the devices receive the call simultaneously.

270
CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM 6+N+COAXIAL

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COAXIAL
SECTION TABLE

Up to 100 metres
AWG
2
COAXIAL 75 Ω
2 5
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20 AAL-200
(1) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18

(1) Section according to the number SCM-010

of devices in the dwelling +
MVB-001
MVC-001

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
CC1
A B J1 COAXIAL 75 Ω

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(1) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18

R1
(1) Section according to the number
MVB-001 SCM-010 V1 of devices in the dwelling
MVC-001 M
M
V1

24
25
26
27
28
2 5
1 2 3 4 5

AAL-200

271
CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM 6+N+TWISTED PAIR

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

TWISTED PAIR
SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres
2
UTP CAT 5E
2 5
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20 AAL-200
(1) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18

(1) Section according to the number

of devices in the dwelling SCM-020
+
MVB-001
MVC-001

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres

CC1 UTP CAT 5E

A B J1
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(1) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18

(1) Section according to the number

R1 of devices in the dwelling
MVB-001 SCM-020 T1+
MVC-001 T1-
T1-
T1+

24
25
26
27
28
2 5
1 2 3 4 5

AAL-200

272
DOOR OPENING USING EXTERNAL PUSHBUTTON
Use
When the entry door does not have a door handle, a pushbutton is required to activate the electric lock so that the door can be
opened from the interior. The door can be opened while the electric lock is activated.
It is advisable to install the pushbutton near the entry door in such a way that it is possible to open the door while pressing the
pushbutton. If this is not possible, then an automatic electric lock, model ABR-003, can be installed. This lock remains active until
the door is opened.

DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS. ELECTRONIC CALL

INSTALLATIONS WITH AUDIO UNIT GRF-201

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 25 metres

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
GRF-201
Up to 100 metres
2
0.25 mm 0.6 mm 22 Made in Spain

3 2 J2

V~ 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 7

Door-opening push-button

MAN-410

ABR-001
(1)
(1) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA

273
 INSTALLATIONS WITH AUDIO UNIT GRF-203

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 50 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17 GRF-203

Up to 25 metres POWER SUPPLY Made in Spain

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20 UNIT J1 J2

V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

Door-opening push-button

MAN-430

ABR-001
(1)
(1) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA

DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH CONCIERGE UNIT. ELECTRONIC CALL

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 50 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17 GRF-203

Up to 25 metres POWER SUPPLY Made in Spain

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20 UNIT J1 J2

V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

Door-opening push-button

MAN-430

ABR-001
(1)
(1) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA

274
DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS. BUZZING CALL
INSTALLATIONS WITH AUDIO UNIT GRF-205

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 25 metres

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20 GRF-205

Up to 100 metres
Made in Spain

0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22 3 2 J2

V~ 9 10 11 12 0 1 2 3 4 7 8

Door-opening push-button

MAN-451

ABR-001
(1)
(1) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA

INSTALLATIONS WITH AUDIO UNIT GRF-203 AND ACCESSORY AAL-001

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 50 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17 GRF-203

Up to 25 metres POWER SUPPLY Made in Spain

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20 UNIT J1 J2

V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

Door-opening push-button

MAN-430

ABR-001
(1)
(1) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA

275
DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 50 metres
GRF-204
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Up to 25 metres 19 Made in Spain

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

J1 J2
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

V~ 9 10 11 12 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

Door-opening push-button

MAN-441

ABR-001
(1)
(1) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA

DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH INTERNAL COMMUNICATION

INSTALLATIONS WITH AUDIO UNIT GRF-201

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 25 metres

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
GRF-201
Up to 100 metres
2
0.25 mm 0.6 mm 22 Made in Spain

3 2 J2

V~ 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 7

Door-opening push-button

MAN-410

ABR-001
(1)
(1) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA

276
 INSTALLATIONS WITH AUDIO UNIT GRF-203

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 50 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17 GRF-203

Up to 25 metres POWER SUPPLY Made in Spain

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20 UNIT J1 J2

V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

Door-opening push-button

MAN-430

ABR-001
(1)
(1) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA

VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 50 metres POWER SUPPLY
GRF-204
UNIT
1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
19 Made in Spain
Up to 25 metres
J1 J2
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20

V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

Door-opening push-button

MDN-441 (Entrance panel with MAN-441

and coaxial video unit B/W)
MDN-442 (Entrance panel with MAN-441
and coaxial video unit color)

MDN-444 (Entrance panel with MAN-441

and twisted pair video unit B/W)
ABR-001
MDN-445 (Entrance panel with MAN-441 (1)
and twisted pair video unit color)

(1) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA

277
OPENING OF A SECOND DOOR FROM THE TELEPHONE/MONITOR OF THE
DWELLING

OPENING OF A SECOND DOOR FROM THE TELEPHONE OF THE DWELLING

Use
In addition to the electric lock controlled by the audio unit of the entrance panel, it is possible - using the auxiliary pushbutton of
the telephone in the dwelling - to activate a second electric lock.

Operation
When the auxiliary pushbutton of the telephone is pressed, the potential-free contacts associated to the pushbutton (terminals 24,
25) allow the ASC-001 to detect the negative of the power supply voltage of the monitors (- terminal). The ASC-001 then detects
( and Ctrl terminals) the 15 ± 10% Vdc control signal. The contacts of circuits 1 and 2 of the ASC-001 change status (terminals
C1, NO1 and C2, NO2). The voltage of the power supply unit can then reach the electric lock, allowing the entry door to be ope-
ned.

WIRED DIAGRAM

TEL-002
TES-002
TUN-002 1 2 3 4 5 24 25

ASC-001
ASC-001
cod. 9730023

V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2

Made in Spain

ALM-040

11 12 1 2 3 4

220V~ V~

230 V

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 50 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
ABR-001
Up to 25 metres

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
Up to 100 metres
0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
278
OPENING OF A SECOND DOOR FROM THE MONITOR OF THE DWELLING
Use
In addition to the electric lock controlled by the audio unit of the entrance panel, it is possible - using the auxiliary pushbutton of
the telephone in the dwelling - to activate a second electric lock.

Operation
When the auxiliary pushbutton of the monitor is pressed, the potential-free contacts associated to the pushbutton (terminals 24, 25)
allow the ASC-001 to detect the positive of the voltage feeding the monitors (+ terminal). The ASC-001 then detects
( and Ctrl terminals) the control signal of 15Vdc ± 10%. The contacts of circuits 1 and 2 of the ASC-001 change status (ter-
minals C1, NO1 and C2 , NO2). The voltage from the power supply unit can then reach the electric lock and the street door can
be opened.

WIRED DIAGRAM

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 50 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Up to 25 metres
24
25 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
26
27 Up to 100 metres
MVB 28
MVC 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

1 2 3 4 5

SCM ALA-020

220 V~ V~

ALM-040 230 V

ASC-001
ASC-001
cod. 9730023

V Ctrl NC1 NC2 NO1 NO2 C1 C2

220V~ V~

230 V

ABR-001

279
ACTIVATING A 12VAC ELECTRIC LOCK
Use
With the power supply unit shown in the diagrams of this manual, it is possible to activate a 12Vac electric lock with power con-
sumption not greater than 800mA.
To activate a 12Vac electric lock with greater consumption or two 12Vac electric locks with consumption not greater than 800mA
each one simultaneously, it is necessary to use additional material.
Note:
To avoid audio problems produced by possible induction between the wires powering the electric lock and the other wires of the
electronic door entry or video door entry system, it is recommended that a separate cable hose be used for the wires powering the
electric lock.

ACTIVATING TWO 12VAC ELECTRIC LOCKS AND WITH POWER CONSUMPTION

UP TO 800 mA EACH ONE SIMULTANEOUSLY
Operation
When the lock-release button of the telephone or monitor is pressed, the audio unit detects the closing of the lock-release circuit
(terminals 1, 2). The audio unit then sends an AC voltage (terminals 11, 12) to the ALM-080 power supply unit ( and Ctrl ter-
minals). The contacts of the circuit of the ALM-080 change status (terminals C, NO). The power supply unit then sends an AC vol-
tage (terminals 11, NO) to the two electric lock, and the two street doors can be opened.

DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

WIRED DIAGRAM

GRF-XXX

ALM-080

230 V C NC NO Ctrl 11 V V~ 11 12
230V~ + V~

230 V

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 50 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Up to 25 metres

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
Up to 100 metres
0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22

ABR-001 ABR-001

280
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

WIRED DIAGRAM

Video unit
Monitors (depending on installation)

- + - +

GRF-XXX
ALA-040

230 V
230 V V
V V~ 11 12

230 V
ALM-080

230 V C NC NO Ctrl 11 V
230V~ + V~

230 V

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
ABR-001 ABR-001

ACTIVATING A 12VAC ELECTRIC LOCK AND WITH POWER CONSUMPTION UP

TO 2 A
Operation
When the lock-release button of the telephone or monitor is pressed, the audio unit detects the closing of the lock-release circuit (ter-
minals 1, 2). The audio unit then sends an AC voltage (terminals 11, 12) to the ALM-080 power supply unit ( and Ctrl terminals).
The contacts of the circuit of the ALM-080 change status (terminals C, NO). The power supply unit then sends an AC voltage (termi-
nals 11, NO) to the electric lock, and the street door can be opened.

281
DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

WIRED DIAGRAM GRF-XXX

ALM-080

230 V C NC NO Ctrl 11 V V~ 11 12
230V~ + V~

230 V

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 50 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
Up to 25 metres

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
Up to 100 metres
0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22

Max. 12 Vac 2A

VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS

Video unit
Monitors (depending on installation)
WIRED DIAGRAM
- + - +

GRF-XXX
ALA-040

230 V
230 V V
V V~ 11 12

230 V
ALM-080

230 V C NC NO Ctrl 11 V
230V~ + V~

230 V

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 25 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
Up to 100 metres

1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
282 Max. 12 Vac 2A
ACTIVATING THE STAIRS LIGHTING WHEN THE DOOR IS OPENED
Use
It is possible to activate the stairs lighting of the building at the same time that an alternating voltage is sent to the electric lock.
This can be useful when, for safety reasons, it is desirable to light up the hall or doorway of the building once the visitor has been
allowed to enter.

Operation
When the lock-release button of the telephone or monitor is pressed, the audio unit detects the closing of the lock-release circuit
(terminals 1, 2). The audio unit then sends an AC voltage (terminals 11, 12) to the electric lock, allowing the entry door to be ope-
ned, and to the ASC-050 ( and Ctrl2 terminals), allowing the light switch circuit to be closed.

WIRED DIAGRAM

ASC-050
ASC-050
cod. 9730021

5A / 250V~

S2 S5
2 5 6

Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

19 Made
Made in
in Spain
Spain

J1
LIGHT
IN STAIRS
V~ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18
Max. 250 Vac/5A

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 25 metres

0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
ABR-001

ACTIVATING A LIGHT, BELL OR SIREN WHEN A CALL IS RECEIVED IN THE

DWELLING
Use
It is possible to activate a light, bell or siren (up to 250Vac and 5A) when a call is received in the dwelling. This can be useful in
dwellings where, for example, the user has hearing problems, or in installations in noisy environments, such as factories.

283
ACTIVATING A LIGHT, BELL OR SIREN WHEN A CALL IS RECEIVED IN THE
TELEPHONE/MONITOR OF THE DWELLING

Operation
When a call is made to the dwelling, the electronic signal generated by the audio unit arrives via the call wire to the telepho-
ne/monitor of the dwelling (terminals 5, 2) and to the ASC-050 (terminals 5, 2). The contacts of the circuit of the ASC-050 change
status (terminals C, NO). The power voltage can then reach the device controlling the light, bell or siren at the same time that the
loudspeaker of the receiver of the telephone/monitor emits a sound, informing those in the dwelling in both ways that a call has
been made.

WIRED DIAGRAM

ASC-050
ASC-050
cod. 9730021

5A / 250V~
LIGHTS
S2 S5
2 5 6

Ctrl1 Ctrl2 C NO NC

1 2 3 4 5

SCM-010
SCM-020
TEL-001 BELL/SIREN
TES-001
TUN-001 Max. 250 Vac/5A

SECTION TABLE
AWG
Up to 100 metres

0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22

ACTIVATING AN ELECTRIC LOCK FROM FOUR INDEPENDENT ENTRANCE

PANELS
Use
When an electric lock can be activated from several entrance panels, each of which is equipped with an audio unit and a sepa-
rate power supply, it is necessary to incorporate in the system a means of isolating the electric lock terminals of each of the audio
units.

Operation
The lock release signal sent by any of the entrance panels is detected by the APC-001 (terminals 11, 12).
If this signal is DC, the APC-001 sends this voltage to the DC electric lock (terminals 11, DC 12), allowing the street door to be
opened.
If the signal is AC, then one of the following situations arises:
1) If the electric lock is AC
In this case, the APC-001 sends the voltage to the AC electric lock (terminals 11, AC 12), allowing the street door to be ope-
ned.
2) If the electric lock is DC
In this case, the APC-001 rectifies the voltage and sends a DC voltage to the DC electric lock (terminals 11, DC 12), allowing
the street door to be opened.

284
 Note: If in the installation equipment with a DC electric lock signal exists alongside equipment with an AC electric lock signal,
use the DC electric lock output.

WIRED DIAGRAM

Electric lock signal Electric lock signal Electric lock signal Electric lock signal
Entrance panel 1 Entrance panel 2 Entrance panel 3 Entrance panel 4

12 11 AC
12
DC
12

APC-001
cod.9730006

- +
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 AC
12
DC
12

ABR-011
(1)

AC DC
12 11 12 12

SECTION TABLE ABR-001

AWG (2)
Up to 25 metres (1) Max. 15 Vdc, 500 mA
0.5 mm2 0.8 mm 20 (2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA

285
TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS
STANDARD INSTALLATION
TV DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for TV door entry installations.

Operation
The video unit is switched on, capturing an image and sending the video signal (terminals V1, M) to the modulator. The modulator
receives the video signal ('VIDEO' F-type connector) and modulates it, generating and sending a TV channel ('RF OUT' F-type con-
nector) to the TV head-end.
This channel can be tuned into on the TV in the dwelling, you will see the image captured by the video unit.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COAX
TV HEAD-END TV

COAX
230V~ ±10%

SECTION TABLE
50-60Hz
DC OUT : 15V

2
0.2 A

965 SERIES
MODULATOR

AWG
Up to 25 metres

MDA-300 (BIII) MVN-902 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

MDA-400 (UHF) +
COAX CMO-002 Up to 100 metres
COAXIAL 75 Ω

STANDARD INSTALLATION
TV DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
WIRED DIAGRAM

TV HEAD-END
V1 M
Video unit
15V _
MDA-300 (BIII) +
MDA-400 (UHF) TCB-210
SW1

Black

286
TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATION IN A STANDARD DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATION
WITH CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE. ELECTRONIC CALL
CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM 4+N+TV DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
Standard wiring diagram for TV door entry installations in door entry installations with confidentiality feature and electronic call in
buildings with one point of entry.

Operation

SYSTEM ON STANDBY
On a functional level, the system for visualising the image of the visitor on the TV is the same as that in a standard TV door entry
installation. See “Standard Installation” on page 286.
On a functional level, the door entry installation is the same as that a standard door entry installations with confidentiality featu-
re.

SYSTEM ACTIVE. RECEIVING A CALL

On a functional level, the system for visualising the image of the visitor on the TV is the same as that in a standard TV door entry
installation. See “Standard Installation” on page 286.
On a functional level, the electronic door entry installation is the same as that of a standard door entry installation with confi-
dentiality feature.

SINGLE-WIRED DIAGRAM

COAX

TV HEAD-END
TV

TES-001

TV

ALA-040 (230 V )

230 V V

TES-001
(1)
2
SECTION TABLE
COAX AWG
230V~ ±10%
50-60Hz
DC OUT : 15V Up to 50 metres
2
0.2 A

965 SERIES

1 mm 2
MODULATOR

1.1 mm 17

2 Up to 25 metres
MDA-300 (BIII) 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17
MDA-400 (UHF)
MDN-443
0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
+
MPD-004 Up to 100 metres
COAX +
COAXIAL 75 Ω
CMO-006
ABR-001
(2) 1 0.25 mm 2 0.6 mm 22
2 0.5 mm 2 0.8 mm 20
(3) 3 0.75 mm 2 1.0 mm 18
4 1 mm 2 1.1 mm 17

(1) Use separate cable hose

(2) Max. 12 Vac, 800 mA
(3) Section according to the number
of telephones in the dwelling 287
TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATION IN A STANDARD DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATION
WITH CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE. ELECTRONIC CALL
CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM 4+N+TV DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM

WIRED DIAGRAM

TES-001 TES-001

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

TV HEAD-END

Call Call

TES-001 TES-001

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

MDA-300 (BIII)
MDA-400 (UHF)

Call Call

SW1

V1 M

15V _
+
TCB-210
Black
GRF-204

19 Made in Spain

ALA-040 J1 J2

V~ 9 10 11 12 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 7 16 17 18

230 V V

230 V
(1)

ABR-001

Calls
(1) Use separate cable hose
288
 TROUBLE SHOOTING
7
Check that the connections of the different elements are the same as that shown in the corresponding diagrams. Check voltages in
all terminals are the same with indicated in the chapter 2 " Technical data". In order to help in the location of the problem, there
are some situations could be found.

ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS.

ELECTRONIC CALL. CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING

Nothing works. find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio
Check the mains voltage in the power supply. Check that the unit.
voltage between V~, of the power supply is 12 ± 10% Vac. You cannot hear any telephone from the entrance
Check wether there is a short circuit and fix it. Disconnect the panel.
power supply for 1 minute and then connect it up again. Check connections 3,2 from the audio unit to all the tele-
If it still doesn't work, disconnect all the power supply phones. Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot
V~, terminals, and check that the voltage between V~, is find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio
12 ± 10% Vac, if it is not, then there may be something wrong unit.
with the power supply. A telephone cannot be heard from the entrance
The card holders don't light up. panel.
Check that the voltage between V~, of the power supply is Check connections 3,2 from the telephone to the audio unit
12 ± 10% Vac.Check that the voltage between 9,10 in the audio . If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong
unit, with the lighting push button activated, is 12 ± 10%Vac. with the telephone.
Check wether the lamp has burnt out. The entrance panel cannot be heard on any tele-
The lighting push button pilot does not light up. phone.
Check that the voltage between the V~, of the audio unit is Check the connections 4,2 from the audio unit to all the tele-
12 ± 10% Vac. If the voltage is correct, there may be something phones. Check the volume control of the telephones on the
wrong with the audio unit. panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
You cannot hear the call tone on any telephone. wrong with the audio unit.

Check that the voltage between 7,2 on the audio unit, without You cannot hear the entrance panel on a telepho-
pressing the push button, is 9 ± 10% Vdc. Check the connection ne.
between 7 on the audio unit and the push buttons. Check con- Check connections 4,2 from the telephone to the audio unit.
nection 2 from the audio unit to the telephones. If you cannot find If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit. the telephone.
You cannot hear the call tone on a telephone. You can hear whistling on the panel. The sound
Check wether the telephone is off the hook. Check connections produces feedback.
5,2 from the telephone to the audio unit. Reduce the volume of the sound using the volume control on
If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
the telephone or the panel push button. The electric lock doesn't work.
You cannot hear the call confirmation on the entran- Check that the voltage between 1,2 on the audio unit,
ce panel. without pressing the lock release button, is 18 Vdc. Check that
Check that you can hear the telephones on the entrance panel. the voltage between 11,12 on the audio unit, when you press
Check that the call tone rings on the telephones. If you cannot the lock release button, is 12 ± 10% Vac. If you cannot find the
fault, the electric lock may be broken.

289
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY
HOUSING ESTATE WITH SEVERAL BUILDINGS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY
(GATE)

Nothing works. You cannot hear an entrance panel on any tele-

Check the mains voltage in the power supply. Check that the phone.
voltage between V~, of the power supply is 12 ± 10% Vac. Check connections 4,2 from the audio unit to all the tele-
Check wether there is a short circuit and fix it. Disconnect the phones. Check the volume control of the telephones on the
power supply for 1 minute and then connect it up again. panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
If it still doesn't work, disconnect all the power supply wrong with the audio unit.
V~, terminals, and check that the voltage between V~, is You cannot hear the entrance panel on a telepho-
12 ± 10% Vac, if it is not, then there may be something wrong ne.
with the power supply. Check connections 4,2 from the telephone to the audio unit.
The card holders don't light up. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
Check that the voltage between V~, of the power supply is the telephone.
12 ± 10% Vac.Check that the voltage between 9,10 in the audio You can hear several entrance panels at the same
unit, with the lighting push button activated, is 12 ± 10%Vac. time on the telephones.
Check wether the lamp has burnt out. Check that only one panel has been defined as the main
The lighting push button pilot does not light up. one. Make certain that connectors 17,18 on the panels are
Check that the voltage between the V~, of the audio unit is connected up. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
12 ± 10% Vac. If the voltage is correct, there may be something thing wrong with the audio unit.
wrong with the audio unit. The sound produces feedback.
The call tone doesn’t ring on any telephone. Lower the sound level using the volume control on the audio
Check that the voltage between 7,2 in the audio unit, without unit.
pressing the push button, is 14.5 ± 10% Vdc. Check the con- The electric lock doesn’t work.
nection between 7 in the audio unit and the push buttons. Check Check that the voltage between 1,2 in the audio unit, without
connection 2 from the audio unit to the telephones. If you cannot pressing the lock release button, is 5 Vdc. Check that the vol-
find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit. tage between 11,12 in the audio unit, when you press the lock
The call tone doesn’t ring in a telephone. release button, is 12 ± 10% Vac. If you cannot find the fault,
Check that the telephone is not off the hook. Check connections the electric lock may be broken.
5,2 from the telephone to the audio unit. Check the push-button The electric lock doesn't work unless someone
connection on the entrance panel. If you cannot find the fault, presses a push button.
there may be something wrong with telephone or the panel push- Check that at least one entrance panel has been defined as
button. the main one. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
You cannot hear the call confirmation on the entran- thing wrong with the audio unit on the main entrance panel.
ce panel. When you call one of the panels the rest of the
Check that you can hear the telephones on the entrance panel. panels in the system are not deactivated.
Check that the call tone rings on the telephones. If you cannot Make certain that connectors 17,18 on the panels are con-
find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit. nected up. If it is necessary, check the connections 16,18.
You cannot hear any telephones from the entrance Check that the voltage between 17,2 in each one of the audio
panel. unit is 8 Vdc when you press the push button on one of the
Check connections 3,2 from the audio unit to all the telepho- panels. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
nes. Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find wrong with the audio units.
the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
You cannot hear a telephone from the entrance
panel.
Check connections 3,2 from the telephone to the audio unit. If
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the
telephone.

290
ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH
CONCIERGE UNIT. ELECTRONIC CALL.
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
Disconnect the concierge system before testing the installation. By doing so, you will be able to determine whether the problem is
located in the installation of the concierge system or in some other part of the installation. If, with the concierge unit disconnected,
the system still does not function properly, see the section “ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS. ELECTRONIC CALL”, on
page 289.

STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING. WITH CONCIERGE UNIT

Nothing works. When you call from one of the telephones, it does
Check the mains voltage in the power supply. Check that the not ring.
voltage between V~, of the power supply is 12 ± 10% Vac. Check connections 1,2 from the telephone in the dwelling to
Check wether there is a short circuit and fix it. Disconnect the the concierge telephone. Check that the voltage between 1,2
power supply for 1 minute and then connect it up again. on the audio concierge, without pressing the electric lock but-
If it still doesn't work, disconnect all the power supply ton on the phone in the dwelling, is 5 ±10% Vdc. Check that
V~, terminals, and check that the voltage between V~, is the concierge telephone is hung up. If you cannot find the fault,
12 ± 10% Vac, if it is not, then there may be something wrong there may be something wrong with the telephone in the dwe-
with the power supply. lling.

Check the CC1 connector connection in the concierge tele- A call made from the entrance panel does not ring
phone. Check that the voltage between 13,2 in the audio con- at concierge.
cierge is 9 ±10% Vdc. Check the CC2 connector connection in Check connections 13,14 from the concierge telephone to
the concierge. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some- the entrance panel. Check that the voltage between 13,2 is 9
thing wrong with the concierge telephone. ±10% Vdc. Check the connection between 7 on the audio unit
The concierge does not work. and the push buttons on the entrance panel. Check that the vol-
tage between 7,2 on the audio unit in the entrance panel is
Check the CC2 connector connection in the concierge tele-
14.5 ±10% Vdc, without pressing the push button. If you can-
phone (red wire at the top, terminal side; grey wire at the bot-
not find the fault there may be something wrong with the audio
tom, switch side). Check connections 13,14 from the concierge
concierge or the entrance panel audio unit.
audio unit to the audio concierge and the entrance panels.
Check that the voltage between 13,2 with the key in the ON A call made from concierge does not ring on any
position is 9 ±10% Vdc. If you cannot find the fault there may be telephone.
something wrong with the concierge audio unit. Check that the voltage between 7,2 on the audio unit,
The card holders don't light up. without pressing the push button, is 14.5 ±10% Vdc. Check the
connection between 7 on the audio unit and the push buttons.
Check that the voltage between V~, of the power supply is
Check connections 13,14 on the concierge audio unit. Check
12 ± 10% Vac.Check that the voltage between 9,10 in the audio
that the voltage between 13,2 is 9 ±10% Vdc. If you cannot
unit, with the lighting push button activated, is 12 ± 10%Vac.
find the fault, there may be something wrong with the concier-
Check wether the lamp has burnt out.
ge audio unit.
The lighting push button pilot does not light up.
A call made from concierge does not ring on one
Check that the voltage between the V~, of the audio unit is of the phones.
12 ± 10% Vac. If the voltage is correct, there may be something
Check that the telephone has been hung up. Check connec-
wrong with the audio unit.
tions 5,2 from the telephone in the dwelling to the concierge
There is no ringing tone when you make a call from telephone. Check the push button connection on the concierge
the telephones. panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
Check connections 1,2 from the concierge telephone to the wrong with the telephone or the panel push button.
telephones. Check that the voltage between 1,2 in the audio con- You cannot hear any of the telephones.
cierge, without pressing the electric lock button is 5 Vdc. Check
Check connections 3,2 between the audio unit and the con-
connections 13,14 on the concierge telephone with the concier-
cierge telephone. Check connections 3,2 from the concierge
ge panel. Check that the voltage between 13,2 is 9 ±10% Vdc.
telephone to the telephones. Check the volume control on the
Check that the concierge telephone has been hung up. If you
concierge audio unit. Check the CC2 connector connection on
cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the con-
the concierge telephone. Check the voltage between terminals
cierge audio unit.
3,2 on the concierge telephone. If you cannot find the fault,
there may be something wrong with the audio concierge or
concierge audio unit.

291
 You cannot hear one of the telephones. You cannot pass the call from the main entrance
Check connections 3,2 from the telephone in the dwelling to panel to the dwelling.
the concierge telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may Check that the entrance panel is defined as the main one (J1
be something wrong with the telephone in the dwelling. jumper installed). Check the connections between terminals
You cannot hear the entrance panel. 17,18 between the concierge audio unit and the main panel.
Check the connection of terminals 17,18 between the concier-
Check connections 4,2 from the concierge telephone to the
ge audio unit and the concierge telephone push button. Check
entrance panel. Check the entrance panel volume. If you cannot
that the voltage between 17,18 on the audio unit with the push
find the fault, there may be something wrong with the concierge
button pressed down is 0 Vdc, if this is not the case, there may
telephone or the entrance panel audio unit.
be something wrong with the push button.
You cannot hear the call confirmation in concierge.
The system entrance panels are not deactivated
Check that you can hear the telephones in the dwellings. when you call from concierge to the telephones or
Check that the call tone rings on the telephones. If you cannot concierge from telephones.
find the fault, there may be something wrong with the concierge Check connections 17,18 between the concierge panel and
audio unit. the various entrance panels in the system. Check that the vol-
tage between 17,2 on all the panels is 8 ±10% Vdc, when you
call from concierge or from the dwelling. If you cannot find the
fault, there may be something wrong with the concierge audio
unit.

STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY.

WITH CONCIERGE UNIT

Nothing works. Check wether the lamp has burnt out.

Check the mains voltage in the power supply. Check that the The lighting push button pilot does not light up.
voltage between V~, of the power supply is 12 ± 10% Vac. Check that the voltage between the V~, of the audio unit
Check wether there is a short circuit and fix it. Disconnect the is 12 ± 10% Vac. If the voltage is correct, there may be some-
power supply for 1 minute and then connect it up again. thing wrong with the audio unit.
If it still doesn't work, disconnect all the power supply There is no ringing tone when you make a call
V~, terminals, and check that the voltage between V~, is from the telephones.
12 ± 10% Vac, if it is not, then there may be something wrong
Check connections 1,2 from the concierge telephone to the
with the power supply.
telephones. Check that the voltage between 1,2 in the audio
Check the CC1 connector connection in the concierge tele- concierge, without pressing the electric lock button is 5 Vdc.
phone. Check that the voltage between 13,2 in the audio con- Check connections 13,14 on the concierge telephone with the
cierge is 9 ±10% Vdc. Check the CC2 connector connection in concierge panel. Check that the voltage between 13,2 is 9
the concierge. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some- ±10% Vdc. Check that the concierge telephone has been hung
thing wrong with the concierge telephone. up. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong
The concierge does not work. with the concierge audio unit.
Check the CC2 connector connection in the concierge tele- When you call from one of the telephones, it does
phone (red wire at the top, terminal side; grey wire at the bot- not ring.
tom, switch side). Check connections 13,14 from the concierge Check connections 1,2 from the telephone in the dwelling to
audio unit to the audio concierge and the entrance panels. the concierge telephone. Check that the voltage between 1,2
Check that the voltage between 13,2 with the key in the ON on the audio concierge, without pressing the electric lock but-
position is 9 ±10% Vdc. If you cannot find the fault there may be ton on the phone in the dwelling, is 5 ±10% Vdc. Check that
something wrong with the concierge audio unit. the concierge telephone is hung up. If you cannot find the fault,
The card holders don't light up. there may be something wrong with the telephone in the dwe-
Check that the voltage between V~, of the power supply is lling.
12 ± 10% Vac.Check that the voltage between 9,10 in the audio
unit, with the lighting push button activated, is 12 ± 10%Vac.

292
 A call made from the entrance panel does not ring You cannot hear the entrance panel.
at concierge. Check connections 4,2 from the concierge telephone to the
Check connections 13,14 from the concierge telephone to the entrance panel. Check the entrance panel volume. If you can-
entrance panel. Check that the voltage between 13,2 is 9 ±10% not find the fault, there may be something wrong with the con-
Vdc. Check the connection between 7 on the audio unit and the cierge telephone or the entrance panel audio unit.
push buttons on the entrance panel. Check that the voltage bet- You cannot hear the call confirmation in concierge.
ween 7,2 on the audio unit in the entrance panel is 14.5 ±10%
Check that you can hear the telephones in the dwellings.
Vdc, without pressing the push button. If you cannot find the fault
there may be something wrong with the audio concierge or the Check that the call tone rings on the telephones. If you can-
entrance panel audio unit. not find the fault, there may be something wrong with the con-
cierge audio unit.
A call made from concierge does not ring on any
telephone. You cannot pass the call from the main entrance
panel to the dwelling.
Check that the voltage between 7,2 on the audio unit, without
pressing the push button, is 14.5 ±10% Vdc. Check the connec- Check that the entrance panel is defined as the main one (J1
tion between 7 on the audio unit and the push buttons. Check jumper installed). Check the connections between terminals
connections 13,14 on the concierge audio unit. Check that the 17,18 between the concierge audio unit and the main panel.
voltage between 13,2 is 9 ±10% Vdc. If you cannot find the Check the connection of terminals 17,18 between the concier-
fault, there may be something wrong with the concierge audio ge audio unit and the concierge telephone push button. Check
unit. that the voltage between 17,18 on the audio unit with the push
button pressed down is 0 Vdc, if this is not the case, there may
A call made from concierge does not ring on one of
be something wrong with the push button.
the phones.
The system entrance panels are not deactivated
Check that the telephone has been hung up. Check connec-
when you call from concierge to the telephones or
tions 5,2 from the telephone in the dwelling to the concierge tele-
concierge from telephones.
phone. Check the push button connection on the concierge
panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong Check connections 17,18 between the concierge panel and
with the telephone or the panel push button. the various entrance panels in the system. Check that the vol-
tage between 17,2 on all the panels is 8 ±10% Vdc, when you
You cannot hear any of the telephones.
call from concierge or from the dwelling. If you cannot find the
Check connections 3,2 between the audio unit and the con- fault, there may be something wrong with the concierge audio
cierge telephone. Check connections 3,2 from the concierge tele- unit.
phone to the telephones. Check the volume control on the con-
cierge audio unit. Check the CC2 connector connection on the
concierge telephone. Check the voltage between terminals 3,2
on the concierge telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there
may be something wrong with the audio concierge or concierge
audio unit.
You cannot hear one of the telephones.
Check connections 3,2 from the telephone in the dwelling to
the concierge telephone. If you cannot find the fault, there may
be something wrong with the telephone in the dwelling.

293
ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS.
BUZZING CALL. CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING
Nothing works. You cannot hear a telephone from the entrance
Check the mains voltage in the power supply. Check that the panel.
voltage between V~, of the power supply is 12 ± 10% Vac. Check connections 3,2 from the telephone to the audio unit.
Check wether there is a short circuit and fix it. Disconnect the If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
power supply for 1 minute and then connect it up again. the telephone.
If it still doesn't work, disconnect all the power supply You cannot hear the entrance panel on any tele-
V~, terminals, and check that the voltage between V~, is phone.
12 ± 10% Vac, if it is not, then there may be something wrong Check connections 4,2 from the audio unit to all the tele-
with the power supply. phones. Check the volume control of the telephones on the
The card holders don't light up. entrance panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
Check that the voltage between V~, of the power supply is thing wrong with the audio unit.
12 ± 10% Vac.Check that the voltage between 9,10 in the audio You cannot hear the entrance panel on a telepho-
unit, with the lighting push button activated, is 12 ± 10%Vac. ne.
Check wether the lamp has burnt out. Check connections 4,2 from the telephone to the audio unit.
The lighting push button pilot does not light up. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
Check that the voltage between the V~, of the audio unit is the telephone.
12 ± 10% Vac. If the voltage is correct, there may be something You can hear whistling in the panel. The sound
wrong with the audio unit. produces feedback.
The call tone doesn’t ring on any telephone. Lower the sound level using the volume control on the audio
Check that the voltage between 8,2 in the audio unit without unit.
pressing the electric lock button is 12 ± 10% Vac. Check the con- The electric lock doesn’t work.
nection between 8 in the audio unit and the push buttons. Check Check that the voltaje between 1,2 in the audio unit, without
connection 2 from the audio unit to the telephones. If you cannot pressing the lock release button is 18 Vdc. Check that the vol-
find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit. tage between 11,12 in the audio unit, when you press the lock
The call tone doesn’t ring on a telephone. release button is 12 ± 10% Vac.
Check that the voltage between 6,2 in the telephone, with the If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong
push-button on the entrance panel activated, is 12 ± 10% Vac. with the electric lock or the audio unit.
Check connections from the telephone to the entrance panel.
Check the push-button connection on the entrance panel. If you
cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with tele-
phone or the panel push-button.
You cannot hear the call confirmation on the entran-
ce panel.
Check that you can hear the telephones on the entrance panel.
Check that the call tone rings on the telephones. If you cannot
find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
You cannot hear any telephones from the entrance
panel.
Check connections 3,2 from the audio unit to all the telepho-
nes. Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find
the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.

294
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY
HOUSING ESTATE WITH SEVERAL BUILDINGS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY
(GATE)

Nothing works. You cannot hear an entrance panel on any tele-

Check the mains voltage in the power supply. Check that the phone.
voltage between V~, of the power supply is 12 ± 10% Vac. Check connections 4,2 from the audio unit to all the tele-
Check wether there is a short circuit and fix it. Disconnect the phones. Check the volume control of the telephones on the
power supply for 1 minute and then connect it up again. entrance panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
If it still doesn't work, disconnect all the power supply thing wrong with the audio unit.
V~, terminals, and check that the voltage between V~, is You cannot hear the entrance panel on a telepho-
12 ± 10% Vac, if it is not, then there may be something wrong ne.
with the power supply. Check connections 4,2 from the telephone to the audio unit.
The card holders don't light up. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
Check that the voltage between V~, of the power supply is the telephone.
12 ± 10% Vac.Check that the voltage between 9,10 in the audio You can hear several entrance panels at the same
unit, with the lighting push button activated, is 12 ± 10%Vac. time on the telephones.
Check wether the lamp has burnt out. Check that only one panel has been defined as the main
The lighting push button pilot does not light up. one. Make certain that connectors 17,18 on the entrance
Check that the voltage between the V~, of the audio unit is panels are connected up. If you cannot find the fault, there may
12 ± 10% Vac. If the voltage is correct, there may be something be something wrong with the audio unit.
wrong with the audio unit. You can hear whistling in the panel. The sound
The call tone doesn’t ring on any telephone. produces feedback.

Check that the voltage between 8,2 in the call adaptor acces- Lower the sound level using the volume control on the audio
sory, without pressing the push button, is 6 ± 10% Vdc. Check unit.
the connection between 8 in the call adaptor accessory and the The electric lock doesn’t work.
push buttons. Check connection 2 from the audio unit to the call Check that the voltage between 1,2 in the audio unit, without
adaptor accessory and the telephones. If you cannot find the pressing the lock release button, is 5 Vdc. Check that the vol-
fault, there may be something wrong with the call adaptor acces- tage between 11,12 in the audio unit, when you press the lock
sory. release button, is 12 ± 10% Vac. If you cannot find the fault,
The call tone doesn’t ring in a telephone. the electric lock may be broken.
Check connections 6,2 from the telephone to the call adaptor The electric lock doesn't work unless someone
accessory. Check the push-button connection on the entrance presses a push button.
panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong Check that at least one entrance panel has been defined as
with telephone or the panel push-button. the main one. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
You cannot hear the call confirmation on the entran- thing wrong with the audio unit.
ce panel. Two electric locks work at the same time
Check that you can hear the telephones on the entrance panel. Check that at least one entrance panel has been defined as
Check that the voltage between 7,2 in audio unit, without pres- the main one. Make certain that connectors 17,18 on the
sing the push button, is 14.5 ± 10% Vdc. Check that the call tone entrance panels are connected up. If you cannot find the fault,
rings on the telephones. If you cannot find the fault, there may be there may be something wrong with the audio units.
something wrong with the audio unit.
When you call one of the panels the rest of the
You cannot hear any telephones from the entrance panels in the system are not deactivated.
panel.
Make certain that connectors 17,18 on the entrance panels
Check connections 3,2 from the audio unit to all the telepho- are connected up. If this is the case, make certain that connec-
nes. Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find tors 16,18 are connected up. Check that the voltage between
the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit. 17,18 in each one of the audio units is 8 Vdc when you press
You cannot hear a telephone from the entrance the push button on one of the panels. Check that when you
panel. press the push button on one of the panels the voltage betwe-
Check connections 3,2 from the telephone to the audio unit. If en 16,18 is 4 Vdc. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the something wrong with the audio units.
telephone.
295
ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS WITH
CONFIDENTIALITY FEATURE. ELECTRONIC CALL.
CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING
Nothing works. You cannot hear a telephone from the entrance
Check the mains voltage in the power supply. Check that the panel.
voltage between V~, of the power supply is 12 ± 10% Vac. Check connections 3,2 from the telephone to the audio unit.
Check wether there is a short circuit and fix it. Disconnect the If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
power supply for 1 minute and then connect it up again. the telephone.
If it still doesn't work, disconnect all the power supply You cannot hear an entrance panel on any tele-
V~, terminals, and check that the voltage between V~, is phone.
12 ± 10% Vac, if it is not, then there may be something wrong Check connections 4,2 from the audio unit to all the tele-
with the power supply. phones. Check the volume control on the telephones on the
The card holders don't light up. entrance panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
Check that the voltage between V~, of the power supply is thing wrong with the audio unit.
12 ± 10% Vac.Check that the voltage between 9,10 in the audio You cannot hear the entrance panel on a telepho-
unit, with the lighting push button activated, is 12 ± 10%Vac. ne.
Check wether the lamp has burnt out. Check connections 4,2 from the telephone to the audio unit.
The lighting push button pilot does not light up. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
Check that the voltage between the V~, of the audio unit is the telephone.
12 ± 10% Vac. If the voltage is correct, there may be something You can hear whistling in the panel. The sound
wrong with the audio unit. produces feedback.
The call tone doesn’t ring on any telephone. Lower the sound level using the volume control on the audio
Check that the voltage between 7,2 in the audio unit, without unit.
pressing the push button, is 14.5 Vdc. Check the connection bet- The electric lock doesn’t work.
ween 7 in the audio unit and the push buttons. Check connection Check that the voltage between 1,2 in the audio unit, without
2 from the audio unit to the telephones. If you cannot find the pressing the lock release button, is 5 Vdc. Check that the vol-
fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit. tage between 11,12 in the audio unit, when you press the lock
The call tone doesn’t ring in a telephone. release button, is 12 ± 10% Vac. If you cannot find the fault,
Check that the telephone is not off the hook. Check connections the electric lock may be broken.
5,2 from the telephone to the entrance panel. Check the push-but-
ton connection on the entrance panel. If you cannot find the fault,
there may be something wrong with telephone or the panel push-
button.
You cannot hear the call confirmation on the entran-
ce panel.
Check that you can hear the telephones on the entrance panel.
Check that the call tone rings on the telephones. If you cannot
find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
You cannot hear any telephones from the entrance
panel.
Check connections 3,2 from the audio unit to all the telepho-
nes. Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find
the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.

296
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY
HOUSING ESTATE WITH SEVERAL BUILDINGS. 1 EXTERNAL POINT OF ENTRY
(GATE)

Nothing works. You cannot hear an entrance panel on any tele-

Check the mains voltage in the power supply. Check that the phone.
voltage between V~, of the power supply is 12 ± 10% Vac. Check connections 4,2 from the audio unit to all the tele-
Check wether there is a short circuit and fix it. Disconnect the phones. Check the volume control on the telephones on the
power supply for 1 minute and then connect it up again. entrance panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
If it still doesn't work, disconnect all the power supply thing wrong with the audio unit.
V~, terminals, and check that the voltage between V~, is You cannot hear the entrance panel on a telepho-
12 ± 10% Vac, if it is not, then there may be something wrong ne.
with the power supply. Check connections 4,2 from the telephone to the audio unit.
The card holders don't light up. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
Check that the voltage between V~, of the power supply is the telephone.
12 ± 10% Vac.Check that the voltage between 9,10 in the audio You can hear whistling in the panel. The sound
unit, with the lighting push button activated, is 12 ± 10%Vac. produces feedback.
Check wether the lamp has burnt out. Lower the sound level using the volume control on the audio
The lighting push button pilot does not light up. unit.
Check that the voltage between the V~, of the audio unit is The electric lock doesn’t work.
12 ± 10% Vac. If the voltage is correct, there may be something Check that the voltage between 1,2 in the audio unit, without
wrong with the audio unit. pressing the lock release button, is 5 ± 10% Vdc. Check that
The call tone doesn’t ring on any telephone. the voltage between 11,12 in the audio unit, when you press
Check that the voltage between 7,2 in the audio unit, without the lock release button, is 12 ± 10% Vac. If you cannot find
pressing the push button, is 9 ± 10% Vdc. Check the connection the fault, the electric lock may be broken.
between 7 in the audio unit and the push buttons. Check con- When you call one of the panels the rest of the
nection 2 from the audio unit to the telephones. If you cannot find panels in the system are not disabled.
the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit. Make certain that connectors 17,18 on the panels are con-
The call tone doesn’t ring in a telephone. nected up. If this is the case, make certain that connectors
Check that the telephone is not off the hook. Check connections 16,18 are connected up. Check that the voltage between 17,2
5,2 from the telephone to the entrance panel. Check the push-but- in each one of the audio unit is 8 ± 10% Vdc and the voltage
ton connection on the entrance panel. If you cannot find the fault, between 16,18 is 4 ± 10% Vdc when you press the push but-
there may be something wrong with telephone or the panel push- ton on one of the panels. If you cannot find the fault, there may
button. be something wrong with the audio unit.

You cannot hear the call confirmation on the entran-

ce panel.
Check that you can hear the telephones on the entrance panel.
Check that the call tone rings on the telephones. If you cannot
find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
You cannot hear any telephones from the entrance
panel.
Check connections 3,2 from the audio unit to all the telepho-
nes. Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find
the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
You cannot hear a telephone from the entrance
panel.
Check connections 3,2 from the telephone to the audio unit. If
you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the
telephone.

297
INTERNAL COMMUNICATION INSTALLATIONS
STANDARD INSTALLATION WITH INTERNAL COMMUNICATION
Nothing works. There is no sound in any telephone.
Check the mains voltage in the control equipment for internal Check connections I1,I2,I3 between the telephones for inter-
communication. If the working LED indicator of the control equip- nal communication.
ment is blinking continuously, make sure that there is not a short- There is no sound in one telephone.
circuit in connections I1,I2 of the control equipment to the tele-
Check connection I3 of the telephone to the other telephones
phones. Check connections I1,I2 from the control equipment to
in the installation. If the fault cannot be found, there may be
the telephones. If the fault cannot be found, there may be some-
something wrong with the telephone.
thing wrong with the control equipment.
While communication is in course with another
Internal calls cannot be made from a telephone.
telephone, a call from the entrance panel cannot be
Check whether the internal communication BUS is busy (bee- heard (in installations with 4+N electronic door
ping tones are heard when an internal call is made to any tele- entry system).
phone). Check the connection of the CC1 connector in the tele-
Check that when the receiver has been correctly replaced the
phone. Check connections I1,I2 of the telephone to the control
call from the entrance panel can be heard. If it cannot, consult
unit. Check that there isn´t two telephones with the same exten-
the datasheet of the relevant audio unit. If the fault cannot be
sion number. If the fault cannot be found, there may be some-
found, there may be something wrong with the telephone.
thing wrong with the telephone.
Internal calls cannot be made to a telephone.
Make sure that the receiver of the telephone with which you
wish to communicate is off the hook (beeping tones are heard
when an internal call is made to the phone in question). Check
connections I1,I2 from the telephone to the control equipment. If
the fault cannot be found, there may be something wrong with
the telephone.

STANDARD ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATION WITH INTERNAL

COMMUNICATION BETWEEN TELEPHONES

If any problem arises related to the functioning of the electro- If any problem arises related to the functioning of the internal
nic door entry installation, see the section entitled “Standard communication installation, see the section entitled “Internal
Installation in a Building” on page 289, under the general hea- communication Installations”.
ding “Electronic Door Entry Installations. Electronic Call”.

ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS

OF ENTRY WITH INTERNAL COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE TELEPHONES

If any type of problem arises related to the functioning of the If any type of problem arises related to the functioning of the
electronic door entry installation, see the section entitled intercommunication installation, see the section “Installation in
“Installation in Building with Several Points of Entry” on Housing estates with Several Buildings”.
page 290, under the general heading “Electronic Door Entry
Installations. Electronic Call”.

298
ELECTRONIC DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS.
REPLACEMENTS. CONVENTIONAL 4+N SYSTEM
Check the connections of the ALCAD equipment, using the compatibility tables to guide you.

STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH GRF-205 UNIVERSAL AUDIO

UNIT

Nothing works. the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
Check the mains voltage in the power supply. Check that the You cannot hear a telephone from the entrance
voltage between V~, of the power supply is 12 ± 10% Vac. panel.
Check wether there is a short circuit and fix it. Disconnect the Check connections 3,2 from the telephone to the audio unit.
power supply for 1 minute and then connect it up again. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
If it still doesn't work, disconnect all the power supply the telephone.
V~, terminals, and check that the voltage between V~, is You cannot hear the entrance panel on any tele-
12 ± 10% Vac, if it is not, then there may be something wrong phone.
with the power supply.
Check connections 4,2 from the audio unit to all the tele-
The card holders don't light up. phones. Check the volume control of the telephones on the
Check that the voltage between V~, of the power supply is entrance panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be some-
12 ± 10% Vac.Check that the voltage between 9,10 in the audio thing wrong with the audio unit.
unit, with the lighting push button activated, is 12 ± 10%Vac. You cannot hear the entrance panel on a telepho-
Check wether the lamp has burnt out. ne.
The lighting push button pilot does not light up. Check connections 4,2 from the telephone to the audio unit.
Check that the voltage between the V~, of the audio unit is If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with
12 ± 10% Vac. If the voltage is correct, there may be something the telephone.
wrong with the audio unit. You can hear whistling in the panel. The sound
The call tone doesn’t ring on any telephone. produces feedback.
Check that the voltage between 8,2 in the audio unit, without Lower the sound level using the volume control on the audio
pressing the push-button, is 12 ± 10% Vac. Check the connection unit.
between 8 in the audio unit and the push buttons. Check con- The electric lock doesn’t work.
nection 2 from the audio unit to the telephones. If you cannot find
Check that the voltaje between 1,2 in the audio unit, without
the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
pressing the lock release button is 18 Vdc. Check that the vol-
The call tone doesn’t ring on a telephone. tage between 11,12 in the audio unit, when you press the lock
Check that the voltage between 6,2 in the telephone, with the release button is 12 ± 10% Vac.
push-button on the entrance panel activated, is 12 ± 10% Vac. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong
For electronic call, check connections 5,2 from the telephone to with the electric lock.
the audio unit. Check the push-button connection on the entrance
panel. Check that the telephone is not off the hook. If you cannot
find the fault, there may be something wrong with telephone or
the panel push-button.
You cannot hear the call confirmation on the entran-
ce panel.
Check that you can hear the telephones on the entrance panel.
Check that the call tone rings on the telephones. If you cannot
find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.
You cannot hear any telephones from the entrance
panel.
Check connections 3,2 from the audio unit to all the telepho-
nes. Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find

299
ELECTRONIC VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS.
ELECTRONIC CALL.
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+COAXIAL SYSTEM
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING

Nothing works. One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the

Check the mains voltage in the power supplies. Check that entrance panel.
the voltage between V~, of the power supply is 12 ± 10% Check connections 3,2 from the connection bracket/telepho-
Vac. Check wether there is a short circuit and fix it. Disconnect ne to the audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
the power supply for 1 minute and then connect it up again. something wrong with the connection bracket/telephone or the
If it still doesn't work, disconnect all the power supply monitor.
V~, terminals, and check that the voltage between V~, is You cannot hear an entrance panel on any moni-
12 ± 10% Vac, if it is not, then there may be something wrong tor/telephone.
with the power supply. Check connections 4,2 from the audio unit to all the moni-
The card holders don't light up. tors. Check the volume control on the monitors on the entrance
Check that the voltage between V~, of the power supply is panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
12 ± 10% Vac.Check that the voltage between 9,10 in the wrong with the audio unit.
audio unit, with the lighting push button activated, is 12 ± You cannot hear the entrance panel on a moni-
10%Vac. Check wether the lamp has burnt out. tor/telephone.
The lighting push button pilot does not light up. Check connections 4,2 from the connection bracket to the
Check that the voltage between the V~, of the audio unit audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
is 12 ± 10% Vac. If the voltage is correct, there may be some- wrong with the monitor.
thing wrong with the audio unit. The sound produces feedback.
The call tone doesn’t ring on any monitor. Lower the sound level using the volume control on the audio
Check that the voltage between 7,2 in the audio unit, without unit. If the feedback persists, remove the J2 jumper and repeat
pressing the push button, is 14.5 ± 10% Vdc. Check the con- the adjustment.
nection between 7 in the audio unit and the push buttons. The electric lock doesn’t work.
Check connection 2 from the audio unit to the monitors. If you Check that the voltage between 1,2 in the audio unit, without
cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the pressing the lock release button, is 5 ± 10% Vdc. Check that
audio unit. the voltage between 11,12 in the audio unit, when you press
The call tone doesn’t ring in a monitor. the lock release button, is 12 ± 10% Vac. If you cannot find
Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check the con- the fault, the electric lock may be broken.
nection between the connection bracket and the monitor. The video system does not work in any monitor:
Check connections 5,2 from the conection bracket to the auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei-
entrance panel. Check the push-button connection on the audio ving a call,..
unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds
with monitor or the panel push-button. the monitors. Check that the voltage of the power supply bet-
You cannot hear the call confirmation on the ween +, - is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short circuit and
entrance panel. rectify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1 minute
Check that you can hear the monitors on the entrance panel. and reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the
Check that the call tone rings on the monitors. If you cannot +, - terminals from the power supply unit and check that volta-
find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio ge between +, - is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it's not correct, there may
unit. be something wrong with the power supply.
No monitor/telephone can be heard from the Video system does not work in one monitor: auto
entrance panel. switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a
call,..
Check connections 3,2 from the audio unit to all the moni-
tors. Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON posi-
the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit. tion (on the left). Check that the red led of the monitor is on.
Check the connection between the connection bracket and the
monitor. Check that the voltage between +, - of the connection
bracket is 14 ± 15% Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may
be something wrong with the monitor.

300
 Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted Blank screen on all the monitors of a flat.
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. Check the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the con-
Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds nection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the connec-
the monitor. Check that the voltage of the power supply bet- tion bracket to the video unit. If splitters have been used in the
ween +, - is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the voltage between +, - of the splitters
distribution, check that the voltage between +, - of the splitters is 14 Vdc ± 15%. If the fault cannot be found, there may be
is 14 ± 15% Vdc. Check that coaxial cable line has a 75 Ohm something wrong with the tap-off of that floor or the splitter of
load: a) if tap-offs have been connected in series the 75 Ohm the flat.
resistance must be removed from all the intermediate tap-offs; Blank screen on one of the monitors of a house or
b) with monitors in series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the flat.
connection brackets, but from the one at the end of the line; c)
Check the connection between the connection bracket and
Check that resistences of 75 ohms are connected in the unused
the monitor. Check the connections of the coaxial cable in the
terminals V2, M. Check coaxial connection in splitters and tap-
monitor's connection bracket. If splitters have been used in the
offs. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong
distribution, check the position of the J1 configuration jumper
with the video unit.
in the connection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the
Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pic- connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not detected
ture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. there may be something wrong with the tap-off, connection
Check that coaxial cable line is charged with 75 Ohm: with bracket or monitor.
monitors in series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the con-
nection brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. If you
cannot find the fault there may be something wrong with the
monitor.
Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
Check that the J1 jumper is connected on the entrance panel.
Check that the voltage between 1,2 of the audio unit, without
pushing the auto switch-on button is 5 ± 10% Vdc. If you can-
not find the fault there may be something wrong with the audio
unit.
Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led
flash. Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find
the fault, there may be something wrong with the connection
bracket or the monitor.
Blank screen on all the monitors.
Check the connection between the video unit and the audio
unit. Check that the coaxial cable to the monitors is connected
to the V1 and M terminals of the video unit. If splitters have
been used in the distribution, check that the voltage between +,
- of the splitters is 14 ± 15% Vdc. If failure is not detected,
there may be something wrong with the audio unit, video unit
or any splitter.

301
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY
HOUSING ESTATE WITH SEVERAL BUILDINGS
Nothing works. You cannot hear an entrance panel on any moni-
Check the mains voltage in the power supplies. Check that tor/telephone.
the voltage between V~, of the power supply is 12 ± 10% Check connections 4,2 from the audio unit to all the moni-
Vac. Check wether there is a short circuit and fix it. Disconnect tors. Check the volume control on the monitors on the entrance
the power supply for 1 minute and then connect it up again. panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
If it still doesn't work, disconnect all the power supply wrong with the audio unit.
V~, terminals, and check that the voltage between V~, is You cannot hear the entrance panel on a moni-
12 ± 10% Vac, if it is not, then there may be something wrong tor/telephone.
with the power supply. Check connections 4,2 from the connection bracket to the
The card holders don't light up. audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
Check that the voltage between V~, of the power supply is wrong with the monitor.
12 ± 10% Vac.Check that the voltage between 9,10 in the The sound produces feedback.
audio unit, with the lighting push button activated, is 12 ± Lower the sound level using the volume control on the audio
10%Vac. Check wether the lamp has burnt out. unit. If the feedback persists, remove the J2 jumper and repeat
The lighting push button pilot does not light up. the adjustment.
Check that the voltage between the V~, of the audio unit The electric lock doesn’t work.
is 12 ± 10% Vac. If the voltage is correct, there may be some- Check that the voltage between 1,2 in the audio unit, without
thing wrong with the audio unit. pressing the lock release button, is 5 ± 10% Vdc. Check that
The call tone doesn’t ring on any monitor. the voltage between 11,12 in the audio unit, when you press
Check that the voltage between 7,2 in the audio unit, without the lock release button, is 12 ± 10% Vac. If you cannot find
pressing the push button, is 14.5 Vdc. Check the connection the fault, the electric lock may be broken.
between 7 in the audio unit and the push buttons. Check con- In multiple access installation, when you call one
nection 2 from the audio unit to the monitors. If you cannot find of the panels the rest of the panels in the system are
the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit. not disabled.
The call tone doesn’t ring in a monitor. Make certain that connectors 17,18 on the entrance panels
Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check the con- are connected up. If this is the case, check connections 16 on
nection between the connection bracket and the monitor. the entrance panels and make certain that the voltage between
Check connections 5,2 from the conection bracket to the 16,18 on the entrance panels is 4 ± 10% Vdc. Check that the
entrance panel. Check the push-button connection on the audio voltage between 17, 18 in each one of the audio unit is 8
unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong ±10% Vdc when you press the push button on one of the
with monitor or the panel push-button. panels. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
wrong with the audio units.
You cannot hear the call confirmation on the
entrance panel. The video system does not work in any monitor:
auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei-
Check that you can hear the monitors on the entrance panel.
ving a call,..
Check that the call tone rings on the monitors. If you cannot
find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds
unit. the monitors. Check that the voltage of the power supply bet-
ween +, - is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the +, - conexion between
No monitor/telephone can be heard from the
the power supply and the video unit and that the voltage is 15
entrance panel.
± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short circuit and rectify it.
Check connections 3,2 from the audio unit to all the moni- Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1 minute and recon-
tors. Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find nect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the +, - ter-
the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit. minals from the power supply unit and check that voltage bet-
One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the ween +, - is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it's not correct, there may be
entrance panel. something wrong with the power supply.
Check connections 3,2 from the connection bracket/telepho-
ne to the audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
something wrong with the connection bracket/telephone or the
monitor.

302
 Video system does not work in one monitor: auto Blank screen on all the monitors.
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a Check the connection between the video unit and the audio
call,.. unit. Check that the coaxial cable to the monitors is connected
Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON posi- to the V1 and M terminals of the video unit. If splitters have
tion (on the left). Check that the red led of the monitor is on. been used in the distribution, check that the voltage between +,
Check the connection between the connection bracket and the - of the splitters is 14 ± 15% Vdc. If failure is not detected,
monitor. Check that the voltage between +, - of the connection there may be something wrong with the audio unit, video unit
bracket is 14 ± 15% Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may or any splitter.
be something wrong with the monitor. Blank screen on all the monitors of a flat.
Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted Check the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the con-
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. nection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the connec-
Check that you have only one entrance panel defined as the tion bracket to the video unit. If splitters have been used in the
main one. Check that the voltage of the video units between +, distribution, check that the voltage between +, - of the splitters
- is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If splitters have been used in the distribu- is 14 Vdc ± 15%. If the fault cannot be found, there may be
tion, check that the voltage between +, - of the splitters is 14 something wrong with the tap-off of that floor or the splitter of
± 15% Vdc. Check that coaxial cable line has a 75 Ohm load: the flat.
a) if tap-offs have been connected in series the 75 Ohm resis- Blank screen on one of the monitors of a house or
tance must be removed from all the intermediate tap-offs; b) flat.
with monitors in series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the
Check the connection between the connection bracket and
connection brackets, but from the one at the end of the line; c)
the monitor. Check the connections of the coaxial cable in the
Check that resistences of 75 ohms are connected in the unused
monitor's connection bracket. If splitters have been used in the
terminals V2, M. Check coaxial connection in splitters and tap-
distribution, check the position of the J1 configuration jumper
offs. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong
in the connection bracket. Check coaxial's connection from the
with the video unit.
connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not detected
Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pic- there may be something wrong with the tap-off, connection
ture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. bracket or monitor.
Check that coaxial cable line is charged with 75 Ohm: with
monitors in series cut the 75 Ohm resistances on all the con-
nection brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. If you
cannot find the fault there may be something wrong with the
monitor.
Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
Check that you have only one entrance panel defined as the
main one. Make certain that connectors 17,18 on the entran-
ce panels are connected up. Check that the voltage between
1,2 of the audio unit, without pushing the auto switch-on button
is 5 ± 10% Vdc. If you cannot find the fault there may be some-
thing wrong with the audio unit.
Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led
flash. Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find
the fault, there may be something wrong with the connection
bracket or the monitor.

303
ELECTRONIC VIDEO DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS.
ELECTRONIC CALL.
CONVENTIONAL 6+N+TWISTED PAIR
STANDARD INSTALLATION IN BUILDING
Nothing works. One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds entrance panel.
the audio unit. Check that the voltage between V~, of the Check connections 3,2 from the connection bracket/telepho-
power supply is 12 ± 10% Vac. Check wether there is a short ne to the audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
circuit and fix it. Disconnect the power supply for 1 minute and something wrong with the connection bracket/telephone or the
then connect it up again. monitor.
If it still doesn't work, disconnect all the power supply You cannot hear the entrance panel on any moni-
V~, terminals, and check that the voltage between V~, is tor/telephone.
12 ± 10% Vac, if it is not, then there may be something wrong Check connections 4,2 from the audio unit to all the moni-
with the power supply. tors. Check the volume control on the monitors on the entrance
The card holders don't light up. panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
Check that the voltage between V~, of the power supply is wrong with the audio unit.
12 ± 10% Vac.Check that the voltage between 9,10 in the You cannot hear the entrance panel on a moni-
audio unit, with the lighting push button activated, is 12 ± tor/telephone.
10%Vac. Check wether the lamp has burnt out. Check connections 4,2 from the connection bracket to the
The lighting push button pilot does not light up. audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
Check that the voltage between the V~, of the audio unit wrong with the monitor.
is 12 ± 10% Vac. If the voltage is correct, there may be some- The sound produces feedback.
thing wrong with the audio unit. Lower the sound level using the volume control on the audio
The call tone doesn’t ring on any monitor. unit. If the feedback persists, remove the J2 jumper and repeat
Check that the voltage between 7,2 in the audio unit, without the adjustment.
pressing the push button, is 14.5 Vdc. Check the connection The electric lock doesn’t work.
between 7 in the audio unit and the push buttons. Check con- Check that the voltage between 1,2 in the audio unit, without
nection 2 from the audio unit to the monitors. If you cannot find pressing the lock release button, is 5 ± 10% Vdc. Check that
the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit. the voltage between 11,12 in the audio unit, when you press
The call tone doesn’t ring in a monitor. the lock release button, is 12 ± 10% Vac. If you cannot find
Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check the con- the fault, the electric lock may be broken.
nection between the connection bracket and the monitor. The video system does not work in any monitor:
Check connections 5,2 from the conection bracket to the auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei-
entrance panel. Check the push-button connection on the audio ving a call,..
unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds
with monitor or the panel push-button. the monitors. Check that the voltage of the power supply bet-
You cannot hear the call confirmation on the ween +, - is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short circuit and
entrance panel. rectify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1 minute
Check that you can hear the monitors on the entrance panel. and reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the
Check that the call tone rings on the monitors. If you cannot +, - terminals from the power supply unit and check that volta-
find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio ge between +, - is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it's not correct, there may
unit. be something wrong with the power supply.
No monitor/telephone can be heard from the
entrance panel.
Check connections 3,2 from the audio unit to all the moni-
tors. Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find
the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit.

304
 Video system does not work in one monitor: auto Blank screen on all the monitors.
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a Check that the twisted pair to the monitors is connected to the
call,.. T1+,T1_ terminals of the video unit. Check the connection bet-
Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON posi- ween the video and the audio units. If splitters have been used
tion (on the left). Check that the red led of the monitor is on. in the distribution, check that the voltage between +,- of the
Check the connection between the connection bracket and the splitters is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the connections of the twisted
monitor. Check that the voltage between +, - of the connection pair from the video unit to the monitors. If failure is not detec-
bracket is 14 ± 15% Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may ted, there may be something wrong with the video unit, any
be something wrong with the monitor. tap-off or any splitter.
Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted Blank screen on all the monitors of a flat.
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. Check the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the con-
Check the polarity of the twisted pair. nection brackets. Check twisted pair's connection from the con-
If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the nection bracket to the video unit. If splitters have been used in
voltage between +, - of the splitters is 14 ± 10% Vdc. Check the distribution, check that the voltage between +,- of the split-
that twisted pair line has a 120 Ohm load: a) if tap-offs have ters is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If failure is not detected there may be
been connected in series the 120 Ohm resistance must be something wrong with the tap-off in that floor, with the splitter,
removed from all the intermediate tap-offs; b) with monitors in connection bracket or monitor.
series cut the 120 Ohm resistances on all the connection brac- Blank screen on one of the monitors of a house or
kets, but from the one at the end of the line; c) check that resis- flat.
tences of 120 Ohm are connected in the unused terminals Check the connection between the connection bracket and
T2+,T2-. Check twisted pair connection in splitters and tap-offs. the monitor. Check the connections of the twisted pair in the
If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with monitor's connection bracket. Check twisted pair's connection
the video unit. from the connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not
Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pic- detected there may be something wrong with the tap-off, con-
ture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. nection bracket or monitor.
Check the polarity of the twisted pair.
Check that twisted pair line is charged with 120 Ohm: with
monitors in series cut the 120 Ohm resistances on all the con-
nection brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. Check
the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the connection
brackets. If you cannot find the fault there may be something
wrong with the monitor.
Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
Check that the J1 jumper is connected on the entrance panel.
Check that the voltage between 1,2 of the audio unit, without
pushing the auto switch-on button is 5 ± 10% Vdc. If you can-
not find the fault there may be something wrong with the audio
unit.
Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led
flash. Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find
the fault, there may be something wrong with the connection
bracket or the monitor.

305
INSTALLATION IN BUILDING WITH SEVERAL POINTS OF ENTRY
HOUSING ESTATE WITH SEVERAL BUILDINGS
Nothing works. One monitor/telephone cannot be heard from the
Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds entrance panel.
the audio unit. Check that the voltage between V~, of the Check connections 3,2 from the connection bracket/telepho-
power supply is 12 ± 10% Vac. Check wether there is a short ne to the audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be
circuit and fix it. Disconnect the power supply for 1 minute and something wrong with the connection bracket/telephone or the
then connect it up again. monitor.
If it still doesn't work, disconnect all the power supply You cannot hear an entrance panel on any moni-
V~, terminals, and check that the voltage between V~, is tor/telephone.
12 ± 10% Vac, if it is not, then there may be something wrong Check connections 4,2 from the audio unit to all the moni-
with the power supply. tors. Check the volume control on the monitors on the entrance
The card holders don't light up. panel. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
Check that the voltage between V~, of the power supply is wrong with the audio unit.
12 ± 10% Vac.Check that the voltage between 9,10 in the You cannot hear the entrance panel on a moni-
audio unit, with the lighting push button activated, is 12 ± tor/telephone.
10%Vac. Check wether the lamp has burnt out. Check connections 4,2 from the connection bracket to the
The lighting push button pilot does not light up. audio unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something
Check that the voltage between the V~, of the audio unit wrong with the monitor.
is 12 ± 10% Vac. If the voltage is correct, there may be some- The sound produces feedback.
thing wrong with the audio unit. Lower the sound level using the volume control on the audio
The call tone doesn’t ring on any monitor. unit. If the feedback persists, remove the J2 jumper and repeat
Check that the voltage between 7,2 in the audio unit, without the adjustment.
pressing the push button, is 14.5 Vdc. Check the connection The electric lock doesn’t work.
between 7 in the audio unit and the push buttons. Check con- Check that the voltage between 1,2 in the audio unit, without
nection 2 from the audio unit to the monitors. If you cannot find pressing the lock release button, is 5 ± 10% Vdc. Check that
the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit. the voltage between 11,12 in the audio unit, when you press
The call tone doesn’t ring in a monitor. the lock release button, is 12 ± 10% Vac. If you cannot find
Check that the handset is not off the hook. Check the con- the fault, the electric lock may be broken.
nection between the connection bracket and the monitor. When you call one of the panels the rest of the
Check connections 5,2 from the conection bracket to the panels in the system are not disabled.
entrance panel. Check the push-button connection on the audio Make certain that connectors 17,18 on the panels are con-
unit. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong nected up. If this is the case, check connections 16 on the
with monitor or the panel push-button. entrance panels. Check that the voltage between 17,18 in
You cannot hear the call confirmation on the each one of the audio unit is 8 ±10% Vdc and that the voltage
entrance panel. between 16,18 on the entrance panels is 4 ± 10% Vdc, when
Check that you can hear the monitors on the entrance panel. you press the push button on one of the panels. If you cannot
Check that the call tone rings on the monitors. If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio
find the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio units.
unit. The video system does not work in any monitor:
No monitor/telephone can be heard from the auto switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when recei-
entrance panel. ving a call,..
Check connections 3,2 from the audio unit to all the moni- Check the mains voltage in the power supply unit that feeds
tors. Check the volume control on the panel. If you cannot find the monitors. Check that the voltage of the power supply bet-
the fault, there may be something wrong with the audio unit. ween +, - is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check if there's a short circuit and
rectify it. Disconnect the power supplies supply for 1 minute
and reconnect it. If the breakdown continues, disconnect all the
+, - terminals from the power supply unit and check that volta-
ge between +, - is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If it's not correct, there may
be something wrong with the power supply.

306
 Video system does not work in one monitor: auto Blank screen on all the monitors.
switch-on, screen doesn´t come on when receiving a Check that the twisted pair to the monitors is connected to the
call,.. T1+,T1_ terminals of the video unit. Check the connection bet-
Check that the ON/OFF switch for the video is in ON posi- ween the video and the audio units. If splitters have been used
tion (on the left). Check that the red led of the monitor is on. in the distribution, check that the voltage between +,- of the
Check the connection between the connection bracket and the splitters is 15 ± 10% Vdc. Check the connections of the twisted
monitor. Check that the voltage between +, - of the connection pair from the video unit to the monitors. If failure is not detec-
bracket is 14 ± 15% Vdc. If failure cannot be found, there may ted, there may be something wrong with the video unit, any
be something wrong with the monitor. tap-off or any splitter.
Poor image quality on all the monitors: distorted Blank screen on all the monitors of a flat.
picture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. Check the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the con-
Check the polarity of the twisted pair. nection brackets. Check twisted pair's connection from the con-
If splitters have been used in the distribution, check that the nection bracket to the video unit. If splitters have been used in
voltage between +, - of the splitters is 14 ± 10% Vdc. Check the distribution, check that the voltage between +,- of the split-
that twisted pair line has a 120 Ohm load: a) if tap-offs have ters is 15 ± 10% Vdc. If failure is not detected there may be
been connected in series the 120 Ohm resistance must be something wrong with the tap-off in that floor, with the splitter,
removed from all the intermediate tap-offs; b) with monitors in connection bracket or monitor.
series cut the 120 Ohm resistances on all the connection brac- Blank screen on one of the monitors of a house or
kets, but from the one at the end of the line; c) check that resis- flat.
tences of 120 Ohm are connected in the unused terminals Check the connection between the connection bracket and
T2+,T2-. Check twisted pair connection in splitters and tap-offs. the monitor. Check the connections of the twisted pair in the
If you cannot find the fault, there may be something wrong with monitor's connection bracket. Check twisted pair's connection
the video unit. from the connection bracket to the video unit. If failure is not
Poor image quality on one monitor: distorted pic- detected there may be something wrong with the tap-off, con-
ture, ghost images, loss of synchronisation. nection bracket or monitor.
Check the polarity of the twisted pair.
Check that twisted pair line is charged with 120 Ohm: with
monitors in series cut the 120 Ohm resistances on all the con-
nection brackets, but from the one at the end of the line. Check
the position of the J1 configuration jumper in the connection
brackets. If you cannot find the fault there may be something
wrong with the monitor.
Auto switch-on does not work on any monitor.
Check that the J1 jumper is connected on the entrance panel.
Check that the voltage between 1,2 of the audio unit, without
pushing the auto switch-on button is 5 ± 10% Vdc. If you can-
not find the fault there may be something wrong with the audio
unit.
Auto switch-on does not work on one monitor.
Check that pushing the auto switch-on button the red led
flash. Check that the system is not engaged. If you cannot find
the fault, there may be something wrong with the connection
bracket or the monitor.

307
TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATIONS
STANDARD INSTALLATION
There is no image in the - , + connections of the video unit. Check that the volta-
Check that the channel to which the television has been tuned ge between the – and + terminals of the video unit is 15 Vdc
is the same as that selected in the modulator. Make sure that the ±10%. Check the connection of the coaxial cable from the
correct standard has been selected for your country. Check the video unit to the modulator. If you cannot find the fault, there
mains voltage in the modulator. If the LED operating indicator of may be something wrong with the modulator or with the video
the modulator is not lit up, check whether there is a short circuit unit.

TV DOOR ENTRY INSTALLATION IN A STANDARD DOOR ENTRY INSTALLA-

TION

If any type of problem related to the electronic door entry the modulator is not lit up, check whether there is a short cir-
system is encountered, consult the data sheets of the correspon- cuit in the - , + connections of the video unit. Check that the
ding audio unit. voltage between the – and + terminals of the video unit is 15
There is no image Vdc ±10%. Check the connection of the coaxial cable from the
video unit to the modulator. If you cannot find the fault, there
Check that the channel to which the television has been tuned
may be something wrong with the modulator or with the video
is the same as that selected in the modulator. Make sure that the
unit.
correct standard has been selected for your country. Check the
mains voltage in the modulator. If the LED operating indicator of

308
Especificaciones sujetas a modificación sin previo aviso.

ALCAD diseña y fabrica sus productos con las mejores características posibles, sin embargo los productos fabricados actualmente
pueden incorporar modificaciones para mejorar sus prestaciones y para adaptarse a nuevos componentes. Las nuevas especificaciones

ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS

pueden no aparecer en este manual. ALCAD revisará las especificaciones en próximas ediciones de este manual técnico.
ALCAD mantiene una web dónde se pueden consultar los datos de los productos más recientes y las especificaciones actualizadas
de todos los productos.

CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS
CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM

1000-10-07

T E C H N I C A L M A N U A L